manualshive.com logo in svg

Mitsubishi Electric FR-A800, Instruction Manual

The Mitsubishi Electric FR-A800 Instruction Manual is an essential tool for anyone using this advanced product. Easily download the user manual for free from our website, providing clear instructions and valuable information on operating and troubleshooting the FR-A800. Enhance your experience with this high-quality Mitsubishi Electric product.

Share
Download
background image

Parameters

(D) Operation command and frequency command

FR-A800

 5 - 271

When the X66 signal is ON, the NET operation mode is selected.

When the X16 signal is OFF, the PU operation mode is selected. Also, when "0" is set for Pr. 550 "NET
mode operation command source selection" and the communication option is not connected
(communication option is the command source), the PU operation mode is selected.

●

To switch between the Network operation mode and the External operation mode

Set Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value) or "2, "6" or "7". (When Pr. 79 = "7" and the X12 (MRS) signal is ON,
the operation mode can be switched.)

Set Pr. 340 "Communication startup mode selection" = "0" (initial value), "1" or "2".

Set "66" in one of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the NET-External operation switching signal (X66)
to a terminal.

#

When the X66 signal is ON, Network operation mode is selected. When the X66 signal is OFF,
the External operation mode is selected.

When Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = "0" (communication option
control source)" and no communication option is connected, the External operation mode is
selected.

When the X16 signal is OFF, the PU operation mode is selected. Also, when the X65 signal is
assigned, the operation mode follows the ON/OFF state of the X65 signal.

Pr. 340

setting

Pr. 79

setting

X65 signal state

Remarks

ON (PU)

OFF (NET)

10, 12

0 (initial value)

PU operation mode 

NET operation 

mode 

⎯

1

PU operation mode

PU operation mode fixed

2

NET operation mode

NET operation mode fixed

3, 4

External/PU combined operation mode

External/PU combined operation mode fixed

6

PU operation mode 

NET operation 

mode 

Switching between operation modes is 
enabled while running.

7

X12 (MRS)

ON

Switching between the External 

operation mode and PU operation mode 

is enabled. 

Output is shutoff in the External operation 
mode.

X12 (MRS)

OFF

External operation mode

The operation mode is forcibly switched to 
the External operation mode.

Tab. 5-105:

Operation mode switching by signal X65

Pr. 340

setting

Pr. 79

setting

X66 signal state

Remarks

ON (NET)

OFF (External)

0

 (initial 
value), 

1, 2

0 (initial value)

NET operation mode 

External operation 

mode 

⎯

1

PU operation mode

PU operation mode fixed

2

NET operation mode 

External operation 

mode

Switching to PU operation mode is 
disabled.

3, 4

External/PU combined operation mode

External/PU combined operation mode 
fixed

6

NET operation mode 

External operation 

mode 

Switching between operation modes is 
enabled while running.

7

X12 (MRS)

ON

NET operation mode 

External operation 

mode 

Output is shutoff in the External 
operation mode.

X12 (MRS)

OFF

External operation mode

The operation mode is forcibly switched 
to the External operation mode.

Tab. 5-106:

Operation mode switching by signal X66

Summary of Contents for FR-A800

Page 1: ...RIC MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FR A800 Inverter Instruction Manual FR A820 00046 0 4K to 04750 90K FR A840 00023 0 4K to 06830 280K FR A842 07700 315K to 12120 500K FR A846 00023 0 4K to 03610 132K Art no 274661 12 08 2016 Version F Version check ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...akl pdp gb Additions 앫 Separated converter type D 10 2014 akl Additions 앫 Motor permissible load level Pr 607 Pr 608 앫 FR A846 00023 0 4K to 00170 5 5K FR A846 00620 22K to 03610 132K F 08 2016 pdp rw akl Additions Changes 앫 Parameters Pr 394 395 606 635 638 673 674 679 683 851 852 855 862 863 876 1015 1016 1018 1298 1299 앫 Signals X48 X94 X95 X96 Y55 Y67 앫 Second droop control 앫 Cumulative pulse ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...o meets all the conditions below A person who took a proper engineering training Such training may be available at your local Mitsubishi Electric office Contact your local sales office for schedules and locations A personwho can accessoperating manuals fortheprotectivedevices e g light curtain connect ed to the safety control system A person who has read and familiarized himself herself with the m...

Page 6: ...rwise you may get an electric shock or be injured If your application requires by installation standards an RCD residual current device as up stream protection please select according to DIN VDE 0100 530 as following Single phase inverter type A or B Three phase inverter only type B Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock Other wise you may get an electr...

Page 7: ...rminals P N This could cause a fire and destroy the inverter The surface temperature of braking resistors can far exceed 100 C for brief periods Make sure that there is adequate protection against accidental contact and a safe distance is maintained to other units and system parts Be sure to perform daily and periodic inspections as specified in the Instruction Manual If a product is used without ...

Page 8: ... conductive bodies such as screws and metal fragments or other flammable substance such as oil from entering the inverter As the inverter is a precision instrument do not drop or subject it to impact If halogen based materials fluorine chlorine bromine iodine etc infiltrate into a Mitsub ishi product the product will be damaged Halogen based materials are often included in fumigant which is used t...

Page 9: ...r suddenly Do not use a PM motor for an application where the PM motor is driven by its load and runs at a speed higher than the maximum motor speed Performing pre excitation LX signal and X13 signal under torque control Real sensorless vector control may start the motor running at a low speed even when the start command STF or STR is not input The motor may run also at a low speed when the speed ...

Page 10: ...is performed set again the required parameters before starting operations Each parameter returns to the initial value The inverter can be easily set for high speed operation Before changing its setting fully examine the performances of the motor and machine The DC braking function of the frequency inverter is not designed to continuously hold a load Use an electro mechanical holding brake on the m...

Page 11: ...s refer to page 1 7 E CAUTION Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips check for the wiring fault short circuit damage to internal parts of the inverter etc Identify the cause of the trip then remove the cause and power on the breaker When the p...

Page 12: ... instructions Handling instructions are steps that must be carried out in their exact sequence during startup op eration maintenance and similar operations They are numbered consecutively black numbers in white circles Text Text Text Use of footnotes in tables Instructionsintablesareexplainedinfootnotesunderneaththetables insuperscript Thereisafoot note character at the appropriate position in the...

Page 13: ...ion attachment procedure 2 19 2 4 Terminal connection diagrams 2 21 2 4 1 FM type 2 21 2 4 2 CA type 2 23 2 5 Main circuit terminals 2 25 2 5 1 Details on the main circuit terminals 2 25 2 5 2 Terminal layout of the main circuit terminals wiring of power supply and the motor 2 26 2 5 3 Applicable cables and the wiring length 2 29 2 5 4 Earthing grounding precautions 2 34 2 6 Control circuit 2 36 2...

Page 14: ...4 Power OFF and magnetic contactor MC 3 17 3 5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation 3 19 3 6 Checklist before starting operation 3 20 3 7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter 3 23 4 Basic operation 4 1 Operation panel FR DU08 4 1 4 1 1 Components of the operation panel FR DU08 4 1 4 1 2 Basic operation of the operation panel 4 3 4 1 3 Correspondences between...

Page 15: ...ng the PM sensorless vector control 5 70 5 2 5 Low speed range torque characteristics 5 75 5 3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control vector control PM sensorless vector control 5 76 5 3 1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control speed control 5 79 5 3 2 Setting procedure of vector control speed control 5 81 5 3 3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control speed contr...

Page 16: ...l 5 196 5 7 5 PU contrast adjustment 5 196 5 7 6 Display off mode 5 197 5 7 7 Resetting USB host errors 5 197 5 7 8 Setting dial potentiometer mode key lock operation selection 5 198 5 7 9 Frequency change increment amount setting 5 200 5 7 10 Multiple rating setting 5 201 5 7 11 Using the power supply exceeding 480V 5 203 5 7 12 Parameter write selection 5 203 5 7 13 Password function 5 207 5 7 1...

Page 17: ...5 306 5 10 8 Retry function 5 307 5 10 9 Limiting the output frequency maximum minimum frequency 5 310 5 10 10 Avoiding the mechanical resonance points frequency jump 5 312 5 10 11 Stall prevention operation 5 314 5 10 12 Motor overspeeding detection 5 322 5 11 M Monitor display and monitor output signal 5 323 5 11 1 Speed display and rotations per minute setting 5 324 5 11 2 Monitor indicator sel...

Page 18: ...3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor motor constant tuning 5 454 5 13 4 Online auto tuning 5 465 5 13 5 Signal loss detection of encoder signals 5 469 5 14 A Application parameters 5 470 5 14 1 Electronic bypass function 5 471 5 14 2 Self power management 5 480 5 14 3 Brake sequence function 5 484 5 14 4 Stop on contact control 5 489 5 14 5 Load torque high speed frequency control 5 494 5 14 6 Tra...

Page 19: ...nction 5 671 5 16 9 Stop selection 5 673 5 16 10 Regenerative brake selection and DC feeding mode 5 675 5 16 11 Regeneration avoidance function 5 685 5 16 12 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration 5 689 5 16 13 Slip compensation 5 691 5 16 14 Encoder feedback control 5 692 5 16 15 Droop control 5 695 5 16 16 Speed smoothing control 5 699 5 17 Parameter clear all parameter clear 5 700 5 18 Copy...

Page 20: ...ic inspection 7 2 7 1 4 Checking the inverter and converter modules 7 4 7 1 5 Cleaning 7 5 7 1 6 Replacement of parts 7 6 7 1 7 Inverter replacement 7 11 7 2 Measurement of main circuit voltages currents and powers 7 12 7 2 1 Measurement of powers 7 15 7 2 2 Measurement of voltages and use of PT 7 16 7 2 3 Measurement of currents 7 17 7 2 4 Use of CT and transducer 7 18 7 2 5 Measurement of invert...

Page 21: ...ion comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control A 4 A 3 Parameters function codes and instruction codes under different control methods A 5 A 4 For customers using HMS network options A 39 A 4 1 List of inverter monitored items A 39 A 4 2 Direct command mode for position control A 42 A 5 EC Declarations of Conformity A 46 A 5 1 Low Voltage Directive A 46 A 5 2 EMC D...

Page 22: ...Contents XVIII ...

Page 23: ...nal operation SF JR Mitsubishi standard motor SF HRCA Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF V5RU Vector control dedicated motor MM CF Mitsubishi IPM motor Trademarks Microsoft and Visual C are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners Notes on d...

Page 24: ...n output Terminal AM analog voltage output 0 to 10 V DC OFF Sink logic 60 Hz 9999 same as the power supply voltage CA terminal CA equipped model Terminal CA analog current output 0 to 20 mA DC Terminal AM analog voltage output 0 to 10 V DC ON Sourcelogic 50 Hz 8888 95 of the power supply voltage Tab 1 1 Differences between the types F R A 8 4 0 00023 1 Symbol Voltage class Symbol Structure functio...

Page 25: ...0 C The inverter model name used in this Instruction Manual consists of the inverter model e g FR A840 00023 2 60 and the applicable motor capacity in brackets specified in kW This approach helps for better understanding and for choosing the right motor For further specifica tion details like capacity current or overload current rating refer to chapter 8 For selecting the right frequency inverter ...

Page 26: ...Component names Introduction 1 4 1 3 Component names Component names are shown below I002341E_F Fig 1 2 Appearance and structure ...

Page 27: ...control circuit 2 36 EMC filter ON OFF connector Turns ON OFF the EMC filter 3 9 Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit 2 25 Charge lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the main circuit 2 26 Wiring cover This cover is removable without unplugging cables FR A820 01250 22K or lower FR A840 00620 22K or lower 2 8 Alarm lamp Turns ON when the protective function of th...

Page 28: ... to give a frequency command Set from the PU PU External External Change frequency with ON OFF switches connected to terminals multi speed setting Perform frequency setting by a current output device Connection across terminals 4 and 5 Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device Connection across terminals 2 and 5 Set from the PU PU External External External Change of frequency with ON O...

Page 29: ...ternal PU combined operation mode 2 4 18 The PU gives a start command and current input to terminal 4 gives a frequency command External PU combined operation mode 2 4 20 Inputs to terminal STF and STR give a start command and the PU gives a frequency command External PU combined operation mode 1 4 22 Inputs to terminal STF and STR give a start command and inputs to terminal RH RM and RL give a fr...

Page 30: ...Related manuals Introduction 1 8 ...

Page 31: ...ces I002343E_B Fig 2 1 System configuration overview R L1 S L2 T L3 P1 P N P P P3 PR P P PR PR U V W U V W Personal computer FR Configurator2 USB IM connection PM connection Earth Ground Earth Ground Earth Ground USB device Mini B connector Install these options as required USB host A connector Communication status indicator LED USB host ...

Page 32: ... in an enclosure Incorrect wiring may lead to damage of the inverter The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit lines to protect them from noise The built in EMC filter can reduce the noise 2 12 2 21 3 9 Three phase AC power supply Must be within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter 8 1 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB earth leakage circuit breake...

Page 33: ...brake resistor FR ABR Improves the braking capability of the inverter built in brake Remove the jumper across the terminals PR and PX to connect this 7 5K or lower Always install a thermal relay when using a brake resistor whose capacity is 11K or higher 2 77 Noise filter ferrite core FR BSF01 FR BLF Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter The noise filter is e...

Page 34: ...n the inverter output side for commercial power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038 AC 3 class rated current Motor output kW Applicable inverter model Moldedcasecircuitbreaker MCCB or Earth leakage circuit breaker ELB NF NV type Input side magnetic contactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Power factor improving...

Page 35: ...netic contactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Without With Without With 0 4 FR A840 00023 0 4K 5A 5A S T10 S T10 0 75 FR A840 00038 0 75K 5A 5A S T10 S T10 1 5 FR A840 00052 1 5K 10A 10A S T10 S T10 2 2 FR A840 00083 2 2K 10A 10A S T10 S T10 3 7 FR A840 00126 3 7K 20A 15A S T10 S T10 5 5 FR A840 00170 5 5K 30A 20A S T21 S T12 7 5 FR A840 00250 7 5K...

Page 36: ... class rated current When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038 AC 3 class rated current Fig 2 3 Installation of the breakers I002770E NOTES The above shows a selection example for the ND rating For selecting the SLD rating LD rating or HD rating refer to the Te...

Page 37: ...n the operation panel These screws cannot be removed Press the upper edge of the operation panel while pulling out the operation panel To reinstall the operation panel align its connector on the back with the PU connector of the inverter and insert the operation panel After confirming that the operation panel is fit securely tighten the screws Tightening torque 0 40 to 0 45 Nm I002344E I002345E Fi...

Page 38: ...s can be performed Removal of the front cover upper side FR A820 01540 30K or lower FR A840 00770 30K or lower Withthe frontcover lowerside removed loosen themountingscrew s onthe front cover upper side The screw s cannot be removed FR A820 00340 5 5K to FR A820 01540 30K and FR A840 00170 5 5K to FR A840 00770 30K have two mounting screws Holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sid...

Page 39: ...er into place Tighten the mounting screw s at the lower part of the front cover upper side FR A820 00340 5 5K to FR A820 01540 30K and FR A840 00170 5 5K to FR A840 00770 30K have two mounting screws Install the front cover lower side by inserting the upper hook into the socket of the front cover upper side Tighten the mounting screws at the lower part of the front cover lower side I002348E Fig 2 ...

Page 40: ...cover upper side FR A820 01870 37K or higher FR A840 00930 37K or higher With the front cover lower side removed loosen the mounting screws on the front cover upper side These screws cannot be removed Holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the front cover upper side pull out the cover using its upper side as a support With the front cover upper side removed wiring of the R...

Page 41: ...ockets of the inverter Securely install the front cover upper side to the inverter by fixing the hooks on the sides of the cover into place Tighten the mounting screw s at the lower part of the front cover upper side Fasten the front cover lower side with the mounting screws I002351E Fig 2 10 Reinstallation of the front covers NOTE Fully make sure that the front covers are installed securely Alway...

Page 42: ...siblesurroundingairtemperatureoftheinverterisbetween 10 Cand 50 C 10 Cand 40 C at the SLD rating Always operate the inverter within this temperature range Operation out sidethisrangewillconsiderablyshorten the service livesof the semiconductors parts capacitors and others Take the following measures to keep the surrounding air temperature of the inverter within the specified range Measures against...

Page 43: ...Control Equipment Insulator is humidity of 45 to 85 Measures against high humidity Make the enclosure enclosed and provide it with a hygroscopic agent Provide dry air into the enclosure from outside Provide a space heater in the enclosure Measures against low humidity Air with proper humidity can be blown into the enclosure from outside Also when installing or inspecting the unit discharge your bo...

Page 44: ...ure Inplaces where explosion may be caused by explosive gas dust or dirt an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurallycomplieswiththeguidelines andhaspassedthespecified tests This makestheenclosure itselfexpensive includingthe testcharges The bestwayis toavoidinstallationin such placesandin stall the inverter in a non hazardous place High altitude Use the inverter at an altitude of within 100...

Page 45: ...oler etc Cooling system Enclosure structure Comment Natural cooling Natural ventilation enclosed open type I001000E This system is low in cost and generally used but the enclosure size increases as the inverter capacity increases This system is for relatively small capacities Natural ventilation totally enclosed type I001001E Being a totally enclosed type this system is the most appropriate for ho...

Page 46: ...crews Leave enough clearances and take cooling measures Avoid places where the inverter is subjected to direct sunlight high temperature and high humidity Install the inverter on a nonflammable wall surface When encasing multiple inverters install them in parallel as a cooling measure Fig 2 11 Installation on the panel I002353E Fixsix positions for the FR A840 04320 160K or higher ...

Page 47: ...he SLD ratedinverter side by sideinstallation 0 cm clearance is available For replacing the cooling fan of the FR A840 04320 160K or higher 30 cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter Refer to page 7 7 for fan replacement Installation orientation of the inverter Install the inverter on a wall as specified Do not mount it horizontally or any other way Above the inverter Heat is blown up fr...

Page 48: ...the permissible value by providing ventilation and increasing the enclosure size Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan When installing a ventilation fan for that heat determine the place of ventilation fan installation after fully considering an air flow Air passes through areas of low r...

Page 49: ...tside the enclosure using a heatsink protrusion attachment FR A8CN For the FR A840 04320 160K or higher attachment is not necessary when the heatsink is to be protruded For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the heatsink protrusion attach ment FR A8CN to the inverter refer to a manual of FR A8CN Protrusion of heatsink of the FR A840 04320 160K or higher Panel cutting Cu...

Page 50: ...t and removal of a rear side installation frame I002802E I002803E Fig 2 16 Installation on the control cabinet wall NOTES Having a cooling fan the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water drops oil mist dust etc Be careful not to drop screws dust etc into the inverter and cooling fan section Shift Upper installation frames Shift Lower installation...

Page 51: ...equency setting signal analog Auxiliary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10V DC 4 20mA DC 0 10V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5V DC 0 5V DC 0 10V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Indica...

Page 52: ...tween PR and PX to connect the brake resistor FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower Connect a brake resistor across terminals P P3 and PR The terminal PR is equipped in the FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors Refer to page 2 77 Do not connect the DC power supply under DC f...

Page 53: ...nal analog Auxiliary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10V DC 4 20mA DC 0 10V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5V DC 0 5V DC 0 10V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Analog signal output 0 to...

Page 54: ...kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently Remove the jumper between PR and PX to connect the brake resistor FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower Connect a brake resistor across terminals P P3 and PR The terminal PR is equipped in the FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of dischar...

Page 55: ...P3 and PR Connecting a brake resistor increases the regenerative braking capability P N Brake unit connection FR A820 00630 11K or lower FR A840 00380 15K or lower Connect the brake unit FR BU2 FR BU BU power regeneration common converter FR CV power regeneration converter MT RC high power factor converter FR HC2 or DC power supply under DC feeding mode When connecting multiple inverters FR A820 0...

Page 56: ... A820 01250 22K FR A840 00470 18 5K FR A840 00620 22K FR A820 01540 30K FR A840 00770 30K I002361E I002362E Tab 2 8 Terminal layout and wiring 1 R L1 S L2 T L3 N P PR PX R1 L11 S1 L21 Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper M R L1S L2 T L3 N P PR R1 L11 S1 L21 PX Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper M N P PR PX R1 L11 S1 L21 R L1 S L2 T L3 Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper ...

Page 57: ...0 90K FR A840 05470 220K to FR A840 06830 280K I002367E I002804E Tab 2 8 Terminal layout and wiring 2 R L1S L2T L3 N P P1 R1 L11 S1 L21 Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper M R L1 S L2 T L3 N P P3 PR R1 L11 S1 L21 Jumper CHARGE lamp Power supply M Jumper R L1 S L2 T L3 N P P R1 L11 S1 L21 CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply M DC reactor For option Jumper R L1 S L2 T L3 N P P1 R1 L11 S1 L21 CHAR...

Page 58: ...he inverter Doing so will damage the inverter Connect the motor to U V and W The phase need to be matched When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the FR A840 05470 220K or higher tighten a nut from the right side of the conductor When wiring two wires place wires on both sides of the conductor Refer to the drawing For wiring use bolts nuts provided with the inverter I000999E Fig 2 19 Co...

Page 59: ...e R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W Earthing ground ing cable 00046 0 4K to 00167 2 2K M4 1 5 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2 5 2 5 2 5 00250 3 7K M4 1 5 5 5 4 5 5 4 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 12 12 4 4 4 00340 5 5K M5 M4 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 6 6 6 00490 7 5K M5 M4 2 5 14 5 8 5 14 8 14 5 5 6 8 16 10 16 00630 11K M5 2 5 14 5 14 5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00770 15K M6 4 4 22 6 22 6 22 22 22 14 ...

Page 60: ...0 01800 55K or higher it is the gauge of a cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90 C XLPE cable It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40 C or lower and in enclosure wiring Selection example for use mainly in Europe Applicable inverter model FR A840 첸 Terminal screw size Tighten ing torque Nm Crimping terminal Cable gauge HIV cables etc mm2 AWG MCM PVC cables etc mm2 R...

Page 61: ...ge drop can be calculated by the following formula Usea largerdiameter cablewhenthewiring distanceis long orwhenit is desired to decreasethevolt age drop torque reduction in the low speed range Line voltage drop V 3 Wire resistance mΩ m Wiring distance m x Current A 1000 NOTES The above shows a selection example for the ND rating For selecting the SLD rating LD rating or HD rating refer to the Tec...

Page 62: ...e FR A840 02160 75K or higher connect a sine wave filter MT BSL BSC at the output side of the inverter With PM motor The wiring length should be 100 m or shorter when connecting a PM motor Use one PM motor for one inverter Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter When the wiring length exceeds 50 m for a 400 V class motor driven by an inverter under PM sensor less vector control set 9...

Page 63: ...ter output side If the fast response current limit function malfunctions disable this function Refer to Pr 156 Stall prevention operation selection on page 5 314 A surge voltage suppression filter FR ASF H FR BMF H can be used under V F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control A sine wave filter MT BSL BSC can be used under V F control Do not use the filters under different control method...

Page 64: ...earthing grounding for the inverter If independent earthing grounding I is not available use II common earthing grounding in the figure below where the inverter is connected with the other equipment at an earthing grounding point Donotusetheotherequipment searthing grounding cabletoearth ground the inverter as shown in III A leakage current containing many high frequency components flows into the ...

Page 65: ...rthing the drive NOTE To be compliant with the EU Directive Low Voltage Directive refer to the Installation Guideline I Independent earthing Good II Common earthing Good III Common earthing cable Not allowed Inverter Other equipment Inverter Other equipment Inverter Other equipment ...

Page 66: ...e second function such as second torque boost and second V F base frequency is set turning ON the RT signal enables the selected function Input resistance 4 7 kΩ Voltage when contacts are open 21 to 27 V DC When contacts are short circuited 4 to 6 mA DC 5 428 MRS Output stop Turn ON the MRS signal 20 ms or more to stop the inverter output Use this signal to shut off the inverter output when stoppi...

Page 67: ...sition to select current input 0 to 20 mA When voltage is input Input resistance 10 kΩ 1 kΩ Maximum permissiblevoltage 20 V DC When current is input Input resistance 245 Ω 5 Ω Permissible maximum current 30 mA 5 389 4 Frequency setting current Inputting 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V provides the maximum output frequency at 20 mA and makes input and output proportional This input signal is va...

Page 68: ...3 OL Overload warning Switched to LOW when stall prevention is activated by the stall prevention function Switched to HIGH when stall prevention is cancelled 5 322 IPF Instantaneouspower failure Switched to LOW when an instantaneous power failure occurs or when the undervoltage protection is activated 5 562 5 580 FU Frequency detection Switched to LOW when the inverter output frequency is equal to...

Page 69: ...e terminals S1 and S2 are used for the safety stop input signal for the safety relay module The terminals S1 and S2 are used at the same time dual channel Inverter output is shutoff by shortening opening between terminals S1 and SIC or between S2 and SIC In the initial status terminals S1 and S2 are shorted with the terminal PC by shorting wires The terminal SIC is shorted with the terminal SD Rem...

Page 70: ...logic The control logic of input signals is initially set to the sink logic SINK for the FM type The control logic of input signals is initially set to the source logic SOURCE for the CA type The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper con nector position I002370E Fig 2 22 Changing the control logic NOTES Make sure that the jumper connector is inst...

Page 71: ...ent flows into the corresponding signal input terminal Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals I001029E Fig 2 23 Changing the control logic RUN RUN TB1 TB1 TB17 TB18 Current flow concerning the input output signals when sink logic is selected Current flow concerning the input output signals when source logic is selected Current ...

Page 72: ...low Do not connect terminal PC of the inverter with the terminal 24 V of the external power supply When using terminals PC SD as a 24 V DC power supply do not install an external power supply in parallel with the inverter Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents Fig 2 24 Using an external power supply in connection with the outputs of a PLC sink logic I002371E F...

Page 73: ... Insert the blade terminal or the single wire into a socket of the terminal Strip off the sheath for the below length If the length of the sheath peeled is too long a short circuit may occur with neighbouring wires If the length is too short wires might come off Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose In addition do not solder it I002373E Fig 2 26 Terminal layou...

Page 74: ... the wires into a socket I002396E Fig 2 28 Crimped wire end sleeves Cable gauge mm2 Blade terminal model Crimping tool With insulation sleeve Without insulation sleeve For UL wire 0 3 AI 0 5 10WH CRIMPFOX 6 0 5 AI 0 5 10WH AI 0 5 10WH GB 0 75 AI 0 75 10GY A 0 75 10 AI 0 75 10GY GB 1 AI 1 10RD A 1 10 AI 1 10RD 1000GB 1 25 1 5 AI 1 5 10BK A 1 5 10 AI 1 5 10BK 1000GB 0 75 for two wires AI TWIN 2 0 75...

Page 75: ...ical to the open close button In case the blade tip slips it may cause an inverter damage or injury Fig 2 31 Wire removal I002400E NOTES Pulling out the wire forcefully without pushing the open close button all the way down may dam age the terminal block Use a small flathead screwdriver tip thickness 0 4 mm tip width 2 5 mm If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used terminal block may be ...

Page 76: ... RES AU CS Every contact input terminal is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting terminals 2 1 or 4 and the analog outputterminals AM CA Itshouldbeprotectedfromexternalnoiseusingashieldedortwisted cable Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminals RUN SU OL IPF FU The contact input circuit is...

Page 77: ... common terminal of the connected control circuit terminal When connecting an external power supply to the terminal PC however connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side of the external power supply Do not directly earth ground the shield to the enclosure etc Alwaysapplyavoltagetothefaultoutputterminals A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 viaarelaycoil lamp etc For the FR A820 03160 55K or hi...

Page 78: ...inals R1 L11andS1 L21areprovidedtoholdafaultsignal Inthiscase connectthepowersupplyterminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 of the control circuit to the input side of the MC Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals Doing so may damage the inverter FR A820 00250 3 7K or lower FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower Remove the upper screws Remove the lower screws Remove the jumper Connect the separate power su...

Page 79: ...0170 5 5K to FR A840 00380 15K Remove the upper screws Remove the lower screws Remove the jumper Connect the separate power supply cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals R1 L11 S1 L21 I002847E Fig 2 37 Detailed view of the terminals T L3 S L2 R L1 S1 L21 R1 L11 Main circuit terminal block ...

Page 80: ...is supplied from other than the input side of the MC The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1 L11 and S1 L21 differs according to the inverter capacity If the main circuit power is switched OFF for 0 1 s or more then ON again the inverter is reset and a fault output will not be held R1 L11 S1 L21 R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 MC Main power supply FR A820 00770 15K to 012...

Page 81: ...er while supplying 24 V external power starts the 24 V external power supply operation Turning ON the main circuit power stops the 24 V external power supply operation and enables the normal operation Item Rated specification Input voltage 23 to 25 5 V DC Input current 1 4 A or less Tab 2 19 Specification of the applicable 24 V external power supply Model Manufacturer S8JX N05024C Specifications C...

Page 82: ...ply operation can be confirmed even when the operation panel is removed During the 24 V external power supply operation the 24 V external power supply operation signal EV isoutput TousetheEVsignal set 68 positivelogic or 168 negativelogic inoneofPr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign function to an output terminal I002380E Fig 2 39 Confirming the 24 V external power supply i...

Page 83: ...ower supply specification may flow at power ON Confirm that the power supply and other devices are not affected by the inrush cur rent and the voltage drop caused by it Depending on the power supply the inrush current pro tection may be activated to disable the power supply Select the power supply and capacity carefully When the wiring length between the external power supply and the inverter is l...

Page 84: ...faults shown on page 2 56 Terminal symbol Terminal function description S1 For input of the safety stop channel 1 Between S1 and SIC S2 and SIC Open In safety stop mode Short Other than the safety stop mode S2 For input of the safety stop channel 2 SIC Common terminal for S1 and S2 SO Outputs when an alarm or failure is detected The signal is output when no internal safety circuit failure exists O...

Page 85: ...ller across the terminals SO and SOC The reset button acts as the feedback input for the safety relay module or the safety programmable controller I002381E_F Fig 2 40 Connecting the Safety relay module R L1S L2 T L3 U V W SO SOC S1 S2 G G SIC SD PC 24V RESET Logic CPU Fuse ASIC Gate Driver Gate Driver IGBTs Emergency stop button Safety relay module Safety programmable controller 24 V DC M Frequenc...

Page 86: ...put terminal Inverter operation enable signal Operation panel indication S1 S2 SO E SAF SA OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe state Not displayed Not displayed ON Normal ON ON ON Drive enabled Not displayed Not displayed Normal ON OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe state Displayed Displayed Normal OFF ON OFF Output shutoff Safe state Displayed Displayed Normal OFF OFF ON Output shutoff Safe state Not displayed ...

Page 87: ... from a personal computer etc When the PU connector is connected with a personal FA or other computer by a communication cable a user program can run to monitor the inverter or read and write parameters Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol computer link operation For the details refer to page 5 600 I002382E_F Fig 2 41 Connecting a parameter unit or the operation pan...

Page 88: ... device 앫 The parameter setting data copied in the USB memory device can be copied to other inverters This function is useful in backing up the parameter setting or for sharing the parameter setting among multiple inverters 앫 The parameter setting file can be copied onto a personal computer from the USB memory device and edited using FR Configurator2 5 704 Trace 앫 The monitored data and output sta...

Page 89: ... setting and monitoring can be performed by FR Configurator2 LED display status Operating status OFF No USB connection ON The communication is established between the inverter and the USB device Flickering rapidly The USB memory device is being accessed Do not remove the USB memory device Flickering slowly Error in the USB connection Tab 2 26 Operating status of the USB host NOTES Do not connect d...

Page 90: ...ter link operation and MODBUS RTU protocol For the details refer to page 5 602 Item Specification Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 Transmission format Multidrop link Communication speed maximum 115200 bps Overall length 500 m Connection cable Twisted pair cable 4 pairs Tab 2 28 Specifications of the RS 485 terminal block I002384E Fig 2 43 RS 485 terminal block TXD RXD VCC GND TXD RXD VCC GND RDA...

Page 91: ...fer to page Mounting hole Used for installation to the inverter Terminal block Connected with the encoder 2 67 Encoder type selection switch SW3 Switches the encoder type differential line driver complementary 2 64 CON2 connector Not used Terminating resistor selection switch SW1 Switches ON or OFF the internal terminating resistor 2 64 Switch for manufacturer setting SW2 Do not change from the in...

Page 92: ...nal Input terminal for the encoder power supply Connect the external power supply 5 V 12 V 15 V 24 V and the encoder power cable When the encoder output is the differential line driver type only 5 V can be input Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output voltage Check the encoder specification SD Encoder power supply ground terminal PIN Not used PO Tab 2 30 Terminals ...

Page 93: ...ential line driver and set to OFF when complementary ON with internal terminating resistor initial status OFF without internal terminating resistor Fig 2 45 Encoder specification selection switch I002386E Fig 2 46 Terminating resistor selection switch I002387E NOTES Set all switches to the same setting ON OFF Set the switch OFF when sharing an encoder with another unit NC computerized numerical co...

Page 94: ...que motor with encoder SF JRCA Differential ON 5 V SF HRCA Differential ON 5 V Other Vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU Complementary OFF 12 V Other manufacturer s motor with encoder Tab 2 31 Motor used and switch setting NOTE The SW2 switch is for manufacturer setting Do not change the setting Item Encoder for SF JR Encoder for SF V5RU Resolution 1024 pulses rev 2048 pulses rev Power supply v...

Page 95: ...le Approx 140 mm 60 mm F DPEVSB 12P 0 2 mm2 11 mm PZ2 PZ1 PB2 PB1 PA2 PA1 PG SD P B N A R C H K PLG A B C D E K F G H J L M S N R P T FR A800 FR A8AP Positioning keyway D MS3106B20 29S As viewed from wiring side 2 mm2 L D MS3106B20 29S D MS3057 12A A P clip for earthing grounding a shielded cable is provided Model Length L m FR V7CBL5 5 FR V7CBL15 15 FR V7CBL30 30 Earth cable 60 mm Inverter side E...

Page 96: ...tion do not solder it I002397E Fig 2 47 Preparation of the cable NOTES Information on blade terminals Commercially available products as of January 2015 Phoenix Contact Co Ltd NICHIFU Co Ltd When using a blade terminal without insulation sleeve take caution that the twisted wires do not come out Cable stripping size 5 mm Terminal screw size Cable gauge mm2 Blade terminal model Crimping tool name W...

Page 97: ...to this PZR PG PG 5E SD SD AG2 Tab 2 34 Connection terminal compatibility table I002427E Fig 2 48 Standard motor with encoder SF JR 5 V differential line driver MCCB MC R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W U V W E C R PA1 FR A8AP PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD SD A N B P H K STF STR SD 10 2 2 3 1 1 5 Three phase AC power supply Forward rotation start Frequency command Frequency setting potentiometer 1 2 W 1kΩ Torqu...

Page 98: ...ary PA1 FR A8AP PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD SD SF V5RU SF THY U V W U A B C V W E G1 G2 A MCCB MC B PA1 PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD SD C D F G S R RH OH SD PC Inverter Earth Ground Differential Compli mentary Terminat ing resis tor ON 12 V DC power supply OFF IM FAN Three phase AC power supply OCR PLG External thermal relay input Thermal protector 2 W 1 kΩ ...

Page 99: ...otation start Speed limit command Frequency setting potentiometer 1 2 W 1kΩ Torque command 10V Inverter SF JR motor with encoder Earth Ground 5 V DC power supply Differential Compli mentary Terminat ing resis tor ON OFF PLG Contact input common Reverse rotation start IM PA1 FR A8AP PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD SD SF V5RU SF THY U V W U A B C V W E G1 G2 A MCCB MC B PA1 PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD...

Page 100: ... Recommended product MOS2C102J 2W1kΩ by KOA Corporation Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2 wire blade terminal and connect the blade terminal to the terminal OH For the recommended 2 wire blade terminals refer to page 2 44 Insulate the lead wire of the resistor for example by applying a contraction tube and shape the wires so that the resistor and its lead wire will not touch other cabl...

Page 101: ...oise such as the main circuit and power supply voltage When differential line driver is set and a wiring length is 30 m or more The wiring length can be extended to 100 m by increasing the 5 V power supply approximately to 5 5 V while using six or more 0 2 mm2 gauge cables in parallel or a 1 25 mm2 or larger gauge cable The voltage applied must be within power supply specifications of encoder Fig ...

Page 102: ... connected as shown below In this case the wiring length between FR A8AP and CNC should be as short as possible within 5 m Fig 2 55 Earthing grounding example using a P clip I001448E Fig 2 56 Wiring of the encoder with inverter and CNC I002807E NOTES For the details of the optional encoder dedicated cable FR JCBL FR V7CBL refer to page 2 65 The FR V7CBL is provided with a P clip for earthing groun...

Page 103: ... is clockwise CW viewed from the shaft Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less 100 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz 1 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation encoder is counterclockwise CCW viewed from the shaft Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less 101 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz 369 C140 851 C240 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 4096 ...

Page 104: ...otor SF JRCA 4P Rated motor current 1 Motor capacity 4 1 1024 SF HRCA Rated motor current 50 Motor capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024 Others Rated motor current 1 13 Motor capacity Number of motor poles Vectorcontrol dedicated motor SF V5RU 1500 r min series 0 30 Motor capacity 4 1 2048 SF V5RU except for 1500 r min series 0 1 13 Motor capacity 4 1 2048 SF THY 0 30 33 Motor capacity 4 1 2048 Ot...

Page 105: ... Inverter model FR A820 첸 Motor frame number Motor model Inverter model FR A840 첸 1 5 kW 90L SF V5RU1K 00167 2 2K 90L SF V5RUH1K 00083 2 2K 2 2 kW 100L SF V5RU2K 00250 3 7K 100L SF V5RUH2K 00083 2 2K 3 7 kW 112M SF V5RU3K 00340 5 5K 112M SF V5RUH3K 00126 3 7K 5 5 kW 132S SF V5RU5K 00490 7 5K 132S SF V5RUH5K 00250 7 5K 7 5 kW 132M SF V5RU7K 00630 11K 132M SF V5RUH7K 00310 11K 11 kW 160M SF V5RU11K ...

Page 106: ...12M SF V5RU1K3 Y 00167 2 2K 132M SF V5RU1K4 Y 00167 2 2K 2 2 kW 112M SF V5RU2K1 Y 00250 3 7K 132S SF V5RU2K3 Y 00250 3 7K 160M SF V5RU2K4 Y 00250 3 7K 3 7 kW 132S SF V5RU3K1 Y 00340 5 5K 132M SF V5RU3K3 Y 00340 5 5K 160L SF V5RU3K4 00340 5 5K 5 5 kW 132M SF V5RU5K1 Y 00490 7 5K 160M SF V5RU5K3 Y 00490 7 5K 180L SF V5RU5K4 Y 00490 7 5K 7 5 kW 160M SF V5RU7K1 Y 00630 11K 160L SF V5RU7K3 Y 00630 11K ...

Page 107: ...all an external dedicated brake resistor FR ABR At this time remove the jumper from across terminals PR and PX and connect the FR ABR across terminals P and PR For the locations of terminal P and PR refer to the terminal block layout page 2 26 Removing jumpers across terminals PR and PX disables the plug in brake resistor power is not supplied The plug in brake resistor can be left connected to th...

Page 108: ...e resistor cannot be used with options such as brake units high power factor converters and power regeneration converters Tab 2 43 Connection of the external brake resistor 2 Terminal P Terminal PR Brake resistor Terminal PX Terminal PR Jumper Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper Connect the brake resistor across terminals P and PR The jumper should remain disconnected Br...

Page 109: ...tive circuit Power supply voltage High duty brake resistorbrakeresistor Thermal relay type Mitsubishi product Contact rating 200 V FR ABR 0 4K TH N20CXHZ 0 7A 110 V AC 5A 220 V AC 2A AC11 class 110 V DC 0 5A 220 V DC 0 25A DC11 class FR ABR 0 75K TH N20CXHZ 1 3A FR ABR 2 2K TH N20CXHZ 2 1A FR ABR 3 7K TH N20CXHZ 3 6A FR ABR 5 5K TH N20CXHZ 5A FR ABR 7 5K TH N20CXHZ 6 6A FR ABR 11K TH N20CXHZ 11A F...

Page 110: ...verter Minimum resistance Ω Power consumption kW Inverter Minimum resistance Ω Power consumption kW FR A820 00046 0 4K 100 1 44 FR A840 00023 0 4K 371 1 66 FR A820 00077 0 75K 80 1 81 FR A840 00038 0 75K 236 2 61 FR A820 00105 1 5K 50 2 89 FR A840 00052 1 5K 190 3 24 FR A820 00167 2 2K 33 4 38 FR A840 00083 2 2K 130 4 74 FR A820 00250 3 7K 30 4 81 FR A840 00126 3 7K 83 7 42 FR A820 00340 5 5K 18 8...

Page 111: ...not provided with the PX terminal a jumper needs not to be removed I002406E I002407E Fig 2 58 Protective circuit E CAUTION If the resistor selection is incorrect overcurrent may damage the inverter built in brake transistor Besides the resistor may be burned due to overheat If the selection of the thermal relay is incorrect the resistor may be burned due to overheat R PX PR P P3 S L2 T L3 R L1 MC ...

Page 112: ...elay to prevent overheat of the discharging resistor For the connection method of the discharging resistor refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR BU2 I002408E Fig 2 59 Connection with the brake unit FR BU2 Brake unit Discharging resistor Recommended external thermal relay FR BU2 1 5K GZG 300W 50Ω one TH N20CXHZ 1 3A FR BU2 3 7K GRZG 200 10Ω three in series TH N20CXHZ 3 6A FR BU2 7 5K GRZG 300 5...

Page 113: ...of FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit FR BU2 and between the brake unit FR BU2 andresistorunit FR BR mustbewithin 5meach Even when thewireistwisted thecable length must be within 10 m The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault I002409E Fig 2 60 Connection example with the FR BR H...

Page 114: ...the inverter and brake unit FR BU2 and between the brake unit FR BU2 and resistor unit MT BR5 must be within 5 m each Even when the wire is twisted the cable length must be within 10 m The contact between TH1 and TH2 is open in the normal status and is closed at a fault The CN8 connector used with the MT BU5 type brake unit is not used I002410E Fig 2 61 Connection example with the MT BR5 type resi...

Page 115: ... 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit FR BU2 and between the brake unit FR BU and discharging resistor unit FR BR must be within 5 m each Even when the cable is twisted the wiring length must be within 10 m I001640E Fig 2 62 Connection with the brake unit FR BU NOTES If the tran...

Page 116: ...PR and PX I002411E Fig 2 63 Connection with the brake unit BU NOTES The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit BU type and between the brake unit BU type and discharging resistor must be within 2 m each Even when the cable is twisted the wiring length must be within 5 m If the transistors in the brake unit should becomes faulty the resistor will overheat and result in a fire Install a...

Page 117: ...peration mode at the time of an instantaneous power failure Assign the IPF signal to an FR HC2 terminal Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR HC2 Always connect the FR HC2 terminal RDY to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned in the inverter Always connect the FR HC2 terminal SE to the inverter terminal SD Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR HC2 Always connect the ...

Page 118: ...als R L1 S L2 and T L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4 L14 S4 L24 and T4 L34 must be matched The control logic sink logic source logic of the high power factor converter and the inverter must be matched Refer to page 2 40 Do not connect a DC reactor FR HEL to the inverter when FR HC2 is connected ...

Page 119: ...ween N L and N Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals N and P will damage the inverter Use Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the terminals used for the X10 signal Refer to page 5 422 BesuretoconnectthepowersupplyandterminalsR L11 S L21 andT MC1 Operatingtheinverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter Always connect terminal ...

Page 120: ...T RC NOTES When using the inverter with the MT RC install a magnetic contactor MC at the input side of the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after 1 s or more has elapsed after powering ON the MT RC When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MT RC the inverter and the MT RC may be damaged or the MCCB may trip or be damaged When connecting the power coordination reactor an...

Page 121: ...75 kW or higher motor is used always connect a DC reactor Since theDC reactor FR HEL is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws the DC reactor is earthed grounded by being securely mounted to the enclosure However if the DC reactor is not earthed grounded securely enough an earthing grounding cable may be used When using an earthing grounding cable for FR HEL H 55K or lower...

Page 122: ...Connection of stand alone option units Installation and wiring 2 92 ...

Page 123: ... relays unnecessarily Suppression technique If the carrier frequency setting is high decrease the Pr 72 PWM frequency selection setting Note that motor noise increases Selecting Pr 240 Soft PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter s own line and other line operation can be performed with ...

Page 124: ...according to the inverter input side power factor which depends on the power supply voltage output frequency and load Especially for a completely electromagneticMCCB aslightlylargecapacitymustbeselectedsinceitsoperationcharacteristic varies with harmonic currents Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker As an earth leakage current breaker use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker d...

Page 125: ... Leakage currents NOTE For star connection the amount of leakage current is approx 1 3 of the above value 1 5 3 7 2 2 7 5 1522 1 1 37 30 55 45 5 5 18 5 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 2 3 5 5 5 8 14 22 30 38 60 80 100 150 Example of leakage current of cable path per 1 km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit 200 V 60 Hz Leakagec...

Page 126: ...thout noise filter Leakage current Igi mA 1 with EMC filter For the leakage current of the inverter refer to the following table Leakage current Ig2 mA 33 50 m 1 65 1000 m Motor leakage current Igm mA 0 18 Total leakage current mA 3 00 6 66 Rated sensitivity current mA Ig 10 30 100 Tab 3 2 Estimation of the permanent flowing leakage current Voltage V EMC filter ON mA OFF mA Phase grounding 200 22 ...

Page 127: ... 536 class 1 and other applicable standards When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective value is within the rating In this case do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase lead ing to temperature rise The following models are standard breakers BV C1 BC V NVB NV L NV G2N ...

Page 128: ... electromagnetic noises which use magnetic contactors electromagnetic brakes many relays for example are installed near the inverter and the inverter may malfunction due to electromagnetic noises the following countermeasures must be taken Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic noises Install data line filters page 3 8 to signal ...

Page 129: ...nduction noises may be propagated to the signal cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following countermeasures must be taken 앫 Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter 앫 Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I O cables 앫 Do not run the signal cables and power cables inverter I O cables in parallel with eac...

Page 130: ...19E Fig 3 6 Noise reduction examples NOTE For compliance with the EU EMC Directive refer to the Installation Guideline 34 1 TDK 39 1 30 1 13 1 Lot number Product name Cable fixing band mount Unit mm Inverter Enclosure Control power supply Sensor M 3 Motor Inverter power supply Do not earth ground shield but connect it to signal common cable Use a twisted pair shielded cable EMC filter Use 4 core c...

Page 131: ...filterON OFFconnectorsetting I002808E Fig 3 7 Built in EMC filter FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER FILTER OFF ON FILTER FILTER OFF ON EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON OFF connector FR A820 00046 0 4K 00077 0 75K FR A820 00105 1 5K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower FR A820 00046 0 4K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00023 0 4K to 00126 3 7K FR A820 00340 5 5K to...

Page 132: ...fficult to disconnect the connector use a pair of needle nose pliers etc For FR A820 00077 0 75K or lower Remove the control circuit terminal block Refer to page 7 11 Connect the shorting wire to the corresponding terminal to enable or disable the filter Connect the wire to the terminal in the same way as general wiring of the control circuit terminal block Refer to page 2 43 After switching reins...

Page 133: ... channel power impedance To space distance wiring path Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible Random occurrence quantitative grasping difficult Generated amount Nearly proportional to the load capacity Changes with the current variation ratio Gets larger as switching speed increases Affected equipment immunity Specified by standards per equipment Different depending on maker s...

Page 134: ...pression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage hereinafter referred to as the Specific Consumer Guidelines Specific Consumer Guidelines This guideline sets forth the maximum harmonic currents outgoing from a high voltage or especially high voltage receiving consumer who will install add or renew harmonic generating equipment If any of the maximum values is excee...

Page 135: ...he rated capacity used here is used to calculate the generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive Classification Circuit type Conversion coefficient Ki 3 Three phase bridge Capacitor smoothing Without reactor K31 3 4 With reactor AC side K32 1 8 With reactor DC side K33 1 8 With reactors AC DC sides K34 1 4 5 Self excitation three pha...

Page 136: ... 980 9 618 7 128 3 116 2 64 89 46 78 39 24 27 16 18 5 61 4 30 7 1860 21 8 1209 762 6 158 1 143 2 79 98 57 66 48 36 33 48 22 73 1 36 6 2220 25 9 1443 910 2 188 7 170 9 95 46 68 82 57 72 39 96 30 98 0 49 0 2970 34 7 1931 1218 252 5 228 7 127 7 92 07 77 22 53 46 37 121 60 4 3660 42 8 2379 1501 311 1 281 8 157 4 113 5 95 16 65 88 45 147 73 5 4450 52 1 2893 1825 378 3 342 7 191 4 138 0 115 7 80 10 55 1...

Page 137: ...wer factor converter FR HC2 with the accessories that come as standard Installation of power factor improving capacitor When used with a reactor connected in series the power factor improving correction capacitor can absorb harmonic currents Transformer multi phase operation Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30 as in Δ and Δ Δ combinations to provide an effect corresponding to ...

Page 138: ...r anexcessivepeakcurrentmayflowinthepowerinput circuit damaging the converter circuit To prevent this always install an optional AC reactor FR HAL I002423E Fig 3 11 Installation of a reactor R S T Z Y X U V W R L1 S L2 T L3 5000 5300 4000 3000 2000 1000 110165 247 330 420 550 kVA AC reactor FR HAL Inverter M 3 Capacities requiring installation of AC reactor Inverter capacity Power supply Power sup...

Page 139: ...ficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at power restoration after an inverter stop made by a power failure To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work If using an MC for emergency stop during operation select an MC regarding the i...

Page 140: ...mercialpowersupplyoperationisnotavailablewithvectorcontrol dedicated motors SF V5RU SF THY nor with PM motors Handling of the manual contactor on the inverter s output side APMmotorisasynchronousmotorwithhigh performancemagnetsembeddedinside High voltage is generated at the motorterminals while themotor isrunning evenafterthe inverterpower is turned OFF In an application where the PM motor is driv...

Page 141: ...the wiring length Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side For the FR A840 01800 55K or lower connect the surge voltage suppression filter FR ASF H FR BMF H to the output side For the FR A840 02160 75K or higher connect the sine wave filter MT BSL BSC to the output side Countermeasures With PM motor When the wiring length exceeds 50 m set 9 6 kHz or less in Pr 72 PWM frequency selection ...

Page 142: ...he total wiring length 2 29 Countermeasures are taken against EMI The input output main circuit of the inverter includes high frequency components which may interfere with the communication devices such as AM radios used near the inverter In such case activate the EMC filter turn ON the EMC filter ON OFF connector to minimize interference 3 9 On the inverter s output side none of the power factor ...

Page 143: ... motor the damage may further spread If a failure has occurred between the MC2 and the motor a protection circuit such as using the OH signal input must be provided 5 471 A countermeasure is provided for power restoration after a power failure If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure provide an MC in the inverter s input side and also make up a sequence whi...

Page 144: ...nd do not bundle them 앫 Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables inverter I O cables 앫 Use shielded cables 앫 Install a ferrite core on the signal cable Example ZCAT3035 1330 by TDK 3 6 A countermeasure is provided for an overload operation When performing frequent starts stops by the inverter rise fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due ...

Page 145: ...vates and the inverter trips the fault output signal ALM signal is output ALM signal is assigned to terminal A1B1C1 in the initial setting With this signal check that the inverter operates properly In addition negative logic can be set ON when the inverter is normal OFF when the fault occurs No Interlock method Check method Used signals Refer to page Inverter protective function operation Operatio...

Page 146: ...e considering the inverter s deceleration time Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter output current detection signal Theoutputcurrentdetectionsignal Y12signal isoutputwhentheinverteroperatesandcurrents flow in the motor Check if Y12 signal is being output while inputting a start signal to the inverter STF signal is a forward rotation signal and ...

Page 147: ...election referring to the table below Output signal Pr 190 to Pr 196 setting Positive logic Negative logic ALM 99 199 RY 11 111 RUN 0 100 Y12 12 112 Tab 3 16 Setting in positive and negative logic NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal ...

Page 148: ...al operation check Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector Note that the current is flowing through the motor while the motor coasts to stop even after the inverter s start signal is turned OFF For the logic check confi...

Page 149: ...FR DU08 FR A800 4 1 4 Basic operation 4 1 Operation panel FR DU08 4 1 1 Components of the operation panel FR DU08 To mount the operation panel FR DU08 on the enclosure surface refer to page 2 57 FR DU08 Fig 4 1 Operation panel FR DU08 ...

Page 150: ...command is not given even if the forward reverse command is given 앫 When the frequency command is the starting frequency or lower 앫 When the MRS signal is being input STOP RESET key Stops the operation commands Resets the inverter when the protection function is activated Setting dial The setting dial of the Mitsubishi inverters The setting dial is used to change the frequency and parameter settin...

Page 151: ...Parameter setting mode Display the present setting Example Parameter clear All parameter clear Faults history clear Parameter write is completed Parameter copy Operation for displaying faults history Past eight faults can be displayed The latest fault is ended by When no fault history exists is displayed Parameter setting mode at power ON Group parameter setting Function Function mode Trace functi...

Page 152: ...ear Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values Calibration parameters and the offline auto tuning parameters are also cleared The communication parameters are not cleared For the details of the uncleared parameters refer to page A 5 5 700 Faults history clear Deletes the faults history 6 3 Parameter copy Copies the parameter settings saved in the inverter to the operation panel The...

Page 153: ...llowingcorrespondencesbetweentheactualalphanumericcharactersandthedigital characters displayed on the operation panel I002430E Fig 4 3 Correspondences between digital and actual characters operation panel 0 E e R 1 F f r 2 G g S s 3 H h T t 4 I i U 5 J j u 6 K k V 7 L l v 8 M m W 9 N w A n X x B b O Y y C o Z z c P p D d Q q ...

Page 154: ...electing the parameter number Turn until Pr 1 appears Press to read the present set value initial value appears Changing the setting value Turn to change the set value to Press to enter the setting and flicker alternately 앫 Turn to read another parameter 앫 Press to show the setting again 앫 Press twice to show the next parameter 앫 Press three times to return to the monitor display of the frequency ...

Page 155: ...rrent This operation is valid during running or stopping under any operation mode A indicator turns ON Press to monitor the output voltage V indicator turns ON Tab 4 4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage NOTE Other monitored items such as output voltage and set frequency are also available Use Pr 52 to change the setting Refer to page 5 327 Example 쑴 Changing example Set the output cur...

Page 156: ...n mode or in the External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 Operation mode selection 3 select the monitor mode and then press the setting dial The present set frequency is displayed NOTE Use Pr 992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection to change the displayed indica tion Refer to page 5 327 ...

Page 157: ...rnal PU combined operation mode 1 appears For other settings refer to the table below Press to enter the setting External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 is set Tab 4 6 One can immediately change parameter 79 by simultaneously pressing the PU EXT and MODE keys Operation panel indication Operation method Operation mode Start command Frequency command PU operation mode External STF STR Analog v...

Page 158: ...ressed before pressing the SET key the easy setting mode is terminated and the display goes back to the monitor display If the easy setting mode is terminated while Pr 79 0 initial value the operation mode switches between the PU operation mode and the External operation mode Check the operation mode Reset by STOP RESET key is enabled The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr 79 3 are Multi...

Page 159: ... Displays simple mode extended parameters 1 Displays parameters registered in the user group Tab 4 8 Setting of parameter 160 Pr Pr group Name Unit Initialvalue Range Application Refer to page FM CA 0 G000 Torque boost 0 1 6 0 30 Set this parameter to obtain a higher starting torque under V F control Also set this when a loaded motor cannot be driven and the warning OL occurs then the inverter tri...

Page 160: ...000 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay 0 01 A Rated inverter current 0 500 A Protects the motor from heat Set the rated motor current 5 292 0 1 A 0 3600 A 79 D000 Operation mode selection 1 0 0 4 6 7 Select the start and frequency command sources 5 263 125 T022 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 01 Hz 60Hz 50Hz 0 590 Hz Allows the frequency at the maximum potentiometer setting 5 V in the...

Page 161: ...the operation panel Refer to section 4 5 1 page 4 13 The setting dial used as the potentiometer Refer to section 4 5 2 page 4 15 The ON OFF switches connected to terminals Refer to section 4 5 3 page 4 16 Voltage input signals Refer to section 4 5 4 page 4 18 Current input signals Refer to section 4 5 5 page 4 20 NOTE Use the operation panel FR DU08 to give a start command and a frequency command ...

Page 162: ...equency Start acceleration constant speed Press or to start running The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 7 Acceleration time and 30 00 Hz appears To change the set frequency perform the operation in above step 3 The previously set frequency appears Deceleration stop Press to stop The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating...

Page 163: ...ency Turn until appears The set frequency flickers The frequency flickers for about 5 s needs not to be pressed Tab 4 11 Use the digital dial like a potentiometer to perform operation NOTES If the display changes from flickering 60 00 to 0 00 Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock opera tion selection may be set to a value other than 1 Simply turning the setting dial will enable frequency setting wheth...

Page 164: ...Changing the operation mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators are lit For setting value change refer to page 4 9 Setting the frequency Turn ON the low speed switch RL Start acceleration constant speed Press or to start running The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 7 Acceleration time and 10 00 Hz appears Deceleration stop Press to stop The frequency value on the indication decre...

Page 165: ...and Pr 6 In the initial setting when two or more of multi speed settings are simultaneously selected prior ity is given to the set frequency of the lower signal For example when RH and RM signals turn ON RM signal Pr 5 has a higher priority Maximum of 15 speed operation can be performed Parameters referred to Pr 4 to Pr 6 multi speed setting page 5 288 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 233 Pr 8 Decele...

Page 166: ...monitor display appears Changing the operation mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators are lit For setting value change refer to page 4 6 Start Press or FWD or REV flickers as no frequency command is given Acceleration constant speed Turn the potentiometer frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 7 Acceleration time and 60 00 ...

Page 167: ...change the frequency 0 Hz at the minimum voltage input initial value 0 V adjust the calibra tion parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency Parameters referred to Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 233 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 233 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 263 Pr 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency page 5 401 C2 Pr 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequen...

Page 168: ...ay appears Changing the operation mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators are lit For setting value change refer to page 4 6 Terminal 4 input selection Turn ON the terminal 4 input selection signal AU Input to the terminal 4 is enabled Start Press or FWD or REV flickers as no frequency command is given Acceleration constant speed Input 20 mA The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr ...

Page 169: ...in frequency To change the frequency 0 Hz at the minimum current input initial value 4 mA adjust the cali bration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency Parameters referred to Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 233 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 233 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 263 Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency page 5 401 Pr 184 AU terminal function select...

Page 170: ...to section 4 6 1 page 4 22 Switches multi speed setting Refer to section 4 6 2 page 4 24 Voltage input signals Refer to section 4 6 3 page 4 26 Current input signals Refer to section 4 6 5 page 4 28 NOTES Switch ON the STF STR signal to give a start command Use the operation panel FR DU08 setting dial to give a start command Set Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation mode 1 I002445E Fig 4 8 Extern...

Page 171: ...cy appears Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed Tab 4 15 Operate the inverter by using external signals NOTES When both the forward rotation switch STF and the reverse rotation switch STR are ON the motor cannot be started If both are turned ON while the i...

Page 172: ... The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed FWD or REV indicator turns OFF Turn OFF the high speed switch RH Tab 4 16 Operate the inverter by using external signals NOTES When both the forward rotation switch STF and the reverse rotation switch STR are ON the motor cannot be started If both are turned ON while the i...

Page 173: ...ic operation Basic operation procedure External operation FR A800 4 25 Parameters referred to Pr 4 to Pr 6 multi speed setting page 5 288 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 233 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 233 ...

Page 174: ...it during the forward rotation and REV indicator is lit during the reverse rotation Deceleration Turn the potentiometer frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed Stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR FWD or REV indicator turns OFF Tab 4 17 Operate ...

Page 175: ...o the monitor frequency monitor Start Turn ON the start switch STF or STR then turn the potentiometer frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full Refer to steps and in section 4 6 3 Operate at 50 Hz Tab 4 18 Change the frequency of the maximum analog value NOTES To set the frequency at 0 V use the calibration parameter C2 Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting voltage gain...

Page 176: ...ime and 60 00 Hz appears FWD indicator is lit during the forward rotation and REV indicator is lit during the reverse rotation Deceleration Input 4 mA or less The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed FWD or REV indicator flickers Stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR FWD or REV indicator turns OFF Tab 4 19 Ope...

Page 177: ... the monitor frequency monitor Start Turn ON the start switch STF or STR then turn the potentiometer frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full Refer to steps and in section 4 6 5 Operate at 50 Hz Tab 4 20 Change the frequency of the maximum analog value NOTES To set the frequency at 4 mA use the calibration parameter C5 Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting current gain...

Page 178: ... the indication increases in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and 5 00 Hz appears FWD indicator is lit during the forward rotation and REV indicator is lit during the reverse rotation Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed FWD or RE...

Page 179: ...nstant speed Keep pressing or The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and 5 00 Hz appears Deceleration stop Release or The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and the motor stops rotating with 0 00 Hz displayed Tab 4 22 JOG operation performed from PU NOTES To change the running frequency change...

Page 180: ...Basic operation procedure JOG operation Basic operation 4 32 ...

Page 181: ...for each type of the inverter models Mark Control method Applied motor V F control Three phase induction motor Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control Vector control PM sensorless vector control IPM motor Inverter model Common designation FR A8첸0 Standard model FR A8첸2 Separated converter type FR A8첸6 IP55 compatible model Tab 5 1 Designation of the inverter model V F ...

Page 182: ...nitial value Refer to page Customer setting FM CA Basic functions 0 G000 Torque boost 0 to 30 0 1 6 5 652 4 3 2 1 1 H400 Maximum frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0 01 Hz 120 Hz 5 310 60 Hz 2 H401 Minimum frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 Hz 5 310 3 G001 Base frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 654 4 D301 Multi speed setting high speed 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 189 5 D302 Multi speed setting mid...

Page 183: ...nsation factor at double speed 0 to 200 9999 0 1 9999 5 84 Multi speed setting 24 to 27 D304to D307 Multi speed setting 4 speed to 7 speed 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 189 28 D300 Multi speed input compensation selection 0 1 1 0 5 288 29 F100 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection 0 to 6 1 0 5 240 30 E300 Regenerative function selection 0 to 2 10 11 20 21 100 to102 110 111 120 121 1 0 5 67...

Page 184: ...ed inverter current 5 341 0 to 3600 A 0 1 A Automatic restart 57 A702 Restart coasting time 0 0 1 to 30 s 9999 0 1 s 9999 5 562 5 571 58 A703 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0 1 s 1 s 5 562 59 F101 Remote function selection 0 to 3 11 to 13 1 0 5 247 60 G030 Energy saving control selection 0 4 9 1 0 5 659 Automatic acceleration deceleration 61 F510 Reference current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 9999 5 255...

Page 185: ...03 114 to 117 E100 Reset selection 0 1 0 E101 Disconnected PU detection E102 PU stop selection 1 E107 Reset limit 0 1 0 0 1 76 M510 Fault code output selection 0 to 2 1 0 5 385 77 E400 Parameter write selection 0 to 2 1 0 5 203 78 D020 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0 to 2 1 0 5 281 79 D000 Operation mode selection 0 to 4 6 7 1 0 5 263 5 272 Function Pr Pr group Name Setting range Minimum s...

Page 186: ... F 100 G040 V F1 first frequency 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 660 101 G041 V F1 first frequency voltage 0 to 1000 V 0 1 V 0 V 5 660 102 G042 V F2 second frequency 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 660 103 G043 V F2 second frequency voltage 0 to 1000 V 0 1 V 0 V 5 660 104 G044 V F3 third frequency 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 660 105 G045 V F3 third frequency voltage 0 to 1000 V 0 1 V 0 V 5 660...

Page 187: ...999 0 1 100 5 524 5 552 130 A614 PID integral time 0 1 to 3600 s 9999 0 1 s 1 s 5 524 5 552 131 A601 PID upper limit 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 524 5 552 132 A602 PID lower limit 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 524 5 552 133 A611 PID action set point 0 to 100 9999 0 01 9999 5 524 5 552 134 A615 PID differential time 0 01 to 10 s 9999 0 01 s 9999 5 524 5 552 Bypass 135 A000 Electronic bypass sequence select...

Page 188: ... Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 471 160 E440 User group read selection 0 1 9999 1 0 5 216 161 E200 Frequency setting key lock operation selection 0 1 10 11 1 0 5 198 Automatic restart functions 162 A700 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection 0 to 3 10 to 13 1 0 5 562 5 571 163 A704 First cushion time for restart 0 to 20 s 0 1 s 0 s 5 562 164 A705 First cushion voltage for restart 0 ...

Page 189: ...lection 0 to 8 10 to 20 22 25 to 28 30 to 36 38 to 57 60 61 63 64 67 68 70 79 84 85 90 to 99 100 to 108 110to116 120 122 125 to 128 130 to 136 138to157 160 161 163 164 167 168 170 179 184 185 190to199 200 to 208 300 to 308 9999 1 0 5 361 191 M401 SU terminal function selection 1 1 5 361 192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 1 2 5 361 9999 193 M403 OL terminal function selection 1 3 5 361 194 M4...

Page 190: ... to 100 1 100 5 222 259 1 E704 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0 1 1 0 5 222 260 E602 PWM frequency automatic switchover 0 1 1 1 5 219 Power failure stop 261 A730 Power failure stop selection 0 to 2 11 12 21 22 1 0 5 580 262 A731 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 0 to 20 Hz 0 01 Hz 3 Hz 5 580 263 A732 Subtraction starting frequency 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 580 264 A733...

Page 191: ...5 287 G401 Droop filter time constant 0 to 1 s 0 01 s 0 3 s 5 695 288 G402 Droop function activation selection 0 to 2 10 11 1 0 5 695 289 M431 Inverter output terminal filter 5 to 50 ms 9999 1 ms 9999 5 361 290 M044 Monitor negative output selection 0 to 7 1 0 5 327 5 341 291 D100 Pulse train I O selection 0 1 10 11 20 21 100 FM Type 1 0 5 282 5 341 0 1 CA Type 292 A110 Automatic acceleration dece...

Page 192: ...nication error count 1 0 5 630 Orientation control 350 A510 Stop position command selection 0 1 9999 1 9999 5 503 351 A526 Orientation speed 0 to 30 Hz 0 01 Hz 2 Hz 5 503 352 A527 Creep speed 0 to 10 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 5 Hz 5 503 353 A528 Creep switchover position 0 to 16383 1 511 5 503 354 A529 Position loop switchover position 0 to 8191 1 96 5 503 355 A530 DC injection brake start position 0 to 255 1 ...

Page 193: ...A545 Orientation deceleration ratio 0 to 1000 1 20 5 503 PLC function 414 A800 PLC function operation selection 0 to 2 1 0 5 587 415 A801 Inverter operation lock mode setting 0 1 1 0 5 587 416 A802 Pre scale function selection 0 to 5 1 0 5 587 417 A803 Pre scale setting value 0 to 32767 1 1 5 587 Position control 419 B000 Position command source selection 0 2 1 0 5 154 5 170 420 B001 Command pulse...

Page 194: ...constant R2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 9999 5 440 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 460 C222 Second motor constant L1 d shaft inductance Ld 0 to 6000 mH 9999 0 1 mH 9999 5 440 5 454 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 461 C223 Second motor constant L2 q shaft inductance Lq 0 to 6000 mH 9999 0 1 mH 9999 5 440 5 454 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 462 C224 Second motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 440 0 01 463 C210 Second ...

Page 195: ... target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 154 485 B041 Eleventh target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 154 486 B042 Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 154 487 B043 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 154 488 B044 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 154 489 B045 Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 154 490...

Page 196: ...ection 1 to 3 9999 1 9999 5 274 552 H429 Frequency jump range 0 to 30 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 312 PID control 553 A603 PID deviation limit 0 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 524 554 A604 PID signal operation selection 0 to 3 10 to 13 1 0 5 524 Current average value monitor 555 E720 Current average time 0 1 to 1 s 0 1 s 1 s 5 229 556 E721 Data output mask time 0 to 20 s 0 1 s 0 s 5 229 557 E722 Current aver...

Page 197: ...io 1 1 to 100 1 100 5 292 602 H003 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 292 603 H004 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 1 to 100 1 100 5 292 604 H005 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 292 606 T722 Power failure stop external signal input selection 0 1 1 1 5 580 607 H006 Motor permissible load level 110 to 250 1 150 5 292 ...

Page 198: ...toff frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0 01 Hz 20 Hz 5 699 Analog remote output function 655 M530 Analog remote output selection 0 1 10 11 1 0 5 382 656 M531 Analog remote output 1 800 to 1200 0 1 1000 5 382 657 M532 Analog remote output 2 800 to 1200 0 1 1000 5 382 658 M533 Analog remote output 3 800 to 1200 0 1 1000 5 382 659 M534 Analog remote output 4 800 to 1200 0 1 1000 5 382 Increased magnetic excitati...

Page 199: ...enance timer 3 0 1 to 9998 1 0 5 227 689 E715 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 0 to 9998 9999 1 9999 5 227 690 H881 Deceleration check time 0 to 3600 s 9999 0 1 s 1 s 5 118 Electronic thermal O L relay 692 H011 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 292 693 H012 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100 1 100 5 292 694 H013 Second free thermal red...

Page 200: ... 742 C285 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width 0 to 6000 μs 10000 to 16000 μs 9999 1 μs 9999 5 454 743 C206 Second motor maximum frequency 0 to 400 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 454 744 C207 Second motor inertia integer 10 to 999 9999 1 9999 5 454 745 C208 Second motor inertia exponent 0 to 7 9999 1 9999 5 454 746 C233 Second motor protection current level 100 to 500 9999 0 1 9999 5 454 747 G...

Page 201: ...ut check filter 0 to 10 s 0 01 s 0 s 5 417 T054 779 N014 Operation frequency during communication error 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 606 788 G250 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 0 9999 1 9999 5 75 791 F070 Acceleration time in low speed range 0 to 3600 s 9999 0 1 s 9999 5 233 792 F071 Deceleration time in low speed range 0 to 3600 s 9999 0 1 s 9999 5 233 799 M520 Pulse increment...

Page 202: ...23 G215 Speed detection filter 1 0 to 0 1 s 0 001 s 0 001 s 5 186 824 G213 Torque control P gain 1 current loop proportional gain 0 to 500 1 100 5 144 825 G214 Torque control integral time 1 current loop integral time 0 to 500 ms 0 1 ms 5 ms 5 144 826 T004 Torque setting filter 1 0 to 5 s 9999 0 001 s 9999 5 399 827 G216 Torque detection filter 1 0 to 0 1 s 0 001 s 0 s 5 186 828 G224 Model speed c...

Page 203: ...854 G217 Excitation ratio 0 to 100 1 100 5 187 855 C248 Control terminal option Signal loss detection enable disable selection 0 1 1 0 5 469 858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 1 4 9999 1 0 5 84 5 314 5 394 859 C126 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 9999 5 67 5 454 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 860 C226 Second motor torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 ...

Page 204: ...oltage gain 0 to 200 0 1 100 5 685 Free parameters 888 E420 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 5 211 889 E421 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 5 211 Energy saving monitor 891 M023 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 0 to 4 9999 1 9999 5 327 5 354 892 M200 Load factor 30 to 150 0 1 100 5 354 893 M201 Energy saving monitor reference motor capacity 0 1 to 55 kW 0 01 kW Rated inverter capacit...

Page 205: ...minal 1 bias speed 0 to 300 0 1 0 5 401 C14 918 3 T102 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 401 C15 918 3 T103 Terminal 1 gain speed 0 to 300 0 1 100 5 401 C16 919 3 T110 Terminal 1 bias command torque 0 to 400 0 1 0 5 409 C17 919 3 T111 Terminal 1 bias torque 0 to 300 0 1 0 5 409 C18 920 3 T112 Terminal 1 gain command torque 0 to 400 0 1 150 5 409 C19 920 3 T113 Termi...

Page 206: ...oop control 994 G403 Droop break point gain 0 1 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 695 995 G404 Droop break point torque 0 1 to 100 0 1 100 5 695 997 H103 Fault initiation 0 to 255 9999 1 9999 5 71 998 E430 PM parameter initialization 0 3003 3103 8009 8109 9009 9109 1 0 5 70 999 E431 Automatic parameter setting 1 2 10 11 12 13 20 21 9999 1 9999 5 211 1002 C150 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient 5...

Page 207: ...06 5 591 1033 A916 Analog source selection 7ch 207 5 591 1034 A917 Analog source selection 8ch 208 5 591 1035 A918 Analog trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 5 591 1036 A919 Analog trigger operation selection 0 1 1 0 5 591 1037 A920 Analog trigger level 600 to 1400 1 1000 5 591 1038 A930 Digital source selection 1ch 1 to 255 1 1 5 591 1039 A931 Digital source selection 2ch 2 5 591 1040 A932 Digital source ...

Page 208: ...999 5 327 1107 M051 Running speed monitor filter 0 to 5 s 9999 0 01 s 9999 5 327 1108 M052 Excitation current monitor filter 0 to 5 s 9999 0 01 s 9999 5 327 1113 H414 Speed limit method selection 0 to 2 10 9999 1 0 5 136 1114 D403 Torque command reverse selection 0 1 1 1 5 132 1115 G218 Speed control integral term clear time 0 to 9998 ms 1 ms 0 s 5 97 1116 G206 Constant output range speed control ...

Page 209: ...524 PLC function 1150 to 1199 A810to A859 PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 0 to 65535 1 0 5 587 1220 B100 Target position speed selection 0 to 2 1 0 A 42 Simple position control 1221 B101 Start command edge detection selection 0 1 1 0 5 154 1222 B120 First positioning acceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 154 1223 B121 First positioning deceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 154 1...

Page 210: ...ing dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 5 154 1249 B147 Seventh positioning sub function 0 1 10 11 100 101 110 111 1 10 5 154 1250 B148 Eighth positioning acceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 154 1251 B149 Eighth positioning deceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 154 1252 B150 Eighth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 5 154 1253 B151 Eighth positioning sub function 0 1 10 ...

Page 211: ...4 1276 B174 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 5 154 1277 B175 Fourteenth positioning sub function 0 1 10 11 100 101 110 111 1 10 5 154 1278 B176 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 154 1279 B177 Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 154 1280 B178 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 5 154 1281 B...

Page 212: ...1299 G108 Second pre excitation selection 0 1 1 0 5 663 1300 to 1343 1350 to 1359 N500 to N543 N550 to N559 Communication option parameters For details refer to the Instruction Manual of the option Clear parameters Pr CLR Parameter clear 0 1 1 0 5 700 ALL CL All parameter clear 0 1 1 0 5 700 Err CL Fault history clear 0 1 1 0 6 3 Pr CPY Parameter copy 0 1 to 3 1 0 5 701 Pr CHG Initial value change...

Page 213: ... FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower 2 FR A820 00630 11K to FR A820 03160 55K FR A840 00310 11K to FR A840 01800 55K 1 FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher The value for the 200 V class The value for the 400 V class Setting can be made only when a vector control compatible option is mounted The setting is available only when the FR A8AP is mounted The setting is available only when the ...

Page 214: ... function group Tab 5 3 Changing to the grouped parameter numbers Operation Screen at power ON The monitor display appears Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn until parameter display method appears Press initial value appears Changing to the group parameter display Turn to change the set ...

Page 215: ... read previously appears Parameter group selection Press several times until appears Parameter groups can now be selected Parameter group selection Turn until protective function parameter 4 appears Press to display and make the group parameters of the protective function parameter 4 selectable Parameter selection Turn until P H400 Maximum frequency appears Press to read the present set value init...

Page 216: ...User group read selection 5 216 E441 172 User group registered display batch clear 5 216 E442 173 User group registration 5 216 E443 174 User group clear 5 216 E490 989 Parameter copy alarm release 5 702 E600 72 PWM frequency selection 5 219 E601 240 Soft PWM operation selection 5 219 Tab 5 6 Environment setting parameters 1 Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple E602 260 P...

Page 217: ...ue at acceleration 5 255 F512 63 Reference value at deceleration 5 255 F513 293 Acceleration deceleration separate selection 5 255 F520 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 5 260 Pr group Pr Name Referto page Tab 5 7 Setting of acceleration deceleration time and acceleration deceleration pattern 2 Pr group Pr Name Referto page D000 79 Operation mode selection 5 263 5 272 D001 340 Communication ...

Page 218: ...election 5 136 H411 808 Forward rotation speed limit speed limit 5 136 H412 809 Reverse rotation speed limit reverse side speed limit 5 136 Tab 5 9 Protective function parameter 1 Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple H414 1113 Speed limit method selection 5 136 H415 873 Speed limit 5 118 H416 285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency 5 118 5 484 5 692 H417 853 Speed ...

Page 219: ...e 5 354 M206 898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 5 354 M207 899 Operation time rate estimated value 5 354 M300 54 FM CA terminal function selection 5 341 M301 158 AM terminal function selection 5 341 Tab 5 10 Monitor display and monitor output signal 1 M310 C0 900 FM CA terminal calibration 5 348 M320 C1 901 AM terminal calibration 5 348 M321 867 AM output filter 5 348 M330 C8 930 Current ou...

Page 220: ...74 Input filter time constant 5 399 T003 822 Speed setting filter 1 5 399 T004 826 Torque setting filter 1 5 399 T005 832 Speed setting filter 2 5 399 T006 836 Torque setting filter 2 5 399 T007 849 Analog input offset adjustment 5 399 T010 868 Terminal 1 function assignment 5 84 5 314 5 394 T021 242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount terminal 2 5 395 T022 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain f...

Page 221: ...on 5 426 T721 599 X10 terminal input selection 5 675 T722 606 Power failure stop external signal input selection 5 580 T730 155 RT signal function validity condition selection 5 428 T740 699 Input terminal filter 5 422 Pr group Pr Name Referto page Tab 5 11 Multi function input terminal parameters 2 Pr group Pr Name Referto page C000 684 Tuning data unit switchover 5 67 5 454 C100 71 Applied motor...

Page 222: ...285 742 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width 5 454 Pr group Pr Name Referto page Tab 5 12 Motor constant parameters 2 Pr group Pr Name Referto page A000 135 Electronic bypass sequence selection 5 471 A001 136 MC switchover interlock time 5 471 A002 137 Start waiting time 5 471 A003 138 Bypass selection at a fault 5 471 A004 139 Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass ope...

Page 223: ...ntegral time 5 503 A544 398 Orientation speed gain D term 5 503 A545 399 Orientation deceleration ratio 5 503 A600 759 PID unit selection 5 543 Pr group Pr Name Referto page Tab 5 13 Application parameters 2 A601 131 PID upper limit 5 524 5 552 A602 132 PID lower limit 5 524 5 552 A603 553 PID deviation limit 5 524 A604 554 PID signal operation selection 5 524 A605 1134 PID upper limit manipulated...

Page 224: ...ure deceleration time 1 5 580 A734 265 Power failure deceleration time 2 5 580 A735 266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 5 580 A785 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 5 580 A786 668 Power failure stop frequency gain 5 580 Pr group Pr Name Referto page Tab 5 13 Application parameters 4 A800 414 PLC function operation selection 5 587 A801 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 5 587...

Page 225: ... position lower 4 digits 5 154 B042 486 Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 5 154 Tab 5 14 Position control parameters 1 B043 487 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 5 154 B044 488 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 5 154 B045 489 Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits 5 154 B046 490 Thirteenth target position upper 4 digits 5 154 B047 491 Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits 5 ...

Page 226: ...ction 5 154 B172 1274 Fourteenth positioning acceleration time 5 154 B173 1275 Fourteenth positioning deceleration time 5 154 B174 1276 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 5 154 B175 1277 Fourteenth positioning sub function 5 154 B176 1278 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 5 154 B177 1279 Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 5 154 B178 1280 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 5 154 B179 1281 F...

Page 227: ...of the option Tab 5 15 Operation via communication and its settings Pr group Pr Name Referto page G000 0 Torque boost 5 652 G001 3 Base frequency 5 654 G002 19 Base frequency voltage 5 654 G003 14 Load pattern selection 5 656 G010 46 Second torque boost 5 652 G011 47 Second V F base frequency 5 654 G020 112 Third torque boost 5 652 G021 113 Third V F base frequency 5 654 G030 60 Energy saving cont...

Page 228: ...selection 5 113 G231 841 Torque bias 1 5 113 G232 842 Torque bias 2 5 113 G233 843 Torque bias 3 5 113 G234 844 Torque bias filter 5 113 G235 845 Torque bias operation time 5 113 G236 846 Torque bias balance compensation 5 113 G237 847 Fall time torque bias terminal 1 bias 5 113 G238 848 Fall time torque bias terminal 1 gain 5 113 G240 367 Speed feedback range 5 692 G241 368 Feedback gain 5 692 Pr...

Page 229: ... following conditions If the conditions are not satisfied select V F control Otherwise malfunctions such as insufficient torque uneven rotation may occur For the motor capacity the rated current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter cur rent It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the rated inverter current will cause torque ripples et...

Page 230: ... the conditions are not satisfied select V F control Otherwise malfunctions such as insufficient torque uneven rotation may occur For the motor capacity the rated current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter cur rent It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the rated inverter current will cause torque ripples etc and degrade the speed ...

Page 231: ...ur For the motor capacity the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the rated inverter current will cause torque ripples etc and degrade the speed and torque accuracies As a reference select the motor with the rated motor current that is about 40 or higher of the rated...

Page 232: ...following conditions The motor described in the table below is used For the motor capacity the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the rated inverter current will cause torque ripples etc and degrade the speed and torque accuracies As a reference select the motor wit...

Page 233: ...rrent iq torque current for causing the motor to develop torque In vector control the voltage and output frequency are calculated tocontrol the motor so that the ex citation current and torque current flow to the optimum as described below Theexcitationcurrentiscontrolledtoplacetheinternalmagneticfluxofthemotorintheoptimum status The torque command value is derived so that the difference between t...

Page 234: ... difficult to use Applications requiring a wide variable speed range from extremely low speed to high speed frequent acceleration deceleration operations continuous four quadrant operations etc Allows torque control when induction motors are used Allows servo lock torque control which generates a torque in the motor shaft while stopped Not available under Real sensorless vector control I002502E Fi...

Page 235: ...alculated to use that motor magnetic flux Ф2 as a predetermined magnetic flux Excitation current control A voltage Vd is calculated to flow a current id which is identical to the excitation current command id Output frequency calculation Motor slip ωs is calculated on the basis of the torque current value iq and magnetic flux Ф2 The outputfrequency ω0 isfoundbyaddingthatslip ωs tothefeedback ωFB f...

Page 236: ...switched using the mode switching signal MC Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 71 C100 Applied motor 0 0 to 6 13 to 16 20 23 24 30 33 34 40 43 44 50 53 54 70 73 74 330 333 334 8090 8093 8094 9090 9093 9094 By selecting a standard motor or constant torque motor the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each motor are set 80 C101 Motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Set the applied m...

Page 237: ...tor poles must be set to select Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control or vector control Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles 451 G300 Second motor control method selection 9999 0 to 6 Vector control 10 to 12 Real sensorless vector control 13 14 PM sensorless vector control 20 V F control Ad...

Page 238: ...06 Torque control variable currentlimiter control 9 109 Vector control test operation 10 110 Real sensorless vector control Speed control 11 111 Torque control 12 112 Speed control torque control switchover MC signal ON torque control MC signal OFF speed control 20 initial value 20 Advanced magnetic flux vector control Speed control 9999 initial value Advanced magnetic flux vector control for seco...

Page 239: ...ingPr 788 Pr 747 0 low speedrangetorquecharacteristicdisabled selectsspeedcontrol Selecting the fast response operation Pr 800 Pr 451 100 to 106 109 to 114 Setting Pr 800 any of 100 to 106 or 109 to 114 selects the fast response operation The fast re sponse operation is available during vector control Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control When driving a 3 7 kW no load mot...

Page 240: ...panel or by outputting it as analog signals to the terminal FM AM or CA NOTES Since current is not detected and voltage is not output monitors related to current and voltage such as output current and output voltage etc and output signals do not function For speed calculation speed is calculated in consideration of Pr 880 Load inertia ratio Since current synchronization operation occurs during PM ...

Page 241: ...X43 Second brake sequence open completion BRI2 Torque limit selection X93 Output terminal function selection Pr 190 to Pr 196 Electronic thermal O L relay pre alarm THP Brake opening request BOF Second brake opening request BOF2 Orientation complete ORA Orientation fault ORM Regenerative status output Y32 In position Y36 Travel completed MEND Start time tuning completion Y39 Home position return f...

Page 242: ...uency PID deviation Fault display Input terminal status Frequency setting value Output terminal status Running speed Option input terminal status Converter output voltage Option output terminal status Electric thermal relay load factor Motor thermal load factor Output current peak value Inverter thermal load factor Converter output voltage peak value PTC thermistor value Load meter PID measured va...

Page 243: ...89 input terminal function selection to assign the function V F control is set by turning ON the X18 signal If the X18 signal is unassigned RT signal performs the same function Turning ON the RT signal selects V F control V F control when Pr 453 or Pr 454 is set to 9999 regardless of the Pr 451 setting When Pr 450 is set to the IPM motor MM CF PM sensorless vector control is enabled even if Pr 453...

Page 244: ...ection to assign the RT signal to another terminal The RT signal is a second function selection signal The RT signal also enables other second func tions Refer to page 5 428 The control method could be changed by external terminals RT signal X18 signal while the inverter is stopped If a signal is switched during the operation the control method changes after the inverter stops Pr 862 Encoder optio...

Page 245: ...signal OFF Torque control MC signal ON Speed control MC signal OFF Position control MC signal ON Position control MC signal OFF Torque control MC signal ON 0 initial value Speed setting assistance Speed limit assistance Speed setting assistance Speed setting assistance 1 Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux comm...

Page 246: ...it Pr 810 1 Torque limit Pr 810 1 Torque limit Pr 810 1 Torque limit Pr 810 1 9999 Tab 5 23 Functions of the terminal 4 under different control modes NOTES Switching between the speed control and the torque control is always enabled regardless of the motor status in a stop in running or in DC injection brake during pre excitation During operation switching between speed control and position contro...

Page 247: ...umber of motor poles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value Motor Pr 71 setting Remarks Mitsubishi standard motor Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF JR 0 initial value 3 4 SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 20 SF HR 40 Others 0 3 Offline auto tuning is required Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF JRCA 4P 1 SF HRCA 50 Other SF JRC etc 1 13 Offline auto tuning is required Mitsubishi ...

Page 248: ...verter and the motor may reduce the output torque The optional sine wave filter MT BSL BSC cannot be used between the inverter and the motor Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 89 G932 Speed control gain A...

Page 249: ...ector Pr 569 Pr 89 Control method selection Pr 451 Pr 800 Tab 5 24 Switching the parameters by using the RT signal NOTES The RT signal is a second function selection signal The RT signal also enables other second func tions Refer to page 5 428 RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to...

Page 250: ...parameter initialization appears Setting value display Press to read the present set value initial value appears Changing the setting value Turn to change the set value to then press and flicker alternately The setting is completed Tab 5 25 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control by performing parameter initialization Setting Description 0 Parameter settings for an induction motor 3003 Paramete...

Page 251: ... 8109 9009 or 9109 The setting can be made after performing offline auto tuning Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 998 E430 PM parameter initialization 0 0 Parameter settings for an induction motor frequency The parameter settings required to drive an induction motor are set 3003 For IPM motor MM CF Parameter setting rotations per minute The parameters settings required to drive an IP...

Page 252: ...003 8009 9009 rota tions per minute 3103 8109 9109 frequency the target parameters are respectively set to their initial values The purpose of Pr 998 is not to change the display units Use Pr 144 Speed set ting switchover to change the display units between rotations per minute and frequency Pr 144 enables switching of display units between rotations per minute and frequency without initializ ing ...

Page 253: ...0 Hz 1 r min 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r min Pr 84 133 33 Hz Pr 84 1 r min 0 01 Hz 22 Stall prevention operation level 150 150 0 1 37 Speed display 0 0 1 55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r min Pr 84 133 33 Hz Pr 84 1 r min 0 01 Hz 56 Current monitoring reference Rated inverter current Rated motor current Refer to page 8 8 Pr 8...

Page 254: ...to page 8 8 Pr 859 0 01 A 0 1 A 820 Speed control P gain 1 60 30 1 821 Speed control integral time 1 0 333 s 0 333 s 0 001 s 824 Torque control P gain 1 current loop proportional gain 100 100 1 825 Torque control integral time 1 current loop integral time 5 ms 20 ms 0 1 ms 870 Speed detection hysteresis 0 Hz 8 r min 0 5 Hz 1 r min 0 01 Hz 885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit val...

Page 255: ...er The Pr 747 becomes valid when the RT signal turns ON Pr Name Initial value Setting range Operation 788 G250 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 9999 0 Disables the low speed range torque characteristic current synchronization operation 9999 Enables the low speed range torque characteristic high frequency superposition control 747 G350 Second motor low speed range torque characterist...

Page 256: ...12 P G218 P G260 P G261 P G311 P G312 P G361 Pr 818 to Pr 821 Pr 830 Pr 831 Pr 880 Pr 1115 to Pr 1118 Pr 1121 5 97 To improve the motor trackability for the speed command changes Speed feed forward control model adaptive speed control P G220 to P G224 P G262 P C114 Pr 828 Pr 877 to Pr 881 Pr 1119 5 109 To stabilize the speed detection signal Speed detection filter P G215 P G315 Pr 823 Pr 833 5 186...

Page 257: ...4 to 6 24 to 27 232 to 239 RL RM RH REX Option Operation panel Maximum minimum setting Acceleration deceleration processing Decelerates to stop Pr 11 Pr 7 Pr 8 Pr 10 Vector control Pr 800 0 PM sensorless vector control Pr 800 9 13 14 Real sensorless Vector control Pr 800 10 Decelerates to stop Pr 11 Pr 802 1 Pr 802 0 Servo lock zero speed control Pr 850 1 Pr 850 0 Zero speed control Zero speed con...

Page 258: ...0 0 Speeddetectionfilter Speed estimation Realsensorlessvectorcontrol Pr 800 10 PMsensorlessvectorcontrol Pr 800 9 13 14 Terminal1bias C16 C17 Pr 919 Terminal1gain C18 C19 Pr 920 Fall timetorquebiasterminal1bias Pr 847 Fall timetorquebiasterminal1gain Pr 848 Torquebiasbalance compensation Pr 846 Pr 826 9999 Pr 826 Pr 74 Pr 836 Pr 74 Pr 826 9999 Pr 836 9999 Pr 836 9999 Torquebias Pr 841to843 Pr 840...

Page 259: ...anually Refer to page 5 102 SelectPr 800 10 speedcontrol or 12 speed torqueswitchover to enable speed control Select the start command and speed command Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value Set Pr 71 Applied motor to 3 standard motor or 13 constant torque mo...

Page 260: ...a tion Switching between the forward rotation command STF and reverse rotation command STR must not be performed during operations under torque control An overcurrent trip E OC첸 or opposite rotation deceleration fault E 11 will occur When performing continuous operations under Real sensorless vector control in FR A820 00250 3 7K or lower or FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower the speed fluctuation increas...

Page 261: ...nually Refer to page 5 102 Select Pr 800 0 speed control 2 speed torque switchover or 4 speed position switchover to enable speed control Select the start command and speed command Set the overheat protection of the motor Pr 9 Refer to page 5 292 Setthemotorcapacity kW inPr 80 Motorcapacity andset thenumberofmotorpolesinPr 81 Numberofmotorpoles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 ini...

Page 262: ...6 Refer to page 5 454 Configure the initial setting for the PM sensorless vector control using Pr 998 Refer to page 5 71 When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr 998 PM parameter initialization the PM sensorless vector control is selected PM on the operation panel FR DU08 is lit when the PM sensorless vector control is set 8009 Parameter rotations per minute settings for an IPM motor ot...

Page 263: ... 200 Hz The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control Refer to page 5 219 Constant speed operation cannot be performed in the low speed range of 200 r min or less under current synchronization operation Refer to page 5 75 During PM sensorless vector control the RUN signal is output about 100 ms after turning ON the start command STF STR The delay is due to the magnetic pole ...

Page 264: ...nstant torque in low speed range In constant power range constant motor output limit 11 Torque rise in low speed range In constant power range constant torque limit 804 D400 Torque command source selection 0 0 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used 1 Torque limit 400 to 400 by the parameter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 3 Torque limit via CC Link communication FR A8NC FR A8NCE 4 The internal torque...

Page 265: ...e limit as constant speed 817 H721 Torque limit level during deceleration 9999 0 to 400 Set the torque limit value during deceleration 9999 The same torque limit as constant speed 858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0 1 4 9999 The torque limit level can be changed with setting value 4 and the signal to terminal 4 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6 9999 The torque limit level ca...

Page 266: ...input method Operation 0 Initial value Internal torque limit 1 Perform the torque limit operation using the parameter Pr 22 Pr 812 to Pr 814 settings If changing the torque limit parameters via communication is enabled the torque limit input can be performed via communication 1 External torque limit Torque limit using analog voltage current to terminal 1 or terminal 4 is valid 2 Internal torque li...

Page 267: ... function assign ment 4 When inputting from terminal 4 set Terminal 4 function assignment 4 When Pr 858 4 and Pr 868 2 the torque for regenerative driving is limited with the terminal 1 analog input and the torque for power driving is limited with the terminal 4 analog input Fig 5 14 Torque limit level by parameter setting I001502E I002507E Fig 5 15 Torque limit level by analog input Forward drivi...

Page 268: ...ration parameters NOTE When inputting an analog signal to the terminal 1 input a positive voltage 0 V to 10 V 5 V When a negative voltage 0 V to 10 V 5 V is input the torque limit value set by the analog signal becomes 0 400 150 0 0 0 400 150 0 100 0 20mA 20 4 Initial value Gain C18 Pr 920 100 5 V 10 V C19 Pr 920 Torque setting signal C17 Pr 919 Calibration example of terminal 1 Bias C16 Pr 919 To...

Page 269: ... installed and vector control is selected Pr 858 setting value Terminal 4 function Pr 868 setting Terminal 1 function 0 Initial value Speed command AU signal ON 0 Initial value Speed setting auxiliary 1 Magnetic flux command 2 3 4 Torque limit Pr 810 1 5 6 Torque bias Pr 840 1 to 3 9999 1 Magnetic flux command 0 Initial value Speed setting auxiliary 1 Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command 2 ...

Page 270: ...er unit The torque can also be limited by setting a value in Pr 805 or Pr 806 Setting range if set by operation panel or parameter unit is 673 to 1327 327 to 327 setting increment is 1 Pr 804 Torque limit input Setting range Settingin crements FR A8NC PLC function FR A8NCE 1 Torque limit by Pr 805 or Pr 806 Torque limit by remote register RWw2 600 to 1400 400 to 400 1 3 Torque limit by remote regi...

Page 271: ...l for each quadrant NOTES If 2 is set in Pr 810 while the communication option is not connected a protective function E OPT is activated when the PLC function is disabled For the details of the FR A8NC and the FR A8NCE refer to the Instruction Manual of each option I001505E Fig 5 19 Second torque limit level NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selec...

Page 272: ...2 Hz the torque limit level during acceleration deceleration Pr 816 or Pr 817 changes to the torque control level during constant speed Pr 22 When the difference between the set speed and rotation speed is 2 Hz or less the torque limit level during deceleration Pr 817 activates I002510E Fig 5 20 Individual torque limit value during acceleration and deceleration NOTE The Pr 816 and Pr 817 settings ...

Page 273: ...eal sensorless vector control Pr 811 setting Speed setting running speed monitor increments from PU RS 485 communication communication options Torque limit setting increments Pr 22 Pr 812 to Pr 817 0 1 r min 0 1 1 0 1 r min 10 1 r min 0 01 11 0 1 r min Tab 5 31 Torque limit level increments NOTES The internal resolution of the torque limit is 0 024 100 212 and fractions below this resolution are r...

Page 274: ...e Constant power range constant power limit torque reduction Output frequency Base frequency 10 Hz Torque rise limit Output frequency Base frequency 10 Hz Torque rise limit Pr 803 10 Torque Low speed range Constant torque range Constant power range constant power limit torque reduction Pr 803 1 Torque Low speed range Constant torque range Constant power range Constant torque limit Constanttorqueli...

Page 275: ...tion operation signal OL signal is turned ON for 100 ms or longer Whenthe output torque drops to the torque limit level or lower the output signal also turns OFF Pr 157 OL signal output timer can be used to set whether to output the OL signal immediately or whether to output it after a certain time period has elapsed I001508E Fig 5 22 Alarm stop when torque limit is activated NOTES Under V F contr...

Page 276: ...103 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level page 5 84 Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 422 P...

Page 277: ...ontrol P gain 1 60 0 to 1000 The proportional gain during speed control is set Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for speed command changes It also reduces the speed fluctuation caused by external disturbance 821 G212 Speed control integral time 1 0 333 s 0 to 20 s The integral time during speed control is set Setting this parameter lower shortens the return time to the origin...

Page 278: ...motor When applying the second motor RT signal is ON tuning is not performed Vector control Command Speed control position loop gain Model speed control gain Pr 820 Pr 821 Pr 828 Pr 422 Automatic setting Current control Load inertia moment Motor Encoder Detector Torque command Actual motor speed Load inertia ratio estimation section ON when Pr 819 1 ON when Pr 819 1 2 Load inertia ratio Pr 880 Gai...

Page 279: ...Pr 880 Load inertia ratio is used as the initial value of the load inertia ratio when performing tuning During tuning the calculated value is set in Pr 880 The calculation of the load inertia ratio may take excessive time or otherwise not be performed properly if the following conditions are not satisfied The time in acceleration deceleration driving until 1500 r min is reached in 5 s or less The ...

Page 280: ...gral time 1 are set automatically Operation is performed with the adjusted gain from the next operation Perform a test run and set the response level in Pr 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for commands but setting it too high causes vibration The response level can be adjusted during operation when Pr 77 Parameter write selection 2...

Page 281: ...d control gain Pr 422 Position control gain Pr 446 Model position control gain Manual input a The tuning result RAM is displayed a Gain is calculated when Pr 819 is set to 2 and the result is set in the parameter b The parameter is set at the following times Every hour after turning ON the power 앫 When Pr 819 is set to a value other than 1 앫 After changing to a control other than vector control su...

Page 282: ...al time 1 lower shortens the return time to the original speed during speed fluctuation but setting it too low causes overshoot The value in parentheses is applicable during Real sensorless vector control or with the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher during vector control Performing PM parameter initialization changes the settings Refer to page 5 71 Actual speed gain is c...

Page 283: ...occur raise the setting by double the setting and set a value that satisfies the following condition The setting where overshoots stop occurring 0 8 to 0 9 3 Response is slow Set Pr 820 higher Pr 820 If acceleration is slow raise the setting by 5 s and set a value that satisfies the following condition The setting immediately before vibration noise starts occurring 0 8 to 0 9 4 Return time respons...

Page 284: ...y referring to the response level based on this setting Also for vector control gain adjustment appropriate for the inertia can be easily performed by using easy gain tuning Pr 819 1 2 Rotation speed trackability is poor Set Pr 820 Speed control P gain 1 higher Raise the setting by 10 s and set a value that satisfies the following condition The setting immediately before vibration noise starts occ...

Page 285: ... Iq command is 100 rated Iq when the speed deviation is 100 When 10 is set the torque Iq command is 10 rated Iq when the speed deviation is 100 Set the 100 speed in Pr 1121 Per unit speed control reference frequency The speed control P gain becomes as follows according to Pr 1117 Speed control P gain 1 per unit system Pr 1118 Speed control P gain 2 per unit system and the RT signal I002815E Fig 5 ...

Page 286: ...nal When the X44 signal is turned ON integration is stopped and the accumulated integral term is reduced and cleared according to Pr 1115 Speed control integral term clear time Shock at P PI control switchover is absorbed InPr 1115 settimewhentheintegraltermisreducedfrom100 to0 regardingtheratedtorque current Iq as 100 Turning OFF the X44 signal resumes the integral operation I002518E Fig 5 28 Fun...

Page 287: ...852 1 The parameter setting and the number of encoder pulses used are different 앫 If the parameter setting value is lower than the number of encoder pulses used the motor will not rotate Set Pr 369 Pr 851 Number of encoder pulses correctly Encoder power specifications are incorrect Alternatively power is not input 앫 Check the encoder power specifications 5 V 12 V 15 V 24 V and input the external p...

Page 288: ...t Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 5 84 앫 Perform speed feed forward control Load inertia is too high 앫 Set acceleration deceleration time suitable for the load 7 Machinemovement is unstable Speed control gain is not suitable for the machine 앫 Perform easy gain tuning 앫 Adjust Pr 820 and Pr 821 앫 Perform speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control Response is slow...

Page 289: ...l becomes valid 878 G221 Speed feed forward filter 0 s 0 to 1 s Set the primary delay filter for the result of the speed feed forward calculated from the speed command and load inertia ratio 879 G222 Speed feed forward torque limit 150 0 to 400 Set a maximum limit for the speed feed forward torque 880 C114 Load inertia ratio 7 fold 0 to 200 fold Set the load inertia ratio for the motor 881 G223 Sp...

Page 290: ...d result can also be lessened with a primary delay filter in Pr 878 I002520E Fig 5 29 Block diagram of speed feed forward control NOTES The speed feed forward control is enabled for the first motor Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while Pr 877 1 the second motor is operated as Pr 877 0 Under PM sensorless vector control this function is available when low speed range high t...

Page 291: ... speed control reference frequency I002521E Fig 5 30 Block diagram of model adaptive speed control NOTES The model adaptive speed control is enabled for the first motor Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while Pr 877 2 the second motor is operated as Pr 877 0 Under PM sensorless vector control the notch filter is available when low speed range high torque characteristic is en...

Page 292: ...ayed Write is not available The tuning result is displayed Write is not available Pr 821 Speed control integral time 1 Manual input The tuning result is displayed Write is not available The tuning result is displayed Write is not available Pr 828 Model speed control gain Manual input The tuning result is displayed Write is not available The tuning result is displayed Write is not available Pr 881 ...

Page 293: ...rque bias amount 400 to 1 842 G232 Torque bias 2 1000 to 1400 Positive torque bias amount 0 to 400 843 G233 Torque bias 3 9999 No torque bias setting 844 G234 Torque bias filter 9999 0 to 5 s The time until the torque starts up 9999 The same operation as 0 s 845 G235 Torque bias operation time 9999 0 to 5 s The time for retaining the torque of the torque bias amount 9999 The same operation as 0 s ...

Page 294: ...to input the X43 signal set 43 When Pr 841 1025 the torque bias is 25 When Pr 842 975 the torque bias is 25 When Pr 843 925 the torque bias is 75 Torque bias selection 1 X42 Torque bias selection 2 X43 Torque bias amount OFF OFF 0 ON OFF Pr 841 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 OFF ON Pr 842 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 ON ON Pr 843 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 Tab 5 41 Setting ...

Page 295: ...e motor rotation I002525E Forward motor rotation I002526E Tab 5 42 Setting the torque bias amount using terminal 1 NOTE Input 0 to 10 V torque command to the terminal 1 that is used for the torque bias function Any negative input voltage is regarded as 0 V Torque command terminal 1 gain C18 Pr 920 Torque command terminal 1 gain C16 Pr 919 Voltage for balanced load Pr 846 C17 Pr 919 Bias amount Ter...

Page 296: ...es read C16 C17 Pr 919 Press the SET key C16 C17 Pr 919 setting completed The load input at no load is set as the terminal 1 bias and a terminal 1 bias command is automatically set according to the load Drive under the maximum load When the speed stabilizes read C18 C19 Pr 920 Press the SET key C18 C19 Pr 920 setting completed The load input at the maximum load is set astheterminal1gain and a term...

Page 297: ...g input selection and terminal 1 is the main speed no main speed main speed 0 Hz is set The torque bias is valid for the first motor When applying the second motor RT signal is ON the torque bias function is not performed Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each term...

Page 298: ...ency for a continuous time equal to or longer than the setting value in Pr 853 Speed deviation time Speed deviation excess detection E OSD activates to shut off the inverter output Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 285 H416 Speed deviation excess detection frequency 9999 0 to 30 Hz Set the speed deviation excess detection frequency difference between the actual rotation speed and spe...

Page 299: ...ctive function E OSD is activated to trip the inverter I001519E Fig 5 34 Speed limit NOTES When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected Pr 57 Restart coasting time 9999 and the setting value for the number of encoder pulses is lower than the actual number of pulses the output speed is limited with the synchronous speed of the value of Pr 1 Maximum frequency Pr ...

Page 300: ... speed control of the vector control If the protective function E OSD operates due to deceleration check check whether the Pr 369 Pr 851 Number of encoder pulses setting is correct Parameters referred to Pr 285 Overspeed detection frequency page 5 692 Pr 369 Number of encoder pulses page 2 73 Pr 851 Control terminal option Number of encoder pulses page 2 73 ...

Page 301: ...the required notch frequency to be determined Pr 1004 Notch filter depth A deeper notch depth has a greater effect in reducing mechanical resonance but because the phase delay is larger vibration may increase Adjust by starting from the shallowest value Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 1003 G601 Notch filter frequency 0 0 No notch filter 8 to 1250 Hz Set the frequency for the center...

Page 302: ...The setting can be adjusted according to the width of the frequency range to be excluded If the width is too wide the response level of speed control will drop and the system may become unstable NOTE If a value higher than 500 Hz is set in Pr 1003 while the response speed is normal Pr 800 any of 0 to 5 and 9 to 14 the inverter operates at 500 Hz Parameters referred to Pr 800 Control method selecti...

Page 303: ...prevent the motor from overspeeding set a speed limit Speed control is performed instead of torque control during speed limit If speed limit is not set speed limit value setting is regarded as 0 Hz and torque control is not enabled Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page To selection the torque command source and to set the torque command value Torque command P D400 to P D402 P G210 Pr 803 to Pr 80...

Page 304: ... Motor Encoder Pr 800 1 Real sensorless vector control Pr 800 11 Speed estimation Speed detection filter Pr 827 Pr 837 Pr 823 Pr 833 Torque detection filter Torque control integral time 2 Pr 835 Torque control P gain 2 Pr 834 Torque control P gain 1 Pr 824 Torque control P gain 1 Pr 825 Motor Encoder Constant power range torque characteristic selection Pr 803 Torque command source selection Pr 804...

Page 305: ...74 Pr 832 Pr 74 Maximum minimum setting Acceleration decelerationprocessing When Pr 807 2 and Pr 1 Maximum frequency is the speed limit acceleration deceleration processing is not performed Reverse rotation Forward rotation Forward rotation Reverse rotation Terminal 1 input 0 to 10 V Terminal 1 input 10 to 0 V Terminal 1 input 0 to 10 V Terminal 1 input 10 to 0 V Pr 807 2 Pr 807 1 Pr 807 1 Operati...

Page 306: ...s the torque command Speed limit Selects the speed limit input method and inputs a speed limit value Tab 5 45 Signal input Speed limit value is increased up to preset value according to the Pr 7 Acceleration time setting Speed limit value Torque control Speed limit Speed limit value is decreased downtozeroaccordingtothePr 8 Deceleration time setting Output torque is provided according to the termi...

Page 307: ...hen the torque command and load torque are balanced The direction of motor torque generation is determined by a combination of the input torque command polarity and the start signal as given in the following table I002532E Fig 5 41 Transition operation Polarity of torque command Torque generation direction STF signal ON STR signal ON torque command Forward direction forward power driving reverse r...

Page 308: ...unction is invalid When Pr 261 11 12 the operation is performed in the same manner as if Pr 261 1 2 Under torque control perform linear acceleration deceleration Pr 29 0 initial value The inverter s protective function may operate for non linear acceleration deceleration patterns Refer to page 5 240 Performing pre excitation LX signal and X13 signal under torque control Real sensorless vector cont...

Page 309: ...g the torque control gain manually Refer to page 5 144 Enable torque control by setting Pr 800 Control method selection 11 torque control or 12 speed torque switch and torque control becomes valid Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles Pr 80 Pr 81 Refer to page 5 56 Set 0 standard motor or 1 constant torque motor in Pr 71 Applied motor Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacit...

Page 310: ...rations under torque control Otherwise an overcurrent trip E OC or opposite rotation deceleration fault E 11 will occur When performing continuous operations under Real sensorless vector control in FR A820 00250 3 7K or lower or FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower the speed fluctuation increases at 20 Hz or less and in the low speed range of less than 1 Hz there may be torque shortage In such case make a ...

Page 311: ...tion 1 torque control 2 speed torqueswitch or 5 positiontorqueswitch toenable torque control Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles Pr 80 Pr 81 Refer to page 5 56 Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V Fcontrolisperformedwhenthesettingis 9999 initialvalue Install a vector control compatible option Set the r...

Page 312: ... PROFIBUS DR communication FR A8NP 6 805 D401 Torque command value RAM 1000 600 to 1400 Writes the torque command value in RAM Regards 1000 as 0 and set torque command by an offset of 1000 806 D402 Torque command value RAM EEPROM 1000 600 to 1400 Writes the torque command value in RAM and EEPROM Regards 1000 as 0 and set torque command by an offset of 1000 1114 D403 Torque command reverse selectio...

Page 313: ...ation between the Pr 805 or Pr 806 setting and the actual torque command value To change torque command value frequently write in Pr 805 If values are written in Pr 806 frequently EEPROM life is shortened When FR A8NCE CC Link IE Field communication option is mounted torque command from FR A8NCE is enabled Fig 5 45 Torque command by terminal 1 I001524E I001525E Fig 5 46 Torque command using parame...

Page 314: ...y operation panel or parameter unit is 673 to 1327 327 to 327 setting increment is 1 Torque command by 16 bit digital input Pr 804 4 Execute torque command by 12 bit or 16 bit digital input using FR A8AX plug in option Pr 804 setting Torque command input Setting range Setting increments FR A8NC PLC function FR A8NCE FR A8NP 1 Torque command by Pr 805 Pr 806 Torque command by remote register RWw2 T...

Page 315: ... when the reverse rotation command STR is turned ON can be selected using Pr 1114 Torque command reverse selection Pr 803 setting Torque characteristic in the constant output range 0 initial value 10 Constant motor output 1 11 Constant torque Tab 5 47 Torque characteristics in the constant output area I001526E Fig 5 47 Motor characteristic Pr 1114 setting Torque command polarity at STR signal ON s...

Page 316: ...n speed limit reverse side speed limit 9999 0 to 400 Hz Sets the reverse side speed limit 9999 Pr 808 setting value is effective 1113 H414 Speed limit method selection 0 9999 Speed limit mode 1 0 Speed limit mode 2 1 Speed limit mode 3 2 Speed limit mode 4 10 X93 OFF Speed limit mode 3 X93 ON Speed limit mode 4 Pr 1113 setting Speed limit method Speed limit value 9999 Speed limit mode 1 Forward ro...

Page 317: ... frequency setting value speed limit value becomes the Pr 1 setting value When the speed limit command is smaller than Pr 2 Minimum frequency setting value speed limit value becomes the Pr 2 setting value Also when the speed limit command is smaller than the Pr 13 Starting frequency the speed limit value becomes 0 Hz To perform speed limit by analog input calibrate analog input terminals 1 2 and 4...

Page 318: ...anbeswitchedbetween forward and reverse rotation by its voltage polarity When Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment 5 forward reverse speed limit is enabled If 0 to 10 V is input forward rotation speed limit is applied Reverse rotation speed limit at this time is the value of Pr 1 Maximum frequency If 10 to 0 V is input reverse rotation speed limit is applied Forward rotation speed limit at this t...

Page 319: ... Output torque Torque controllable range Pr 7 Reverse rotation Pr 8 Torque controllable range Start signal OFF ON OFF ON Pr 1 Start signal Pr 1 Torque controllable range Pr 8 Pr 7 Terminal 1 input 10 to 0 V The reverse rotation speed limit Time Time The reverse rotation speed limit Terminal 1 input 0 to 10 V The forward rotation speed limit Speed When terminal 1 input is 10 to 0 V When terminal 1 ...

Page 320: ...posite to the torque polarity the setting of Pr 809 Reverse rotation speed limit reverse side speed limit is applied for the speed limit The speed limit value and reverse side speed limit value are limited at Pr 1 Maximum frequency maximum 400 Hz under vector control I002817E Fig 5 52 Speed limit mode 2 ON Time When the torque command value is positive When the torque command value is negative Spe...

Page 321: ... maximum 400 Hz under vector control I002818E I002819E Fig 5 53 Speed limit mode 3 Pr 809 ON Speed limit value Torque command value Range where torque control is available Reverse side speed limit value Pr 809 Range where torque control is available Range where torque control is available Reverse side speed limit value Reverse side speed limit value Start signal Start signal OFF OFF ON Time Speed ...

Page 322: ...ed at Pr 1 Maximum frequency maximum 400 Hz under vector control I002820E I002821E_D Fig 5 54 Speed limit mode 3 ON Speed limit value Torque command value Range where torque control is available Reverse side speed limit value Pr 809 Range where torque control is available Range where torque control is available Reverse side speed limit value Start signal Start signal OFF OFF ON Time Speed limit va...

Page 323: ...3 in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 out put terminal function selection to assign the OL signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirm ing the function of each terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after...

Page 324: ... types of gain Pr 834 Pr 835 Use Pr 834 Torque control P gain 2 Pr 835 Torque control integral time 2 if the gain setting needs to be switched according to application or if multiple motors are switched by a single inverter The Pr 834 and Pr 835 settings are valid when the second function selection RT signal is ON Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 824 G213 Torque control P gain 1 cur...

Page 325: ...urrent from the motor If it still requires improvement make Pr 825 longer Pr 824 Lower the setting by 10 increments and set a value that is approximately 0 8 to 0 9 times the setting value immediately before abnormal noise or current is improved If set too low current ripple is produced and produces a sound from the motor that synchronizes with it Pr 825 Lengthen the current setting by doubling it...

Page 326: ...ed and parameter settings do not match 앫 Correctly set Pr 862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used refer to page 5 64 2 When a small torque command is given the motor rotates in a direction opposite to the start signal 앫 Torque offset calibration is inaccurate 앫 Re calibrate C16 Terminal 1 bias command torque and C17 Terminal 1 bias torque Refer to page 5 409 3 Torque contro...

Page 327: ...e the torque limit is invalid at a change in the speed command value to adjust the internal speed command value to the actual speed Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 800 G200 Control method selection 20 6 Vector control Variable current limiter torque control 106 Vector control fast response operation 0to5 100to 105 Vector control 9 109 Vector control test operation 10to12 100 to 112...

Page 328: ...hange I002823E Fig 5 56 Generated torque depending on Pr 800 setting NOTE When Pr 800 6 or 106 torque control by a variable current limiter Pr 690 Deceleration check time and Pr 873 Speed limit are ignored Parameters referred to Pr 690 Deceleration check time page 5 118 Pr 873 Speed limit page 5 118 Pr 800 Control method selection page 5 56 0 0 0 0 0 0 Speed command value Line speed Torque limit v...

Page 329: ...20 to P B050 P B101 P B120 to P B188 P B190 to P B195 Pr 419 Pr 464 to Pr 494 Pr 1221 to Pr 1290 Pr 1292 Pr 1293 5 132 To perform position control by pulse input to the inverter Simple pulse train position command P B000 P B009 P B010 Pr 419 Pr 428 Pr 429 5 169 To adjust the gear ratio of the motor and machine Electronic gear settings P B001 P B002 P B005 Pr 420 Pr 421 Pr 424 5 177 To improve the ...

Page 330: ...e input stops the amount of droop pulses in the deviation counter decreases and thus the speed slows down When there is no droop pulse the motor stops If the numberofdroop pulses becomes smallerthanthe value set in Pr 426 In positionwidth the system determines that positioning is complete and the positioning completion signal Y36 is turned ON I002535E Fig 5 57 Control block diagram 0 M 2 0 1 0 1 2...

Page 331: ...unction selection To assign the positioning completion signal Y36 set 36 in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output ter minal function selection Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 or Pr 190 to Pr 196 may affect other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 422 Pr 190 to Pr 1...

Page 332: ...irection and Pr 369 Pr 851 Number of encoder pulses according to the motor and encoder Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value Set the positioning parameters Pr 465 to Pr 494 and Pr 1222 to Pr 1281 Refer to page 5 132 Position command by contact input Set Pr 41...

Page 333: ... pulses motor rotation The positioning accuracy is 200 pulses rev for 1 5K or lower and 100 pulses rev for 2K or higher under no load PM PM PM Test run Select the position command source Pr 419 Select the control mode Pr 800 Refer to page 5 56 As required 앫 Set the electronic gear Refer to page 5 177 앫 Set the position adjustment parameters Refer to page 5 179 앫 Adjust the position control gain Re...

Page 334: ...99 469 B025 Third target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the target position of point table 3 470 B026 Third target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 471 B027 Fourth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the target position of the point table 4 472 B028 Fourth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 473 B029 Fifth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the target posi...

Page 335: ...ge detection selection 0 0 Turning OFF the forward reverse rotation command will stop the motor in the setting time of Pr 464 1 Position forward is continued even if the forward reverse rotation command is turned OFF 1222 B120 First positioning acceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s Set the characteristics of the point table 1 1223 B121 First positioning deceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s 1224 B122 ...

Page 336: ...leration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s Set the characteristics of the point table 7 1247 B145 Seventh positioning deceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s 1248 B146 Seventh positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms 1249 B147 Seventh positioning sub function 10 0 1 10 11 100 101 110 111 1250 B148 Eighth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s Set the characteristics of the point table 8 1251 B149 Eight...

Page 337: ... 0 01 to 360 s Set the characteristics of the point table 14 1275 B173 Fourteenth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s 1276 B174 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms 1277 B175 Fourteenth positioning sub function 10 0 1 10 11 100 101 110 111 1278 B176 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s Set the characteristics of the point table 15 1279 B177 Fifteent...

Page 338: ...r torque 40 0 to 200 Set the activation level of torque limit operation for the stopper type home position return 1290 B188 Home position return stopper waiting time 0 5 s 0 to 10 s Set the waiting time until home position return is started after the inverter detects the pressing status 1292 B190 Position control terminal input selection 0 0 Sudden stop signal X87 of normally open input NO contact...

Page 339: ...me If the accelera tion deceleration rate is smaller than 1 the motor runs at 1 Hz s or in the deceleration time The maximum acceleration deceleration time is limited at 360 s During position control acceleration deceleration pattern is always the liner acceleration decel eration and the Pr 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection setting is ignored Point table Position data command side Max...

Page 340: ...ance from the current position command Position commands cannot be received until the completion of the home position return For the operation method select individual or continuous When continuous operation is select ed next point table is executed after a command has been executed Set individual as the operation method for the point table that will be the last of the continuously operated point ...

Page 341: ...r point tables I002536E Fig 5 61 Positioning operation by point tables NOTES During continuous operation the operation moves on to the next table after the position com mand speed becomes 0 During continuous operation no point table selection signal is received Select the position feed length by point tables before turning ON the start command Only the maximum frequency can be changed during opera...

Page 342: ...ary Pr 1286 10000 Pr 1285 Set the post proximity dog travel distance if necessary Pr 1288 10000 Pr 1287 Turn OFF all point table selections Turn OFF all RH RM RL and REX signals Turn ON the Pre excitation servo ON LX signal Turn ON the start signal STF or STR Home position return is performed according to the settings I002537E Fig 5 62 Positioning operation by point tables NOTES The setting values...

Page 343: ...he the first Z phase signal or position of the Z phase signal shifted by the home position shift amount Pr 1285 Pr 1286 I002539E 2 Data set type The position at which the start signal is input is used as the home position I002540E Tab 5 57 Home position return methods 1 Vector Vector Vector X76 LX 0 STF Home position return speed Point table 1 acceleration time Point table 1 decelerationtime Creep...

Page 344: ...fter the back end is passed the position is shifted by the post dog travel distance and home position shift amount The position after the shifts is set as the home position Set pulses required for deceleration from the creep speed or more as the total of the post dog travel distance and home position shift amount I002825E Pr 1282 Setting Home position return method Description Tab 5 57 Home positi...

Page 345: ... function In a system that uses home position return with proximity dog if the home position return is com manded while the motor is in a position within the proximity dog the motor moves out of the proximity dog once then starts deceleration to stop when it comes to the proximity dog again The home position return is performed automatically after that Pr 1282 Setting Home position return method D...

Page 346: ...e position return 앫 The proximity dog signal is turned OFF during transition from the home position return speed to the creep speed when home position return is performed in the dog type or dog type back end reference 앫 The position command is given for the motor to reach the post dog travel distance during transition from the home position return speed to the creep speed when home position return...

Page 347: ... a terminal The input logic of the X87 signal can be set using Pr 1292 Position control terminal input selection I002543E Fig 5 63 Sudden stop I002544E Fig 5 64 Sudden stop during positioning operation or home position return operation Pr 1292 setting Input logic X87 0 initial value Normally open input NO contact input specification 1 Normally closed input NC contact input specification Tab 5 59 I...

Page 348: ... I002827E Fig 5 65 Basic operation of roll feed mode Input output Signal name Function Pr 178 to Pr 189 setting Pr 190 to Pr 196 setting Positive logic Negative logic Input X76 Proximity dog ON dog ON OFF dog OFF 76 X87 Sudden stop When turned ON the motor decelerates and stops according to Pr 464 87 Output MEND Travel completed Turns ON when the position command operation has completed while the ...

Page 349: ...utput signal operation during positioning with home position return Parameters referred to Pr 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency page 5 233 Pr 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection page 5 240 Y36 LX 0 STF PBSY RH MEND Speed Position command Point table 1 Motor speed Dwell time Point table 2 Time Point table selection signal X76 LX 0 STF MEND ZPEND Y36 PBSY Point table select...

Page 350: ...e corre sponding direction Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 419 B000 Position command source selection 0 0 Simple position control by point tables position command by setting parameters 2 Simple pulse train command by inverter pulse input 428 B009 Command pulse selection 0 0 to 2 Pulse train rotation direction sign Negative logic 3 to 5 Positive logic 429 B010 Clear signal selection...

Page 351: ...ter is cleared For a terminal used for the CLR signal set 69 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function Pr 428 setting Command pulse train type During forward rotation During reverse rotation 0 to 2 Negative logic Pulse train rotation direction sign 3 to 5 Positive logic Pulse train rotation direction sign Tab 5 61 Setting of parameter 428 NOTE If Pr 419 2 ...

Page 352: ...P 637 M612 Control terminal option Cumulative pulse division scaling factor 1 1 to 16384 Set the division scaling factor on the cumulative pulse for the control terminal option FR A8TP 638 M613 Cumulative pulse storage 0 0 to 3 Select the processing method for the cumulative pulse monitor value when the power is turned OFF or the inverter is reset Pr 430 Setting Description 첸첸첸0 Pulse monitor sele...

Page 353: ... monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor position command current position and droop pulse after the electronic gear operation Displays the item in the PLC function special register position command current position droop pulse and current position 2 after the electronic gear operation 9999 initial value Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor position command cu...

Page 354: ...t displayed on the operation panel The values 1 to 32767 are displayed as 65535 to 32769 on the operation panel Display data Monitor display without signs Monitor display with signs 10000 Lower monitor Upper monitor 100 Lower monitor Upper monitor Tab 5 64 Pulse monitor NOTE The pulse count starts at servo on Types of Monitor Pr 52 Pr 774 to Pr 776 Pr 992 Display with minus sign Description Cumula...

Page 355: ...78 to Pr 184 input terminal function selection to assign the function to a terminal Use Pr 635 Cumulative pulse clear signal selection to select the clearing method for the cumulative pulse monitor and the cumulative pulse overflow times Pr 635 X52 signal Cumulative pulse monitor clear X53 signal Cumulative pulse monitor clear control terminal option 0 Cleared at the edge when the signal is switch...

Page 356: ... EEPROM Retained Stored in the EEPROM Retained Tab 5 67 Pr 638 settings NOTES When the power is turned OFF during the reset process the cumulative pulse monitor value and the cumulative pulse carrying overflow times are not stored in the EEPROM For storing the cumulative pulse monitor value and the cumulative pulse overflow times in the EEPROM at power OFF connect R1 L11 with P and S1 L21 with N s...

Page 357: ...pulse Thefollowingformulashowstherelationshipbetweenthemotorspeedandinternalcommandpulse frequency fo Internal command pulse frequency pps No Motor rotation speed r min Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 420 B001 Command pulse scaling factor numerator electronic gear numerator 1 1 to 32767 Set the electronic gear Pr 420 is the numerator and Pr 421 is the denominator 421 B002 Command p...

Page 358: ...a stop settling time ts which is the time be tween the zero command output and the motor stop is required Set the operation pattern taking into the account the stop setting time The stop settling time ts will be 0 12 s for the initial value Kp 25 s 1 The accuracy of positioning Δε will be 5 to 10 Δl Δε mm Example 쑴 Setting example 1 In a driving system whose ball screw pitch is PB 10 mm and the re...

Page 359: ...etected Excessive position fault E OD is activated and the inverter output is shut off Increase the error threshold level when a small value is set as the Position control gain setting value Set a small value for early detection even when the load is heavy If Pr 427 9999 is set E OD is not activated regardless of the amount of droop pulses Parameters referred to Pr 422 Position control gain page 5...

Page 360: ...ed on both the plus and minus sides When 1 is set the position is detected on the plus side only When 2 is set the position is detected on the minus side only When a current position varies the position detected signal may repeat ON OFF chatter Setting hysteresis to the detected position prevents chattering of the signal Use Pr 1297 Position detection hysteresis width to set a hysteresis width I00...

Page 361: ...osition feed forward gain 0 0 to 100 Function to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses in the deviation counter 425 B006 Position feed forward command filter 0 s 0 to 5 s Input the first delay filter for the feed forward command 446 B012 Model position control gain 25 s 1 0 to 150 s 1 Set the gain for the model position controller 828 G224 Model speed control gain 60 0 to 1000 Set the gain for...

Page 362: ...on has no effects on servo rigidity at a stop Normally set this parameter to 0 When setting Pr 423 set Pr 877 0 or 1 to enable position feed forward control Model adaptive position control Pr 446 Set each response for position commands and for load and external disturbances individually Set this parameter when a sufficient position response cannot be obtained after setting Pr 422 WhensettingPr 446...

Page 363: ... position feed length set by Pr 465 to Pr 494 is not correct Check the position feed length in Pr 465 to Pr 494 The option to be used and parameter settings do not match Correctly set Pr 862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used Refer to page 5 64 2 The position is unfavorably shifted A command pulse is not correctly input 앫 Check the command pulse type in Pr 428 Command puls...

Page 364: ...ng The forward reverse rotation stroke end signal has turned off before completion of positioning Motor or machine is hunting The position control gain Pr 422 is high Decrease the position control gain Pr 422 Insufficient torque Increase the excitation ratio Pr 854 Please contact your sales representative Machine operation is unstable Perform easy gain tuning The speed control gain is high Decreas...

Page 365: ... 7 Acceleration time page 5 233 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 233 Pr 72 PWM frequency selection page 5 219 Pr 800 Control method selection page 5 56 Pr 802 Pre excitation selection page 5 663 Pr 819 Easy gain tuning selection page 5 67 Pr 820 Speed control P gain 1 page 5 67 Pr 821 Speed control integral time 1 page 5 67 ...

Page 366: ...ed if the setting value is too large Employing multiple primary delay filters Use Pr 833 Pr 837 if changing filter according to application Pr 833 Pr 837 Second function selection RT signal Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page To stabilize speed and torque feedback signal Speed detection filter Torque detection filter P G215 P G216 P G315 P G316 Pr 823 Pr 827 Pr 833 Pr 837 5 186 To changes excit...

Page 367: ...suddenly accelerate deceler ate repeatedly up to high speed Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 854 G217 Excitation ratio 100 0 to 100 Set an excitation ratio when there is no load I001543E Fig 5 74 Setting of the excitation ratio NOTE The setting of Pr 854 is invalid if Pr 858 Terminal 4 function assignment or Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment is set to 1 flux command according to...

Page 368: ...ent loop integral time to set the integral time of current controllers for the d axis and the q axis If the setting value is small it produces current fluctuation toward disturbance decreasing time until it returns to original current value Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 824 G213 Torque control P gain 1 current loop proportional gain 100 0 to 500 The proportional gain of the curre...

Page 369: ...hange increment amount setting P E201 Pr 295 5 200 To use the regeneration unit to increase the motor braking torque Regenerative brake selection P E300 P G107 Pr 30 Pr 70 5 675 To change the overload current rating specification Multiple rating setting P E301 Pr 570 5 201 To input a voltage between 480 V and 500 V Input voltage mode selection P E302 Pr 977 5 203 To prevent parameter rewriting Par...

Page 370: ... 759 800 to 859 900 to 959 1000 to 1059 1100 to 1159 1200 to 1259 1300 to 1359 1400 to 1459 1500 to 1559 1600 to 1659 1700 to 1759 1800 to 1859 1900 to 1959 2000 to 2059 2100 to 2159 2200 to 2259 2300 to 2359 Set the hour and minute using the 24 hour clock 1000 and 100 digits 0 to 23 hours 10 and 1 digits 0 to 59 minutes For 23 59 set 2359 NOTES The clock s count up data is saved in the inverter s...

Page 371: ...t the clock of FR LU08 use the FR LU08 and set Pr 1006 to Pr 1008 I003015E Fig 5 75 Synchronization of internal clock with FR LU08 clock NOTES Time adjustment between the inverter internal clock and the FR LU08 is performed every one minute When the FR LU08 clock is initialized after the battery is exhausted for example the inverter inter nal clock is valid PREV NEXT SET STOP PU Hz 0 00 Hz Out 1 0...

Page 372: ...d E101 Disconnected PU detection 0 0 Operation continues even when the PU is disconnected 1 The inverter output is shut off when the PU is disconnected E102 PU stop selection 1 0 Decelerates to a stop when the STOP key is pressed in PU operation mode only 1 Decelerates to a stop when the STOP key for PU is pressed in any of the PU external and communication operation modes E107 Reset limit 0 0 Res...

Page 373: ...al RES is input during operation the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output Also the cumulative values of electronic thermal O L relay and regener ative brake duty are cleared The input of the PU reset key is only enabled when the protective function is activated regardless of the P E100 and Pr 75 settings NOTES When the PU has been disconnected since before power ON the ...

Page 374: ...and 114 to 117 if an electronic thermal O L relay or an overcurrent protective function E THM E THT E OC첸 is activated while one of them has been already activated within 3 minutes the inverter will not accept any reset command RES signal etc for about 3 minutes from the second activation The reset limit function is available with the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher I00...

Page 375: ...t signal is being input Doing so will cause a sudden start of the motor which is dangerous Parameters referred to Pr 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence page 5 307 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 263 Pr 250 Stop selection page 5 430 Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 274 ...

Page 376: ...tting value makes the contrast lighter The above parameter is displayed as a simple mode parameter only when the LCD operation panel FR LU08 and the parameter unit FR PU07 is connected Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 145 E103 PU display language selection 1 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian 6 Swedish 7 Finnish Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description...

Page 377: ...USB connector connector A the USB host error can be can celed without performing an inverter reset Parameter copy refer to page 5 702 and the trace function refer to page 5 591 can be used when a USB device such as a USB memory is connected to the USB connector connector A When a device such as a USB charger is connected to the USB connector and an excessive current 500 mA or higher flows USB host...

Page 378: ...5 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 161 E200 Frequency setting key lock operation selection 0 0 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock mode disabled 1 Setting dial potentiometer mode 10 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock mode enabled 11 Setting dial potentiometer mode NOTES If the display changes from flickering 60 00 to 0 00 the setting value of Pr 161 may not be 1 T...

Page 379: ...When setting dial and key operations are disabled appears on the operation panel If setting dial or key operation is attempted while dial and key operations are disabled appears When a setting dial or key operation is not performed for 2 s the monitor display appears To enable the setting dial and key operation again press MODE key for 2 s NOTES Even if setting dial and key operations are disabled...

Page 380: ...hange increment amount setting 0 0 Function invalid 0 01 The minimum change width when the set frequency is changed with the setting dial can be set 0 10 1 00 10 00 I002549E Fig 5 77 Magnitude when parameter 295 is set to 1 00 NOTES When machine speed display is selected in Pr 37 Speed display the minimum increments of change are determined by Pr 295 as well Note that the setting value may differ ...

Page 381: ...mperature 50 C Pr Name Pr 570 setting Refer to 0 1 2 Initial value 3 0 Torque boost 5 652 7 Acceleration time 5 233 8 Deceleration time 5 233 9 Electronic thermal O L relay SLD rated current LD rated current ND rated current HD rated current 5 292 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 5 663 22 Stall prevention operation level 110 120 150 200 5 84 5 314 48 Second stall prevention operation level ...

Page 382: ... 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 8 s 0 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 12 0 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Tab 5 72 Initial values of Pr 0 Pr 7 Pr 8 and Pr 12 depending on Pr 570 setting Pr Setting Pr 570 setting...

Page 383: ... Use this function to pre vent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation Pr 77 can be set at any time regardless of the operation mode or operation status Setting through communication is unavailable Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 977 E302 Input voltage mode selection 0 0 400 V class voltage protection level 1 500 V class voltage protection level NOTES Stand alone opti...

Page 384: ...meter 134 PID differential time 891 to 899 Energy saving monitor 158 AM terminal function selection C0 900 FM CA terminal calibration 160 User group read selection C1 901 AM terminal calibration 232 to 239 Multi speed setting speed 8 to speed 15 C8 930 Current output bias signal 240 Soft PWM operation selection C9 930 Current output bias current 241 Analog input display unit switchover C10 931 Cur...

Page 385: ... value stop the operation Pr Name Pr Name 22 Stall prevention operation level 345 346 DeviceNet communication 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection 496 497 Remote output 77 Parameter write selection 656 to 659 Analog remote output 79 Operation mode selection 805 Torque command value RAM 160 User group read selection 806 Torque command value RAM EEPROM 296 Password lock lev...

Page 386: ...ction 178 to 196 Input and output terminal function selection 699 Input terminal filter 248 Self power management selection 702 Maximum motor frequency 254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 706 707 711 712 717 721 724 725 PM motor tuning 261 Power failure stop selection 738 to 746 Second PM motor tuning 289 Inverter output terminal filter 747 Second motor low speed range torque characteristic se...

Page 387: ...ction refer to page 5 274 This restricts parameter access from the command source that can write a parameter under the Network operation mode initially the RS 485 terminals or a communication option For the NET operation mode command source selection refer to page 5 274 Read write is enabled only for the simple mode parameters registered in the user group when Pr 160 9999 Pr 296 and Pr 297 are alw...

Page 388: ...he parameters are returned to their initial values Writea four digitnumber 1000to 9998 in Pr 297asa password WritingisdisabledwhenPr 296 9999 When a password is registered parameter reading writing is restricted with the restric tion level set in Pr 296 until unlocking Pr 296 setting Password unlock error restriction Pr 297 display 0 to 6 99 No restriction Always displays 0 100 to 106 199 Restrict...

Page 389: ...parameter clear cannot be performed during the operation During the conditions where parameter reading is disabled Pr 296 any of 0 4 5 99 100 104 105 or 199 do not use FR Configurator2 It may not operate correctly The password unlocking method differs between the operation panel parameter unit RS 485 communication and communication option For the parameter clear and parameter all clear methods for...

Page 390: ...9 Pr 296 9999 Pr 297 0 to 4 read value Pr 296 100 to 106 199 Pr 297 5 read value Pr 296 Read Write Pr 297 Read Write Parameter clear execution All parameter clear execution Parameter copy execution Enabled Disabled Tab 5 78 Parameter operation during password lock unlock NOTES When Pr 296 4 5 104 or 105 password lock the setting screen for PU JOG frequency is not displayed in the parameter unit FR...

Page 391: ...matically Users do not have to consider each parameter num ber Automatic parameter setting mode The read value is always 9999 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 888 E420 Free parameter 1 9999 0 to 9999 Any value can be input The settings are retained even if the inverter power is turned OFF 889 E421 Free parameter 2 9999 0 to 9999 NOTE Pr 888 and Pr 889 do not influence the operation ...

Page 392: ... parameters for the GOT connection with RS 485 terminals Controller Type in GOT FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO 12 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with a PU connector Controller Type in GOT FREQROL 800 Automatic Negotiation AUTO GOT Write 2 13 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with RS 485 terminals Controller Type in ...

Page 393: ... 5 327 775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 9999 9999 53 776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 9999 9999 54 C42 934 PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0 5 543 C44 935 PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100 1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0 1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100 3 step monitor setting Disabled Enabled Extended direct setting Disabled ...

Page 394: ...tting Refer to page 5 649 Initial setting with the GOT1000 series Set Pr 999 10 to configure the GOT initial setting Pr Name Initial value Pr 999 10 Pr 999 12 Refer to page 79 Operation mode selection 0 1 1 5 263 118 PU communication speed 192 192 1152 5 610 119 PU communication stop bit length 1 10 0 120 PU communication parity check 2 1 1 121 Number of PU communication retries 1 9999 9999 122 PU...

Page 395: ...l setting with the GOT1000 series Set Pr 999 10 to configure the GOT initial setting Pr Name Initial value Pr 999 11 Pr 999 13 Refer to page 79 Operation mode selection 0 0 1 5 263 332 RS 485 communication speed 96 192 1152 5 610 333 RS 485 communication stop bit length 1 10 0 334 RS 485 communication parity check selection 2 1 1 335 RS 485 communication retry count 1 9999 9999 336 RS 485 communic...

Page 396: ...z 60 Hz 50 Hz 263 Subtraction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 580 266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 282 505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 324 808 Forward rotation speed limit speed limit 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 136 C14 918 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed...

Page 397: ...gistered parameters set Pr 172 9999 NOTES When a plug in option is installed on the inverter the option parameters can also be read Every parameter can be read regardless of the Pr 160 setting when reading parameters via a com munication option When reading the parameters using the RS 485 terminals all parameters can be read regardless of the Pr 160 setting by setting Pr 550 NET mode operation com...

Page 398: ... to display Parameter registration Turn until Pr 3 appears Press to register the parameter and flicker alternately To continue adding parameters repeat steps and Tab 5 86 When registering Pr 3 to user group Operation Power ON Make sure the motor is stopped Changing the operation mode Press to choose the PU operation mode PU indicator is lit Parameter setting mode Press to select the parameter sett...

Page 399: ... than 9999 Parameters referred to Pr 15 Jog frequency page 5 286 Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time page 5 286 Pr 77 Parameter write selection page 5 203 Pr 296 Password lock level page 5 207 Pr 297 Password lock unlock page 5 207 Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection page 5 274 Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 274 Pr 991 PU contrast adjustment page 5 196...

Page 400: ...lter MT BSL BSC set Pr 72 25 2 5 kHz FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher Soft PWM control Pr 240 Soft PWM control is a control method that changes the motor noise from a metallic sound into an inoffensive complex tone Setting Pr 240 1 will enable the Soft PWM control To enable the Soft PWM control for the FR A820 03160 55K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower set Pr 72 to 5 ...

Page 401: ... higher rated inverter current reduces the carrier frequency automatically 1 LD Without carrier frequency automatic reduction Perform continuous operation with the carrier frequency set to 2 kHz or lower or with less than 85 of the rated inverter current 2 ND 3 HD Without carrier frequency automatic reduction Without carrier frequency automatic reduction Perform continuous operation with the carri...

Page 402: ...pacitor main circuit capacitor cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit have reached the life alarm output level Read only 256 E701 Inrush current limit circuit life display 100 0 to 100 Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush current limit circuit Read only 257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display 100 0 to 100 Displays the deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor R...

Page 403: ...s is reached Pr 255 bit 3 is turned ON and also a warning is output to the Y90 signal Pr 255 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 Pr 255 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 Decimal Binary Deci mal Binary 15 1111 31 1111 14 1110 30 1110 13 1101 29 1101 12 1100 28 1100 11 1011 27 1011 10 1010 26 1010 9 1001 25 1001 8 1000 24 1000 7 0111 23 0111 6 0110 22 0110 5 0101 21 0101 4 0100 20 0100 3 0011 19 0011 2 0010 18 0010 1 0001 1...

Page 404: ...d ON and also a warning is output to the Y90 signal Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration degree of the capacitor capacity Check that the motor is connected and at a stop Set 1 measuring start in Pr 259 Switch the power OFF The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the inverter is OFF After confirm...

Page 405: ...motor is running coasting The motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more The inverter is tripped or a fault occurred while the power was OFF The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal The start command is given while measuring The applied motor setting is incorrect Operation environment surrounding air temperature annual average of 40 C free from corro sive ...

Page 406: ...rminal used for the LF signal set 98 positive logic or 198 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection NOTES When the inverter is mounted with two ore more cooling fans FN is displayed with one or more fans with speed of 50 or less Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameter...

Page 407: ...unction selection Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 0 0 1 to 9998 Displays the inverter s cumulative energization time in increments of 100 h read only Writing the setting of 0 clears the cumulative energization time while Pr 503 1 to 9998 Writing is disabled when Pr 503 0 504 E711 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 9999 0 to 9998 Set the time un...

Page 408: ... MT2 MT3 MT is displayed on the FR PU07 parameter unit if any of MT1 MT2 or MT3 is activated The cumulative energization time is counted every hour Energization time of less than 1 h is not counted Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referre...

Page 409: ... the FR A820 03160 55K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Initial value for the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K and higher I002551E Fig 5 80 Monitoring the maintenance timer and current average value Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 555 E720 Current average time 1 s 0 1 to 1 s Set the time for calculating the average current during start pulse output 1 s 556 E...

Page 410: ...t average value is less than 10 of the set ting value in Pr 557 the output time is 0 5 s and when it is more than 180 the output time is 9 s For example when Pr 557 10 A and the output current average value is 15 A 15 A 10 A 5 s 7 5 s thus the current average value monitor signal is Low output in 7 5 s intervals I001265E Fig 5 81 Output of the pulse signal Y93 Output current average value 5 s Outp...

Page 411: ...f the output current value inverter output current monitor is 0 A at the completion of the 1 cycle signal output no signal is output until the next constant speed state Under the following conditions the Y93 signal is output with Low output in 20 s intervals no data output When acceleration or deceleration is operating at the completion of the 1 cycle signal output When automatic restart after ins...

Page 412: ...2 Parameters referred to Pr 57 Restart coasting time page 5 562 page 5 571 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 361 Pr 503 Maintenance timer 1 page 5 227 Pr 686 Maintenance timer 2 page 5 227 Pr 688 Maintenance timer 3 page 5 227 ...

Page 413: ...51 5 253 To set optimum acceleration deceleration time automatically Automatic acceleration deceleration P F500 P F510 to P F513 Pr 61 to Pr 63 Pr 292 5 255 To set V F pattern for lift automatically Lift operation Automatic acceleration deceleration P F500 P F510 P F520 Pr 61 Pr 64 Pr 292 5 260 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description FM CA 20 F000 Acceleration deceleration reference freque...

Page 414: ...9 Third acceleration deceleration is disabled 111 F031 Third deceleration time 9999 0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time when X9 signal is ON 9999 Acceleration time deceleration time 791 F070 Acceleration time in low speed range 9999 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time in a low speed range less than 10 of the rated motor frequency 9999 The acceleration time set in Pr 7 is applied While RT signa...

Page 415: ...reas ing the output frequency to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 s with Pr 20 60 Hz initial value and Pr 13 0 5 Hz Pr 7 60 Hz 10 s 50 Hz 0 5 Hz 12 1 s Fig 5 85 Acceleration deceleration time I002553E Pr 16 Acceleration and deceleration time Pr 7 Pr 8 Second acceleration and deceleration time Pr 44 Pr 45 Third acceleration and deceleration time Pr 110 Pr 111 Output frequency Pr 147 or Pr 147 9...

Page 416: ...r 8 when increasing the output frequency to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 s with Pr 20 120 Hz and Pr 10 3 Hz Pr 8 120 Hz 10 s 50 Hz 3 Hz 25 5 s 쑶 NOTES If the acceleration deceleration time is set the actual motor acceleration deceleration time can not be made shorter than the shortest acceleration deceleration time determined by the mechan ical system J moment of inertia and motor torque I...

Page 417: ...g frequency setting the acceleration deceleration time switches to the Pr 44 Pr 45 when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr 10 or Pr 13 setting Switching frequency for each control method Pr 147 setting Acceleration deceleration time Description 9999 initial value Pr 7 Pr 8 Acceleration deceleration time is not automatically changed 0 00 Hz Pr 44 Pr 45 Second acceleration deceleration t...

Page 418: ... The RT and X9 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr 178 to Pr 189 input ter minal function selection Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal The RT X9 signal acts as the second third function selection signal and makes the other second third functions valid Refer to page 5 428 RT signal is assig...

Page 419: ... Setting the acceleration deceleration time in the low speed range NOTE The X92 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 3 Base frequency page 5 654 Pr 10 DC injection brake operation fr...

Page 420: ...equency 1 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the stopping frequency and time during backlash measures Valid by backlash measures Pr 29 3 141 F201 Backlash acceleration stopping time 0 5 s 0 to 360 s 142 F202 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 1 Hz 0 to 590 Hz 143 F203 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0 5 s 0 to 360 s 380 F300 Acceleration S pattern 1 0 0 to 50 Set the time for drawing the S pattern from ...

Page 421: ... Hz fb base frequency rated motor frequency Reference 0 Hz to set frequency of acceleration deceleration time when Pr 3 60 Hz S pattern acceleration deceleration B Pr 29 2 This is useful for preventing collapsing stacks such as on a conveyor S pattern acceleration deceleration B can reduce the impact during acceleration deceleration by accelerating deceler ating while maintaining an S pattern from...

Page 422: ...4 Pr 380 to Pr 383 Switch the acceleration deceleration curve by the S pattern acceleration deceleration C switcho ver X20 signal To input the X20 signal set 20 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection to assign the function to the terminal Fig 5 92 Anti backlash measure function I002559E_B NOTE Setting the backlash measures increases the acceleration deceleration time by the s...

Page 423: ... Parameter setting I001552E NOTES At a start the motor starts at Pr 13 Starting frequency when the start signal turns ON If there is a difference between the speed command and speed at a start of deceleration due to torque limit operation etc the speed command is matched with the speed to make deceleration Change the X20 signal after the speed becomes constant S pattern operation before switching ...

Page 424: ... time when starting the inverter by selecting S pattern acceleration deceleration D from a stop to 60 Hz as shown below with the initial parame ter settings I001554E Fig 5 96 Actual acceleration time when starting Set acceleration time T1 Set frequency Pr 13 Pr 7 Pr 20 60 Hz 0 5 Hz 5 s 60 Hz 4 96 s actual acceleration time at linear acceleration Actual acceleration time T2 Set acceleration time T1...

Page 425: ... acceleration deceleration time such as Pr 7 and Pr 8 is set to 0 s under Real sensorless vector control vector control and PM sensorless vector control with MM CF and Pr 788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 9999 initial value linear acceleration and decel eration are performed for the S pattern acceleration deceleration A to D and backlash measures Pr 29 1 to 5 Set linear accelerat...

Page 426: ...ing is prioritized and the inverter operates as Pr 14 0 constant torque load For the variable torque acceleration deceleration time setting set the time period to reach Pr 3 Base frequency Not the time period to reach Pr 20 Acceleration deceleration reference fre quency The variable torque acceleration deceleration is disabled during PM sensorless vector control Linear acceleration deceleration is...

Page 427: ...r 59 0 remote setting function valid the functions of the RH RM and RL signals are changed to acceleration RH deceleration RM and clear RL Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description RH RM RL signal function Frequency setting storage function Deceleration to the frequency lower than the set frequency 59 F101 Restart cushion time 0 0 Multi speed setting Disabled 1 Remote setting With 2 Remote s...

Page 428: ...eration mode frequency I002563E Fig 5 100 Example of the remote setting function I002564E Fig 5 101 Acceleration deceleration operation NOTE While the RT signal is OFF Pr 44 Second acceleration deceleration time and Pr 45 Second deceleration time are used as the set frequency accelerating decelerating time at turn ON of the acceleration deceleration signal If the Pr 7 and Pr 8 settings are longer ...

Page 429: ...e latest frequency is different from the previous one when comparing the two This cannot be written with RL signals Clearing the settings WhenPr 59 1 2 11 12 andtheclearsignal RL isturnedON theremotely setfrequencyiscleared When Pr 59 3 13 and the STF STR signal is turned OFF the remotely set frequency is cleared NOTE When switching the start signal from ON to OFF or changing frequency by the RH o...

Page 430: ...oth the RH and RM signals E CAUTION When using the remote setting function set the maximum frequency again according to the machine Parameters referred to Pr 1 Maximum frequency page 5 310 Pr 18 High speed maximum frequency page 5 310 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 233 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 233 Pr 44 Second acceleration deceleration time page 5 233 Pr 45 Second deceleration time page 5 233 ...

Page 431: ...n performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a start Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 13 F102 Starting frequency 0 5 Hz 0 to 60 Hz Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned ON 571 F103 Holding time at a start 9999 0 to 10 s Set the holding time of Pr 13 9999 The holding function at a start is invalid Fig 5 102 Starting frequency parameter I002566E ...

Page 432: ...is started at that point At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation the starting frequency is valid but the start time hold function is invalid E CAUTION Note that when Pr 13 is set to any value equal to or lower than Pr 2 Minimum frequency simply turning ON the start signal will run the motor at the frequency set in Pr 2 even if the command frequency is not input Parameters referr...

Page 433: ...e Initial value Setting range Description 13 F102 Starting frequency Minimum frequency Minimum rotations per minute 0 to 60 Hz Set the frequency where the motor starts running 571 F103 Holding time at a start 9999 0 to 10 s Set the time to hold 0 01 Hz 9999 The holding function at start is disabled Fig 5 104 Starting frequency parameter I002568E NOTES Under induction motor control under V F contro...

Page 434: ...ed Pr 788 9999 Fig 5 105 Function of start time hold function I002832E E CAUTION Note that when Pr 13 is set to any value equal to or lower than Pr 2 Minimum frequency simply turning ON the start signal will run the motor at the frequency set in Pr 2 even if the command frequency is not input Parameters referred to Pr 2 Minimum frequency page 5 310 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 233 STF 0 60 Output...

Page 435: ... page 5 260 7 8 Brake sequence 1 2 Refer to page 5 484 61 F510 Reference current 9999 0 to 500 A Set the reference current during shortest optimum acceleration deceleration 0 to 3600 A 9999 Rated output current value reference of the inverter 62 F511 Reference value at acceleration 9999 0 to 220 Set the speed limit value optimum value during shortest optimum acceleration 9999 Shortest acceleration...

Page 436: ...tion level during acceleration deceleration becomes 150 adjustable using Pr 61 to Pr 63 The setting of Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level and stall level by analog input are used only during a constant speed operation Under Real sensorless vector control and vector control the torque limit level Pr 22 etc is applied during acceleration deceleration The adjustments by Pr 61 to Pr 63 are disable...

Page 437: ...erative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop E OV3 occurs during deceler ation the setting of Pr 8 is multiplied by 1 4 Parameter storage The optimum values of Pr 0 Pr 7 and Pr 8 are written to both the parameter RAM and EEPROM only three times of acceleration deceleration after the optimum acceleration deceleration has been selected or after the power is switched ON or the inverter is res...

Page 438: ...eration is enabled Because of the learning method the impact of the optimum acceleration deceleration is not apparent in the first operation after setting to the optimum acceleration deceleration mode The optimum value are calculated for only acceleration from 0 to 30 Hz or higher or deceleration from 30 Hz or higher to 0 Hz The optimum acceleration deceleration will not operate if the motor was n...

Page 439: ...leration Reference value at deceleration 0 to 400 Set this when changing the reference level of acceleration and deceleration Shortest acceleration deceleration Set the stall prevention operation level percentage of current value of Pr 61 during acceleration deceleration Optimum acceleration deceleration Set the optimum current level percentage of current value of Pr 61 during acceleration deceler...

Page 440: ...tion 0 0 Normal operation 1 Shortest acceleration deceleration without brakes Refer to page 5 255 11 Shortest acceleration deceleration with brakes 3 Optimum acceleration deceleration 5 Lift operation 1 stall prevention operation level 150 6 Lift operation 2 stall prevention operation level 180 7 8 Brake sequence 1 2 Refer to page 5 484 61 F510 Reference current 9999 0 to 500 A Set the reference c...

Page 441: ...he motor capacity and inverter capacity differ etc Set the reference current A of the stall prevention operation level 0 to 3600 A 9999 initial value The rated inverter output current value is the reference 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 0 to 10 Hz Set the starting frequency for the lift operation 9999 initial value Starting frequency is 2 Hz NOTES Even if the lift operation has been sele...

Page 442: ...To prevent motor from rotating reversely Reverse rotation prevention selection P D020 Pr 78 5 281 To change the setting resolution of speed Set resolution switchover P D030 Pr 811 5 324 To change the setting resolution of torque limit Set resolution switchover P D030 Pr 811 5 324 To set the frequency by pulse train input Pulse train input P D100 P D101 P D110 P D111 Pr 291 Pr 384 to Pr 386 5 282 T...

Page 443: ...ration mode NET operation mode 5 266 Operation mode Frequency command Start command 1 PU operation mode fixed Operation panel or parameter unit FWD or REV key on operation panel or parameter unit PU operation mode 5 267 2 External operation mode fixed The operation can be performed by switching between the External and NET operation modes External signal input terminal 2 and 4 JOG multi speed sele...

Page 444: ...peration mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code I002570E Fig 5 107 Operation modes of the inverter NOTES There are two settings of 3 and 4 with PU External combined operation The startup method differs according to the setting value In the initial setting the stop function PU stop selection by the operation panel or the parameter unit is effective ...

Page 445: ...Frequency setting terminal ON 앫 Start command STF STR ON PU digital setting STF forward rotation STR reverse rotation Refer to page 5 430 Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation 1 앫 Frequency setting DU digital setting 앫 Start command STF STR ON Communication RS 485 terminals STF forward rotation STR reverse rotation Refer to page 5 430 RS 485 terminals Refer to page 5 602 Pr 338 1 Pr 340 1 2 앫 Fre...

Page 446: ...eration 2 앫 Frequency setting Frequency setting terminal ON 앫 Start command FWD REV key ON PU digital setting Pr 79 1 PU operation mode fixed 앫 Frequency setting Digital setting 앫 Start command FWD REV key ON Communication RS 485 terminals communication option N A Communication RS 485 terminals External terminal 2 and 4 JOG multi speed etc RS 485 terminals Refer to page 5 602 Terminal 2 and 4 anal...

Page 447: ...ny of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function PU External combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 Select the PU External combined operation mode 1 when applying a frequency command from the operation panel or the parameter unit and inputting a start command with the external start switches Set 3 in Pr 79 The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes When a freque...

Page 448: ...ued 앫 For the setting frequency the setting of the potentiometer frequency command is continued Note however that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset External operation NET operation The switchover command to the Network operation mode is transmitted via communication 앫 As the direction of rotation the direction that was active by External operation is...

Page 449: ...on of the X12 signal Operating status X12 MRS signal Operation mode Operating status Switching to PU or NET operation mode Operation mode Status PU NET during a stop ON OFF External If frequency and start commands are input from external source the inverter runs by those commands Not available Running ON OFF Not available External during a stop OFF ON External during a stop Available ON OFF Not av...

Page 450: ...gnal X65 to a terminal When the X65 signal is ON the PU operation mode is selected When the X65 signal is OFF the Network operation mode is selected Pr 79 setting X16 signal status and operation mode Remarks ON External OFF PU 0 initial value External operation mode PU operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation modes is enabled 1 PU operation mode PU operation mode fixed 2 Ex...

Page 451: ...al Pr 340 setting Pr 79 setting X65 signal state Remarks ON PU OFF NET 10 12 0 initial value PUoperationmode NET operation mode 1 PU operation mode PU operation mode fixed 2 NET operation mode NET operation mode fixed 3 4 External PU combined operation mode External PU combined operation mode fixed 6 PUoperationmode NET operation mode Switching between operation modes is enabled while running 7 X1...

Page 452: ... 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection page 5 192 Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock operation selection page 5 198 Pr 178 to Pr 182 input terminal function selection page 5 422 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 361 Pr 340 Communication startup mode selection page 5 272 Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection page 5 274 Pr Name Initial va...

Page 453: ...External and NET operation modes is enabled Switching to PU operation mode is disabled 3 4 External PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled 6 External operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation mode is enabled while running 7 X12 MRS signal ONExternal operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation modes is enabled X12 MRS signal OFF E...

Page 454: ...o external input the frequency command via communication is valid and the frequency command from terminal 2 is invalid 550 D012 NET mode operation command source selection 9999 0 The communication option is the command source when in the NET operation mode 1 The RS 485 terminals are the command source when in the NET operation mode 9999 Communication option is recognized automatically Normally the...

Page 455: ...ted switching to the Network operation mode is not longer possible Changed setting values are enabled at power ON or inverter reset Pr 550 setting Pr 551 setting Command source Remarks PU connector USB connector RS 485 terminals Communication option 0 1 PU operation mode NET operation mode 2 PU operation mode NET operation mode 3 PU operation mode NET operation mode 9999 initial value PU operation...

Page 456: ...9 automatic recognition without USB connection Operation start command Operation stop command Δ Δ Δ Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset Other than the above Operation start command Operation stop command Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset Control by communica tion via RS 485 terminals 1 RS 485 terminals Operatio...

Page 457: ...mmunication option connected When Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 0 communication option enabled or Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection 9999 with communica tion option connected ControlviaUSB connector 3 USB connector 9999 automatic recognition with USB connection Operation command start stop Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter rese...

Page 458: ...ode operation command source selection 9999 with communica tion option connected Fault record Conditions Pr 551 setting Operation in each operation mode at error occurrences PU operation External operation External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation mode 2 Pr 79 4 NET operation when RS 485 terminals are used NET operation when communication option is used Inverter ...

Page 459: ...tion 1 NET External Pr 270 1 3 11 or 13 stop on contact 4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Combined Combined 5 JOG Jog operation selection External 6 CS Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start External 7 OH External thermal relay input External 8 REX 15 speed selection NET External NET External Pr 59 0 multi speed 9 X9 Third function selection NET External 10 X10...

Page 460: ...T External 62 RES Inverter reset External 64 X64 During retry NET External NET External 65 X65 PU NET operation switchover External 66 X66 External NET operation switchover External 67 X67 Command source switchover External 68 NP Simple position pulse train sign External 69 CLR Simple position droop pulse clear External 70 X70 DC feeding operation permission NET External 71 X71 DC feeding cancel N...

Page 461: ... Pr 550 and Pr 551 settings The Pr 338 and Pr 339 settings can be changed while the inverter is running when Pr 77 2 Note that the setting change is applied after the inverter has stopped Until the inverter has stopped communication operation command source and communication speed command source before the setting change are valid X67 signal state Start command source Speed command source Signal n...

Page 462: ... be input Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description FM CA 291 D100 Pulse train I O selection 0 Pulse train input terminal JOG Pulse train output terminal FM 0 JOG signal FM output 1 Pulse train input FM output 10 JOG signal High speed pulse train output 50 duty 11 Pulse train input High speed pulse train output 50 duty 20 JOG signal High speed pulse train output ON width fixed 21 Pulse train...

Page 463: ...nection with a complementary output system pulse generator I002573E Fig 5 113 Pulse train input Wiring length Less than 10 m 10 to 50 m 50 to 100 m Pull up down resistance Not required 1 kΩ 470 Ω Load current reference 10 mA 35 mA 65 mA Tab 5 113 Resistance values for pull up and pull down resistances I002574E Fig 5 114 Pulse generator output NOTES When pulse train input is selected the function a...

Page 464: ...en pulse train input is zero and at 30 Hz when pulse train is 4000 pulses sec set the inverter as follows Pr 384 10 maximum number of input pulses 4000 pulses s Pr 385 0 Hz Pr 386 30 Hz pulse train limit value 33 Hz Item Specification Supported pulse method Open collector output Complementary output 24 V power supply voltage HIGH input level 20 V or more voltage between JOG and SD LOW input level ...

Page 465: ...verters that receive pulse train since the maximum pulse train output is 50k pulses s The maximum number of input pulses should be 50k pulses s When performing synchronized operation wire according to the following procedure This is to prevent contact input of 24 V from being applied to the terminal FM Set pulse train output setting other than 0 1 to Pr 291 on the master side inverter Turn the inv...

Page 466: ... User group read selection Refer to page 5 216 The Pr 20 initial value is set to 60 Hz for the FM type and to 50 Hz for the CA type Item Specification Output pulse format Pulse width fixed 10 μs Pulse rate 0 to 50 kpps Pulse propagation delay 1 to 2 μs 1 unit Tab 5 116 Speed synchronized operation specification Parameters referred to Pr 291 Pulse train output page 5 341 Pr 419 Position command sou...

Page 467: ...anging the terminal assignment may affect other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal During JOG operation the second acceleration deceleration cannot be selected with the RT sig nal Other second functions are enabled Refer to page 5 428 When Pr 79 Operation mode selection 4 JOG operation is started by one push of FWD REV key on the operation panel and stopped by ...

Page 468: ...en RM is ON 6 D303 Multi speed setting low speed 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RL is ON 24 D304 Multi speed setting speed 4 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 Frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH RM RL and REX signals 9999 Not selected 25 D305 Multi speed setting speed 5 26 D306 Multi speed setting speed 6 27 D307 Multi speed setting speed 7 232 D...

Page 469: ...tting when two or more of multi speed settings are simultaneously selected prior ity is given to the set frequency of the lower signal For example when RH and RM signals turn ON RM signal Pr 5 has a higher priority The RH RM and RL signals are assigned to the terminals RH RM and RL in the initial status Set 0 RL 1 RM and 2 RH in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign t...

Page 470: ...iority among them When Pr 59 Remote function selection 0 the multi speed setting is invalid since the RH RM and RL signals are for remote setting When performing analog input compensation set Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selec tion to 1 Select the terminals terminals 1 2 to use for compensation input voltage 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V at Pr 73 Analog input selection When using terminal 1 for compe...

Page 471: ... restart using the retry function when the protective function is activated Retry operation P H300 to P H303 Pr 65 Pr 67 to Pr 69 5 307 To set the upper and lower limits of the output frequency Maximum minimum frequency P H400 to P H402 Pr 1 Pr 2 Pr 18 5 310 To prevent the motor from overspeeding under torque control Speed limit P H410 to P H412 Pr 807 to Pr 809 5 136 To avoid overdriving the moto...

Page 472: ...frequency 3 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 607 H006 Motor permissible load level 150 110 to 150 Set the permissible load according to the motor characteristics 51 H010 Second electronic thermal O L relay 9999 0 to 500 A Enabled when the RT signal is ON Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 9999 Second electronic thermal O L relay invalid 692 H011 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 9999 0 to 590 Hz...

Page 473: ...e to the rated inverter current It is not the percentage to the rated motor current When the electronic thermal O L relay of the Mitsubishi constant torque motor is set the charac teristic curve is as shown in this diagram at 6 Hz or higher For selection of the operation characteristic refer to page 5 434 Transistor protection is activated depending on the temperature of the heatsink The protectio...

Page 474: ...line to line leak age current Refer to page 3 1 The cooling effect of the motor drops during low speed opera tion Use a thermal protector or a motor with built in thermistor The protective characteristic of the electronic thermal O L relay is degraded when there is a large difference in capacity between the inverter and motor and when the set value is small In such case use an external thermal rel...

Page 475: ...area the area right of the characteristic curve Normal operation area the area left of the characteristic curve I002580E Fig 5 122 Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic MM CF NOTES The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter s power reset and reset signal input Avoid unnecessary reset and power OFF ...

Page 476: ...o 2 Motor No 1 motor No 2 motor 9999 0 9999 0 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ 9999 Other than 0 9999 0 Δ 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Δ Other than 9999 0 9999 0 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Other than 9999 Other than 0 9999 Δ Δ 0 Δ 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Δ Values are accumulated by using the output current Δ Values are accumulated by assuming the output current is 0 A cooling processing Electronic thermal ...

Page 477: ...s not shut off with the warning signal THP For the terminal used for THP signal output set 8 positive logic or 108 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function I002851E Fig 5 124 Example of motor permissible load setting when Pr 9 100 of the inverter rating I001138E Fig 5 125 Prealarm signal output NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using P...

Page 478: ...n selection to assign the function Vector control dedicated motors SF V5RU are equipped with thermal protectors Connecttherecommended2W1kΩresistorbetweentheterminalPCandOH Refertopage2 67 When the control terminal option FR A8TP is used valid invalid setting of the terminal OH can be changed using Pr 876 Thermal protector input Fig 5 126 Connection of an external thermal relay I002582E I002583E Fi...

Page 479: ...hat it does not deviate from the protective function activating temperature TN If the Pr 561 setting becomes too close to R1 or R2 the protective function activating temperature may be too hot protection is delayed or too cold too much protection When the PTC thermistor protection is enabled Pr 561 9999 the resistance value for the PTC thermistor can be displayed on the operation panel or via RS 4...

Page 480: ...ing terminal 2 for PTC thermistor input Pr 561 9999 the terminal 2 will not operate as an analog frequency command terminal The PID and dancer control functions assigned to the terminal 2 will be also disabled Use Pr 133 PID action set point to set the set point for the PID function To input power to the PTC thermistor power supply always use the terminal 10 Do not use any other terminals or an ex...

Page 481: ...02833E Fig 5 131 Setting examples Fig 5 132 Overheat protection setting I002586E Fig 5 133 Overheat protection setting example I002587E NOTE Make sure to set the parameters according to the motor temperature characteristic used Parameters referred to Pr 71 Applied motor page 5 434 Pr 72 PWM frequency selection page 5 219 Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 422 Pr 190 to Pr 19...

Page 482: ...de from the E OHT E THM and E PTC the output is immediately shut off and the fault signal ALM is output To use the ER signal set 97 positive logic or 197 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 875 H030 Fault definition 0 0 Normal operation 1 Decelerates to stop at act...

Page 483: ...ooling fan operation command signal Y206 signal can be output when the inverter cooling fan meets the conditions for running The function can be used when the fan installed on the enclosure is synchronized with the inverter cooling fan Y206 signal indicates the operating command condition of the inverter cooling fan depending on the power supply ON OFF or the Pr 244 settings The signal does not in...

Page 484: ...lt detection at start 0 0 Without the earth ground fault detection at start 1 With the earth ground fault detection at start NOTES Because of the detection performed at start the output is delayed by approximately 20 ms at every start Use Pr 249 to enable disable ground fault detection at operation start Ground faults are detected always during operation regardless of the Pr 249 setting If a small...

Page 485: ... function gener ated by the fault is not saved in the faults history Perform inverter reset to cancel the protective function For the selectable parameter by Pr 997 and the corresponding protective functions refer to page 6 9 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 997 H103 Fault initiation 9999 16 to 253 The setting range is same with the one for fault data codes of the inverter which can...

Page 486: ...t for 1 s continuously Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 251 H200 Output phase loss protection selection 1 0 Without output phase loss protection 1 With output phase loss protection 872 H201 Input phase loss protection selection 0 0 Without input phase loss protection 1 With input phase loss protection NOTES When several motors are connected output phase loss cannot be detected even ...

Page 487: ...nverter retries Refer to the retry failure example Use Pr 68 to set the waiting time from a protective function activation to a retry in the range of 0 1 to 600 s During retry operation the during retry Y64 signal is ON For the Y64 signal set 64 positive operation or 164 negative operation in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function Pr Name Initial value Se...

Page 488: ... the fault details refer to page 6 9 indicates the faults selected for retry I002589E Fig 5 135 Retry success and retry failure example Tab 5 119 Errors selected for retry 0 Y64 0 Y64 Retry success Pr 68 x 4 Pr 68 If it is below 3 1s 3 1s is set Inverter output frequency Retry start Fault occurrence Retry success count Success count 1 Time Inverter output frequency Retry success example Retry fail...

Page 489: ...ion does not clear the accumulated data of the electronic thermal O L relay regenerative brake duty etc This is different from power supply reset or reset by RES sig nal When the parameter storage device fault E PE is occurring and reading of the retry function related parameters is not possible retry cannot operated Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function ...

Page 490: ...ency in Pr 18 the Pr 1 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in Pr 18 Also when setting a frequency in Pr 1 the Pr 18 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in Pr 1 Setting the minimum frequency Pr 2 Set Pr 2 Minimum frequency to the lower limit of the output frequency If the set frequency is Pr 2 or less the output frequency is clamped at Pr 2 will not fall below Pr 2 Pr ...

Page 491: ...ase the output frequency the output frequency may drop to Pr 2 or below If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr 1 Pr 18 Maximum frequency is set for the 3 point jump the maximum frequency setting is the set frequency If the set frequency is less than the jump fre quency Pr 2 Minimum frequency the jump frequency is the set frequency The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower li...

Page 492: ... 1A 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 1A to 1B 2A to 2B 3A to 3B are frequency jumps 3 point jump 9999 Function disabled 32 H421 Frequency jump 1B 33 H422 Frequency jump 2A 34 H423 Frequency jump 2B 35 H424 Frequency jump 3A 36 H425 Frequency jump 3B 552 H429 Frequency jump range 9999 0 to3 0 Hz Set the jump range for the frequency jumps 6 point jump 9999 3 point jump Fig 5 137 Definition of the jump areas I0...

Page 493: ...able error Er1 will occur Setting Pr 552 0 disables frequency jumps If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr 1 Pr 18 Maximum frequency is set for the 3 point jump the maximum frequency setting is the set frequency If the set frequency is less than the jump fre quency Pr 2 Minimum frequency the jump frequency is the set frequency The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit ...

Page 494: ...vention operation frequency 0Hz 0 Second stall prevention operation disabled 0 01 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the Pr 48 stall prevention operation will start 9999 Pr 48 is enabled when RT signal is ON 114 H602 Third stall prevention operation level 150 0 Third stall prevention operation disabled 0 1 to 400 The stall prevention operation level can be changed using the X9 signal 115 H603 Th...

Page 495: ...8 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0 1 4 9999 When set 4 the stall prevention level can be changed with the signal to the terminal 4 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6 9999 When set 4 the stall prevention level can be changed with the signal to the terminal 1 I001120E Fig 5 139 Stall prevention operation example NOTES A continuous overloaded condition may activate a protective f...

Page 496: ...sabled Stall prevention operation selection enabled disabled OL signal output operation continued operation stopped Pr 156 setting Fast response current limit enabled disabled Stall prevention operation selection enabled disabled OL signal output operation continued operation stopped Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration 0 initial value 16 1 17 2 18 3 19...

Page 497: ...ng Description 0 initial value Output immediately 0 1 to 25 Output after the set time s 9999 Not output Tab 5 121 Setting of parameter 157 Fig 5 140 Output of the OL signal I002515E NOTES OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial status The OL signal can be assigned to other terminals by setting 3 positive logic or 103 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal functio...

Page 498: ...tall prevention operation reduction starting frequency to 60 Hz and Pr 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed to 100 Calculation formula for stall prevention operation level When Pr 23 9999 initial value the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr 22 level up to 590 Hz Fig 5 141 Stall prevention operation level I002597E Fig 5 142 Stall prevention ope...

Page 499: ...sabled 0 01 Hz to 590 Hz The second third stall prevention function operates according to the frequency 9999 Setting not available The second stall prevention function operates according to the RT signal RT signal ON stall level Pr 48 RT signal OFF stall level Pr 22 Tab 5 122 Settings of parameter 49 and 115 I002599E Fig 5 143 Stall prevention operation level setting example NOTES When Pr 49 9999 ...

Page 500: ...level at 0 V input to the current limit level when input voltage is 0 V 0 mA Set Pr 149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input to the current limit level when input voltage is 10 V 5 V 20 mA I002600E Fig 5 144 Stall prevention operation level setting by terminal 1 Pr 858 setting Pr 868 setting V F Advanced magnetic flux vector control Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function 0 initial value 0 initial...

Page 501: ...stall prevention operation in an application with large load inertia Note that turning OFF the start signal STF STR or varying the frequency command during stall prevention operation may delay the acceleration deceleration start 4 0 initial value Stall prevention Auxiliary frequency 1 2 3 4 Stall prevention 5 Stall prevention 6 9999 9999 NOTE The fast response current limit cannot be set Pr 154 E ...

Page 502: ... 868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 5 394 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 374 H800 Overspeed detection level 9999 0 to 590 Hz If the motor rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr 374 during encoder feedback control Real sensorless vector control vector control or PM sensorless vector control Overspeed occurrence E OS occurs the inverter output is shut off 9999 If the speed ...

Page 503: ... saving Energy saving monitor P M023 P M100 P M200 to P M207 P M300 P M301 Pr 52 Pr 54 Pr 158 Pr 891 to Pr 899 5 189 To assign functions to the output terminals Output terminal function assignment P M400 to P M406 P M431 Pr 190 to Pr 196 Pr 289 5 361 To detect the output frequency Up to frequency sensitivity Output frequency detection Low speed detection P M440 to P M446 Pr 41 to Pr 43 Pr 50 Pr 11...

Page 504: ...7 Pr 505 To display in the machine speed set Pr 37 to the machine speed at the frequency set in Pr 505 For example when Pr 505 60 Hz and Pr 37 1000 the running speed monitor will display 1000 at the running speed of 60 Hz When running frequency is 30 Hz 500 is displayed Changing the monitored value and speed setting increment Pr 811 When Pr 811 1 or 11 the speed setting for PU input and RS 485 com...

Page 505: ...as synchronous speed under V F control The dis played value is actual motor speed motor slip When Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control is selected the actual motor speed estimated value by motor slip calculation is used When the encoder feedback control or vector control is selected the actual motor speed from the encoder is used When...

Page 506: ...erwise the motor might run at extremely high speed damaging the machine Parameters referred to Pr 1 Maximum frequency page 5 310 Pr 22 Torque limit level page 5 84 Pr 52 Operation panel main monitor selection page 5 327 Pr 81 Number of motor poles page 5 56 Pr 800 Control method selection page 5 56 Pr 811 Set resolution switchover page 5 84 ...

Page 507: ...9999 kWh 9999 Set the maximum value for monitoring via communication Set it in the range of 0 and 65535 kWh 563 M021 Energization time carrying over times 0 0 to 65535 Read only Displays the numbers of times that the cumulative energization time monitor exceeded 65535 h Read only 268 M022 Monitor decimal digits selection 9999 0 Displays as integral value 1 Displays in 0 1 increments 9999 No functi...

Page 508: ...aults individually Frequency setting value speed setting 0 01Hz 1 5 H05 40205 Displays the set frequency Running speed 1 r min 6 H06 40206 2 Displays the motor speed by the Pr 37 Pr 144 settings Refer to page 5 324 The actual motor speed by encoder signal is used during encoder feedback control and vector control Motor torque 0 1 7 H07 40207 Displays motor torque as a percentage 0 under V F contro...

Page 509: ... exceeded 65535 h can be checked with Pr 564 This can be cleared with Pr 171 Refer to page 5 337 Motor load factor 0 1 24 H18 40224 Displays the output current value as a percentage considering the inverter rated current value as 100 Monitor value output current monitor value inverter rated current 100 Cumulative power 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh 25 H19 40225 Displays the cumulative energy based on the output...

Page 510: ... No 42 Refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual PLC function user monitor 2 41 H29 40241 PLC function user monitor 3 42 H2A 40242 Station number RS 485 terminals 1 43 H2B 40243 Displays which station number 0 to 31 can currently be used for communication from the RS 485 terminal block Station number PU 1 44 H2C 40244 Displays which station number 0 to 31 can currently be used for communication...

Page 511: ...elay output option FR A8AR can be monitored via RS 485 communication and the communication option Motor thermal load factor 0 1 61 H3D 40261 Displays the accumulated heat value of the motor thermal O L relay The motor overload trip E THM occurs at 100 Inverter thermal load factor 0 1 62 H3E 40262 Displays the accumulated heat value of the inverter thermal O L relay The inverter overload trip E THT...

Page 512: ... power lower 16 bits 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh H4F 40279 32 bit cumula tive power upper 16 bits 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh H50 40280 Remote output value 1 0 1 87 H57 40287 Displays the setting values of Pr 656 to Pr 659 analog remote output Refer to page 5 382 Remote output value 2 0 1 88 H58 40288 Remote output value 3 0 1 89 H59 40289 Remote output value 4 0 1 90 H5A 40290 PIDmanipulated variable 0 1 91 H5B 40291 Di...

Page 513: ...are OFF when the option is not connected 3 Option input terminal monitor 2 details FR A8AX input terminal status 1 denotes terminal ON 0 denotes terminal OFF denotes undetermined value All are OFF when the option is not connected Option output terminal monitor details FR A8AY A8AR output terminal status 1 denotes termi nal ON 1 denotes terminal OFF and denotes undetermined value All are OFF when t...

Page 514: ...ncy monitor and press SET key for 1 s For example when Pr 52 20 cumulative energization time the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as shown below Pr 774 sets the output frequency monitor Pr 775 sets the output current monitor and Pr 776 sets the monitor description to be displayed at the output voltage monitor position When Pr 774 to Pr 776 9999 initial value the Pr 52 setting value is u...

Page 515: ...enPr 992 100 thesetfrequencyisdisplayedduringstop andoutputfrequencyisdisplayed during running Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON The value considers the maximum minimum frequency and frequency jumps It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr 992 5 Pr 52 setting Status Output frequency Output current Output voltage Fault or alarm indication 0 Durin...

Page 516: ... monitor Pr 52 57 Pr 52 setting Monitor description 55 Displays the I O terminal ON OFF state of the inverter 56 Displays input terminal ON OFF state of the digital input option FR A8AX 57 Displays output terminal ON OFF state of the digital output option FR A8AY or the relay output option FR A8AR Tab 5 129 I O terminal monitor I002605E_D Fig 5 148 Displaying the signal states of the I O terminals...

Page 517: ...peration time monitor Pr 171 Pr 563 Pr 564 Cumulative energization time monitor Pr 52 20 accumulates energization time from ship ment of the inverter every one hour On the actual operation time monitor Pr 52 23 the inverter running time is added up every hour Time is not added up during a stop If the number of monitor value exceeds 65535 it is added up from 0 Pr 563 allows the user to check how ma...

Page 518: ...The monitor value equal to or smaller than 0 99 is displayed as 0 1 When monitoring with the second decimal place 0 01 increments the 0 01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place 0 1 increments When monitoring with the first decimal place the display will not change Tab 5 131 Selection of decimal digits NOTE The number of display digits on the cumulative energizat...

Page 519: ...e pulse control terminal option Position command upper Cumulative pulse carrying over times control terminal option Current position lower Remote output 1 Current position upper Remote output 2 Droop pulse lower Remote output 3 Droop pulse upper Remote output 4 Torque command PID manipulated amount Torque current command Second PID deviation Torque monitor power driving regenerative driving polari...

Page 520: ... 32 Torque command 33 Torque current command 1107 6 Running speed 1108 18 Motor excitation current Tab 5 134 Monitor filter Parameters referred to Pr 30 Regenerative function selection page 5 675 Pr 70 Special regenerative brake duty page 5 675 Pr 37 Motor speed display page 5 324 Pr 144 Speed setting switchover page 5 324 Pr 55 Frequency monitoring reference page 5 341 Pr 56 Current monitoring re...

Page 521: ...m to be output to the terminal AM 55 M040 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the full scale value when outputting the frequency monitor value to terminals FM CA and AM 56 M041 Current monitoring reference Inverter Rated current 0 to 500 A Set the full scale value when outputting the output current monitor value to terminals FM CA and AM 0 to 3600 A 866 M042 Torque monitorin...

Page 522: ...00 V 400 V class 800 V Frequency setting value 0 01 Hz 5 Pr 55 Running speed 1 r min 6 Value is Pr 55 converted by Pr 37 Pr 144 Refer to page 5 324 Refer to page 5 324 for the running speed monitor Motor torque 0 1 7 Pr 866 Converter output voltage 0 1 V 8 200 V class 400 V 400 V class 800 V Regenerative brake duty 0 1 9 Brake duty decided by Pr 30 and Pr 70 Electronic thermal O L relay load facto...

Page 523: ...ge 5 189 PID set point 0 1 52 100 Refer to page 5 537 for the PID control PID measured value 0 1 53 100 PID deviation 0 1 54 100 Output with a negative sign terminal AM Motor thermal load factor 0 1 61 Motor thermal operation level 100 Inverter thermal load factor 0 1 62 Inverter thermal operation level 100 PID measured value 2 0 1 67 100 PLC function analog output 0 1 70 100 Refer to page 5 587 f...

Page 524: ...ted between terminal CA and 5 for example 60 Hz or 120 Hz Output current is proportional to the frequency The maximum output current is 20 mA DC For the calibration of terminal AM set the full scale value of the connected meter when output voltage of terminal FM is 10 V DC Set the frequency to be indicated as the full scale value on the meter 10 V DC voltmeter connected between terminal AM and 5 F...

Page 525: ...connected between terminal AM and 5 Output voltage is proportional to the monitored value of output current The maximum output voltage is 10 V DC Torque monitor reference Pr 866 Set the full scale value when outputting the current monitor from terminal the FM CA or AM For the FM type inverters set the full scale value of the connected torque meter when the pulse speed of terminal FM is 1440 pulses...

Page 526: ...ibration Use a calibration resistor when the indicator frequency meter needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located far from the inverter However the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full scale if the calibration resistor is connected In this case calibrate additionally with the operation panel or parameter unit In the initial setting 1 mA full scale and...

Page 527: ...d OFF width are the same When Pr 291 20 21 100 the pulse ON width is output at a fixed width approx 10 μs At the 100 setting the same pulse train from the pulse train input terminal JOG will be outputted This is used when running at a synchronized speed with more than one inverter Refer to page 5 282 50 kpps when the monitor output value is 100 Fig 5 156 High speed pulse train output circuit examp...

Page 528: ...high speed pulse train output to FM output voltage output since the Pr 291 setting value returns to the initial value of 0 Perform all parameter clear after removing the device connected to the terminal FM Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description C0 900 M310 FM CA terminal calibration Calibrates the scale of the meter connected to terminals FM and CA C1 901 M320 AM terminal calibration Cali...

Page 529: ...r unit In the initial setting 1 mA full scale and 1440 pulses s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz Calibrate the terminal FM in the following procedure Connect an indicator frequency meter across terminals FM and SD of the inverter Note the polarity The terminal FM is positive When a calibration resistor has already been connected adjust the resistance to 0 or remove the resistor Refer to the monitored...

Page 530: ... Pr 900 cannot be done when Pr 291 Pulse train I O selection 10 11 20 21 100 high speed pulse train output Operation Screen at power ON The monitor display appears Changing the operation mode Press to choose the PU operation mode PU indicator is lit Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number rea...

Page 531: ...tion can also be made for the External operation Set the frequency in the External opera tion mode and make calibration in the above procedure Calibration can be performed during operation For the operation from the parameter unit refer to the Instruction Manual of the parameter unit ...

Page 532: ...ty The terminal CA is positive Set the initial value of calibration parameter C8 Pr 930 to C11 Pr 931 If the meter needle does not indicate zero when the current input is at zero calibrate the meter using C8 Pr 930 and C9 Pr 930 Refer to the monitor description list page 5 342 and set Pr 54 When the running frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor set the running frequency o...

Page 533: ...to the monitor description list page 5 328 and set Pr 158 AM terminal function selection When the running frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor set the running frequency or current value at which the output signal will be 10 V using Pr 55 or Pr 56 beforehand If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output calibrate it with C1 Pr 901 Fig 5 160 Connecti...

Page 534: ...ge 5 327 50 Power saving monitor 51 Cumulative power saving monitor 774 M101 Operation panel monitor selection 1 9999 775 M102 Operation panel monitor selection 2 776 M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3 992 M104 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 0 set frequency 54 M300 FM CA terminal function selection 1 output frequency Refer to page 5 341 50 Power saving monitor 158 M301 A...

Page 535: ...96 M204 Power unit cost 9999 0 to 500 Set the power unit cost The power cost savings are displayed on the energy saving monitor 9999 No function 897 M205 Power saving monitor average time 9999 0 Average of 30 minutes 1 to 1000 h Average of the set time 9999 No function 898 M206 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 9999 0 Cumulative monitor value clear 1 Cumulative monitor value hold 10 Continue a...

Page 536: ...al power supply operation input power monitor 0 01 kW 0 1 kW 9999 9999 Power saving rate The power saving ratio with the commercial power supply operation as 100 0 1 0 The power saving ratio with Pr 893 as 100 1 Average power saving The average power saving per hour during a predetermined time Pr 897 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh 9999 9999 0 to 1000 h Average power saving rate The average power saving ratio wit...

Page 537: ...ng rate considering the consumed power during the power supply operation estimated value as 100 is displayed Pr 895 Power saving rate reference value needs to be set to 0 Energy saving monitor reference motor capacity Energy saving monitored item Description and formula Incre ment Parameter setting Pr 895 Pr 896 Pr 897 Pr 899 Power saving amount The cumulative power saving is added up per hour Pow...

Page 538: ...ive monitors the monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times setting For example if the cumulative power value is 1278 56 kWh when Pr 891 2 the PU DU display is 12 78 display in 100 kWh increments and the communication data is 12 If the maximum value is exceeded when Pr 891 0 to 4 the value is clamped at the maximum value indi...

Page 539: ...ation pattern and rating current output frequency Pr 3 Base frequency I002619E Fig 5 162 Cumulative energy saving monitor NOTE The power saving cumulative monitor value is saved every hour This means that if the power is turned OFF after less than an hour when then the power is turned ON again the previously saved monitor value is displayed and accumulation starts In some cases the cumulative moni...

Page 540: ...ate the annual power saving amount from Pr 899 Operation time rate estimated value and the average power saving monitor When the power cost per hour is set in Pr 896 Power unit cost the annual power cost savings can be monitored Estimated consumed power during commercial power supply operation kW Pr 893 kW Consumed power Pr 892 100 100 NOTE In commercial power supply operation because the rotation...

Page 541: ...o 99 100 to 108 110 to 116 120 122 125 to 128 130 to 136 138 to 157 160 161 163 164 167 168 170 179 184 185 190 to 199 200 to 208 300 to 308 9999 191 M401 SU terminal function selection 1 SU Up to frequency 192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 2 IPF Instantaneous power failure undervoltage 9999 193 M403 OL terminal function selection 3 OL Overload warning 194 M404 FU terminal function selectio...

Page 542: ...en the cumulative electronic thermal O L relay value reaches 85 of the trip level Electronic thermal O L relay protection E THT E THM is activated when the value reaches 100 Pr 9 5 292 10 110 PU PU operation mode Output when PU operation mode is selected Pr 79 5 263 11 111 RY Inverter operation ready Output when the reset process is completed after powering ON the inverter when starting is possibl...

Page 543: ... position command operation is not completed or performing home position return Pr 426 5 179 39 139 Y39 Start time tuning completion Output when tuning is completed during start up Pr 95 Pr 574 5 465 40 140 Y40 Trace status Output during trace operation Pr 1020 to Pr 1047 5 591 41 141 FB Speed detection Output when the actual motor rotations per minute estimated rotations per minute reaches Pr 42 ...

Page 544: ... to power failure or undervoltage or the power failure time deceleration to stop function is activated Pr 261 to Pr 266 5 580 68 168 EV 24 V external power supply operation Output while operating with a 24 V power supply input from an external source 2 51 70 170 SLEEP PID output interruption Output during PID output suspension function operation Pr 127 to Pr 134 Pr 575 to Pr 577 5 524 79 179 Y79 P...

Page 545: ...utput 2 When Pr 875 0 initial value output in the same way as the ALM signal When Pr 875 1 if OHT THM PTC occurs the signal is output and deceleration to a stop is performed at the same time When other protective functions operate output when output is stopped Pr 875 5 302 98 198 LF Alarm Output when an alarm fan fault or communication error warning occurs Pr 121 Pr 244 5 303 5 606 99 199 ALM Faul...

Page 546: ...ing is 100 to 199 300 to 399 When Pr 76 Fault code output selection 1 the output signals of terminals SU IPF OL and FU operate according to Pr 76 setting When the inverter s protective function is activated the signal output switches to fault code output The outputs of terminal RUN and the fault output relay are assigned according to the settings above regardless of Pr 76 Changing the terminal ass...

Page 547: ...signalisONwhiletheinverterisrunning or the start signal is ON When the start command is ON the RUN3 signal output turns ON evenwhiletheinverter sprotectivefunctionisactivatedortheMRSisON DuringDCinjection brake operation as well the output is ON and when the inverter stops it turns OFF Fig 5 164 Adjusting the RUN signal response level I002620E NOTES When Pr 157 OL signal output timer is set for th...

Page 548: ... Inverter running 2 RUN2 signal is ON while the inverter is running or the start signal is ON When the inverter s protective function is activated or the MRS is ON the RUN2 signal turns OFF The Inverter running and start command is ON RUN3 signal output is ON while the inverter is running or the start signal is ON Output signal Start signal OFF during stop Start signal ON during stop Start signal ...

Page 549: ...under position control Output is shutoff in conditions like a fault and when the MRS signal is ON OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit power supply NOTE When pre excitation is activated by the pre excitation signal LX the RY2 signal turns ON 100 ms 500 ms for FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher after the LX signal turns ON When online auto tuning at start up Pr 9...

Page 550: ...y of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal To use the Y31 signal set 31 positive logic or 131 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal Output signal Pr 190 to Pr 196 settings Positive logic Negative logic RY 11 111 RY2 33 133 RUN 0 100 RUN2 44 144 RUN3 45 14...

Page 551: ...tive function is activated The ALM2 signal stays ON during the reset period after the fault occurs To use the ALM2 signal set 94 positive logic or 194 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal The ALM signal is assigned to the A1B1C1 contacts in the initial status I002625E Fig 5 168 Forward and reverse rotation of the...

Page 552: ...For the fault details refer to page 6 9 Fault record Inrush current limit circuit fault E IOH CPU fault E CPU CPU fault E 5 CPU fault E 6 CPU fault E 7 Parameter storage device fault E PE Parameter storage device fault E PE2 24 V DC power fault E P24 Operation panel power supply short circuit RS 485 terminal power supply short circuit E CTE Output side earth ground fault overcurrent E GF Output ph...

Page 553: ...the level where the SU signal turns ON 42 M442 Output frequency detection 6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where the FU FB signal turns ON 43 M443 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where the FU FB signal turns ON in reverse rotation 9999 Same as the Pr 42 setting 50 M444 Second output frequency detection 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where t...

Page 554: ...f the electromagnetic brake operation during forward rotation lifting and reverse rotation lowering in operations such as lift opera tion When Pr 43 9999 forward rotation uses the Pr 42 setting and reverse rotation uses the Pr 43 setting When outputting a frequency detection signal separately from the FU signal set the detection frequency in Pr 50 or Pr 116 When the output frequency reaches the Pr...

Page 555: ...tion selection to assign the function to the output terminal Speed detection hysteresis Pr 870 This function prevents chattering of the speed detection signals When an output frequency fluctuates the following signals may repeat ON OFF chatter Up to frequency signal SU Speed detection signal FB FB2 FB3 Low speed output signal LS Setting hysteresis to the detected frequency prevents chattering of t...

Page 556: ... the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 361 Pr 874 OLT level setting page 5 84 Control method Compared frequency FU FU2 FU3 FB FB2 FB3 SU LS V F control Output frequency Output frequency Advanced magnetic flux vector control Output frequency before the slip compensation Outp...

Page 557: ...minal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 150 M460 Output current detection level 150 0 to 220 Set the output current detection level 100 is the rated inverter current 151 M461 Output current detection signal delay time 0s 0 to 10 s Set the output current detection time Set the time from when the output current reaches the setting or higher until the output current detection Y12 signal...

Page 558: ...rter operation continues when Y13 signal turns ON by setting Pr 167 Pr 167 setting When Y12 signal turns ON When Y13 signal turns ON 0 Initial value Continuous operation Continuous operation 1 Inverter trip E CDO Continuous operation 10 Continuous operation Inverter trip E CDO 11 Inverter trip E CDO Inverter trip E CDO Tab 5 146 Selecting the behaviour of the inverter output at switching of Y12 an...

Page 559: ...urrent is low and torque is not generated the detection signal may not be output Even when using the zero current detection signal a safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided to prevent hazardous machine or equipment conditions Parameters referred to Online auto tuning page 5 465 Offline auto tuning page 5 67 page 5 454 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 361...

Page 560: ...RUN terminal function selection 96 positive logic and 1 H01 is set in Pr 496 the terminal RUN turns ON Any value Y0 to Y6 are available when the extension output option FR A8AY is installed RA1 to RA3 are available hen the relay output option FR A8AR is installed Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 495 M500 Remote output selection 0 0 Remote output data is cleared when the power supply...

Page 561: ...o not turn ON OFF even if 0 or 1 is set in the terminal bits of Pr 496 and Pr 497 ON OFF is performed with the assigned functions When Pr 495 1 or 11 remote output data retention at power OFF take measures such as con necting R1 L11 with P and S1 L21 with N so that the control power is retained If the control power is not retained the output signal after turning ON the power is not guaranteed to w...

Page 562: ...Remote output data is cleared during an inverter reset 1 Remote output data is retained when the power supply is turned OFF 10 Remote output data is cleared when the power supply is turned OFF Remote output data is retained during an inverter reset 11 Remote output data is retained when the power supply is turned OFF 656 M531 Analog remote output 1 1000 800 to 1200 Value output from the terminal s...

Page 563: ...20 mA WhenPr 158 AMterminalfunctionselection 87 88 89 or90 ananalogvoltagecanbeoutput from the terminal AM Terminal AM output V 10 V analog remote output value 1000 100 The output range is 10 V to 10 V regardless of the Pr 290 Monitor negative output selection setting I002634E Fig 5 181 Terminal CA output I002635E Fig 5 182 Terminal AM output 20 1100 1200 800 1000 0 Output current mA Analog remote...

Page 564: ...te analog output data retention at power OFF take measures such as connecting R1 L11 with P and S1 L21 with N so that the control power is retained while power is supplied to R L1 S L2 and T L3 If the control power is not retained the analog output after turning ON the power is not guaranteed to work When connecting the high power factor converter FR HC2 assign the instantaneous power failure dete...

Page 565: ... Initial value Setting range Description 76 M510 Fault code output selection 0 0 Without fault code output 1 With fault code output Refer to the table below 2 Fault code is output only when a fault occurs Refer to the table below Operation panel indication FR DU08 Output terminal operation Fault code SU IPF OL FU Normal 0 0 0 0 0 E OC1 0 0 0 1 1 E OC2 0 0 1 0 2 E OC3 0 0 1 1 3 E OV1 to E OV3 0 1 0...

Page 566: ... 79 positive logic 179 negative logic to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selection Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 799 M520 Pulse increment setting for output power 1 kWh 0 1 kWh 1 kWh 10 kWh 100 kWh 1000 kWh Pulse train output of output power Y79 is output in pulses at every output power kWh that is specified I002834E Fig 5 184 Pulse train output of output power N...

Page 567: ...emperature reaches the Pr 663 setting or higher For the Y207 signal set 207 positive logic or 307 negative logic in one of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 663 M060 Control circuit temperature signal output level 0 C 0 to 100 C Set the temperature where the Y207 signal turns ON NOTES Th...

Page 568: ...on times 50 duty Pulse waveform example at 1000 pulse input when Pr 863 2 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 863 M600 Control terminal option Encoder pulse division ratio 1 1 to 32767 Set a numerical value by which pulses are divided I002859E Fig 5 185 Pulse waveform when Pr 863 2 NOTE Control of forward rotation reverse rotation by phase difference between A phase and B phase When A ...

Page 569: ...ent calibration Torque setting voltage current bias and gain P T110 to P T113 P T410 to P T413 P M043 Pr 241 C16 to C19 Pr 919 to Pr 920 C38 to C41 Pr 932 to Pr 933 5 409 To continue operating at analog current input loss 4 mA input check P T052 to P T054 Pr 573 Pr 777 Pr 778 5 399 To assign functions to input terminals Input terminal function selection P T700 to P T711 P T740 Pr 178 to Pr 189 Pr ...

Page 570: ...ttings shown in the table below cause a failure Other incorrect settings result in an incorrect operation I002637E Fig 5 186 Voltage current input switches Setting causing a failure Operation Switch setting Terminal input ON currentinput Voltage input Causes an analog signal output circuit failure in an external device due to increased loads on the signal output circuit of the external device OFF ...

Page 571: ...67 setting Terminal 4 input Switch 2 0 initial value 4 to 20 mA ON 1 0 to 5 V OFF 2 0 to 10 V OFF Tab 5 150 Setting of parameter 267 NOTES To enable the terminal 4 turn the AU signal ON Set the parameters and the switch settings so that they agree Incorrect setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction Terminal 1 frequency setting auxiliary input is added to the terminal 2 or 4 main speed setti...

Page 572: ... 4 input Terminal Inverter internal power source voltage Frequency setting resolution Pr 73 terminal 2 input voltage 10 5 V DC 0 030 Hz 60 Hz 0 to 5 V DC input 10E 10 V DC 0 015 Hz 60 Hz 0 to 10 V DC input Tab 5 151 Built in power supply voltage Fig 5 187 Frequency setting by voltage 0 to 5V DC I002638E Fig 5 188 Frequency setting by voltage 0 to 10 V DC I002639E Fig 5 189 Frequency setting by vol...

Page 573: ...ing Pr 73 to a value of 10 to 17 enables the polarity reversible operation Setting input 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V to the terminal 1 allows the operation of forward reverse rotation by the polarity Fig 5 190 Frequency setting by current 4 to 20 mA DC I002641E Fig 5 191 Frequency setting by current 4 to 20 mA DC I002642E Fig 5 192 CompensationinputcharacteristicswhenSTFisON I002643E STF SD 4 5 AU 2 4 F...

Page 574: ...unction assignment page 5 394 Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 5 394 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6 9999 Select the terminal 1 function Refer to the table below 858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0 1 4 9999 Select the terminal 4 function Refer to the table below Pr 868 setting V F control Advanced magnetic flux vect...

Page 575: ...o the control mode NOTE When Pr 868 1 magnetic flux command or 4 stall prevention torque limit the terminal 4 function is enabled whether the AU terminal is turned ON OFF Parameters referred to Advanced magnetic flux vector control page 5 67 Real sensorless vector control page 5 56 Pr 804 Torque command source selection page 5 132 Pr 807 Speed limit selection page 5 136 Pr 810 Torque limit input m...

Page 576: ... with use of terminal 2 terminal 2 input terminal 1 input Pr 242 100 Analog command value with use of terminal 4 terminal 4 input terminal 1 input Pr 243 100 Fig 5 193 Example of addition compensation connection I002644E I001187E Fig 5 194 Auxiliary input characteristics NOTE After changing the Pr 73 setting check the voltage current input switch setting Incorrect setting may cause a fault failure...

Page 577: ...e terminal 1 or 4 the compensation by terminal 2 is disabled Specify the scope of override by using Pr 252 and Pr 253 How to calculate the set frequency for override Set frequency Hz Main speed setting frequency Hz Compensation 100 Main speed setting frequency Hz Terminals 1 or 4 input multi speed setting Compensation Terminal 2 input Fig 5 195 Connection example for the override function I002645E...

Page 578: ...set Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selection 1 with compensation initial value 0 After changing the Pr 73 setting check the voltage current input switch setting Incorrect setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction For the settings refer to page 5 389 Parameters referred to Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selection page 5 189 Pr 73 Analog input selection page 5 389 75 50 37 5 25 12...

Page 579: ... 826 T004 Torque setting filter 1 9999 0 to 5 s Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external torque command analog input command 9999 Use the Pr 74 setting 832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s 9999 Second function of Pr 822 enabled when the RT signal is ON 836 T006 Torque setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s 9999 Second function of Pr 826 enabled when the RT signal is ON 849 T007 ...

Page 580: ...er 1 To change the time constant for example in a case where only one inverter is used to switch between two motors use Pr 836 Torque setting filter 2 Pr 836 Torque setting filter 2 is enabled when the RT signal is ON Analog speed command input offset adjustment Pr 849 This is used to set a range in which the motor is stopped for prevention of incorrect motor operation in a very low speed rotation...

Page 581: ...ncy setting gain 100 0 to 300 Set the converted on the gain side voltage current of the terminal 2 input C5 904 T400 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the terminal 4 input bias side frequency C6 904 T401 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 20 0 to 300 Set the converted on the bias side current voltage of terminal 4 input 126 905 T402 T042 Terminal 4 frequency setting g...

Page 582: ... frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias torque C18 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 2 Regenerative driving torque limit C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias torque C18 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 3 Torque com...

Page 583: ...nal function Calibration parameter Bias setting Gain setting 0 initial value Frequency command C5 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C38 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque C39 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias torque C40 Pr 933 T...

Page 584: ...5 Set the bias frequency of the terminal 1 input using C12 Pr 917 It is initially set to the frequency at 0 V Set the gain frequency of the terminal 1 input using C14 Pr 918 It is initially set to the frequency at 10 V Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5 Pr 904 It is initially set to the frequency at 4 mA Settheoutputfrequencyfor20mAofthefrequencycommandcurrent 4to20mA byusingP...

Page 585: ...ith voltage input to terminal 1 sets terminal 2 4 analog value terminal 1 analog value as the analog calibration value Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage current input signal with Pr 73 Pr 267 and the voltage current input selection switch Analog command terminals 2 4 depending on Pr 73 Pr 267 and voltage current input switch Pr 241 0 initial value Pr 241 1 0 to 5 V input 0 to 5...

Page 586: ...display Selecting the parameter number Turn to choose C4 Pr 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain for the terminal 1 and C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 1 4 Do not touch until calibration is completed Voltage current application Apply a 5 V 20 mA Turn the exte...

Page 587: ...or the terminal 1 and C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 1 4 Analog voltage current adjustment When is turned the gain voltage current currently set to the parameter is displayed When until the desired gain voltage current is displayed Setting completed Press to ...

Page 588: ...voltage current setting voltage are too close an error Er3 may be dis played at setting Changing C4 Pr 903 or C7 Pr 905 gain adjustment will not change Pr 20 Input to the terminal 1 frequency setting auxiliary input is added to the frequency setting signal For operation outline of the parameter unit FR PU07 refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR PU07 To set the value to 120 Hz or higher the Pr ...

Page 589: ...er vector control only Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description C16 919 T110 Terminal 1 bias command torque 0 0 to 400 Set the torque magnetic flux of the bias side of terminal 1 input C17 919 T111 Terminal 1 bias torque 0 0 to 300 Set the converted on bias side voltage of terminal 1 input C18 920 T112 Terminal 1 gain command torque 150 0 to 400 Set the torque magnetic flux of the gain maxi...

Page 590: ... frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias torque C18 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 2 Regenerative driving torque limit C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias torque C18 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 3 Torque com...

Page 591: ...ameter Bias setting Gain setting 0 initial value Frequency speed command Speed limit C5 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C38 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque C39 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias torque C40 Pr 933 Terminal 4 ...

Page 592: ...l value is 10 V Set the bias torque of the terminal 4 input using C38 Pr 932 The initial value is the torque for 4 mA Set the torque against the 20 mA for torque command current 4 to 20 mA with C40 Pr 933 I002648E Fig 5 200 Signal adjustment of terminal 1 I002649E Fig 5 201 Signal adjustment of terminal 4 400 150 0 0 0 Gain C18 Pr 920 Torque setting signal 5 V 10 V C19 Pr 920 C17 Pr 919 Calibratio...

Page 593: ...utdisplayunit V mA foranalog inputbiasandgaincalibrationcanbechanged Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr 73 and Pr 267 the display units of C17 Pr 919 C19 Pr 920 C39 Pr 932 and C41 Pr 933 will change as shown below NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage input signal with Pr 73 Pr 267 and the volt age current input selection switch Analog command terminals 1 ...

Page 594: ...Selecting the parameter number Turn to choose C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque for the terminal 1 and C41 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain torque for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 1 4 Do not touch until calibration is completed Voltage current application Apply a 5 V 20 mA Turn the external potentiometer connected...

Page 595: ...rque for the terminal 1 and C41 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain torque for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 1 4 Analog voltage current adjustment When is turned the gain voltage current currently set to the parameter is displayed Turn until the desired gain voltage current is displayed Setting completed Press to ente...

Page 596: ...ing only the torque without adjustment of a voltage current NOTES If the gain and bias of torque setting are too close an error Er3 may displayed at setting For operation outline of the parameter unit FR PU07 refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR PU07 Set the bias torque setting using the calibration parameter C16 Pr 919 or C38 Pr 932 Refer to page 5 412 E CAUTION Be cautious when setting any ...

Page 597: ...ith output frequency before the current input loss 2 4 mA input fault is activated when the current input loss is detected 3 Decelerates to stop when the current input loss is detected After it is stopped 4 mA input fault E LCI is activated 4 Continues operation with the Pr 777 setting 9999 No current input check 777 T053 4 mA input check operation frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the running freque...

Page 598: ... PID control reverse action I001197E Fig 5 203 4mA input check during external operation Pr 573 1 or 4 I001198E Fig 5 204 4mA input check during PID control reverse action Pr 573 1 or 4 NOTE When the setting is changed to continuously operate after the input current loss Pr 573 1 4 the motor will operate as the frequency before loss is 0 Hz 20 mA 4 mA 2 mA 3 mA Output frequency Analog input Pr 573...

Page 599: ...en the analog current input is restored during the deceleration it will accelerate again and operate according to the current input PID control reverse action I002650E Fig 5 205 Fault output Pr 573 2 I002651E Fig 5 206 Fault output after deceleration to stop Pr 573 3 STF Output frequency Set point fixed Measured value 20 mA 4 mA LF signal PID signal ALM signal E LCI occurs Input current decrease R...

Page 600: ...se action I002768E Fig 5 207 Fault output after deceleration under PID control reverse action Pr 573 3 STF Output frequency 20 mA 4 mA Set point fixed Measured value LF signal PID signal OFF during deceleration Input current decrease 2mA 3 mA Return Decelerates as the input current is lost Normal operation after the current is restored Time ...

Page 601: ...g the operation continuation due to current input loss and retry was a success operation will continue without clearing the operation continuation frequency 5 307 Added compensation override compensation During operation with added compensation or override compensation and transferred to operation continuation due to input current loss added compensation and override compensation will become inval...

Page 602: ...0to20 22to28 37 42to48 50 to 53 62 64 to 74 76 77 to 80 87 92 to 96 9999 181 T703 RM terminal function selection 1 RM Middle speed operation command 182 T704 RH terminal function selection 2 RH High speed operation command 183 T705 RT terminal function selection 3 RT Second function selection 184 T706 AU terminal function selection 4 AU Terminal 4 input selection 185 T707 JOG terminal function sel...

Page 603: ...l relay input Pr 9 5 292 8 REX 15 speed selection Combination with multi speeds of RL RM and RH Pr 4 to Pr 6 Pr 24 to Pr 27 Pr 232 to Pr 239 5 189 9 X9 Third function selection Pr 110 to Pr 116 5 428 10 X10 Inverter run enable signal FR HC2 FR CV FR CC2 connection Pr 30 Pr 70 Pr 599 5 675 11 X11 FR HC2 FR CC2 connection instantaneous power failure detection Pr 30 Pr 70 5 675 12 X12 PU operation ex...

Page 604: ...75 5 192 64 X64 During retry Pr 127 to Pr 134 5 524 65 X65 PU NET operation switchover PU operation with X65 ON Pr 79 Pr 340 5 263 66 X66 External NET operation switchover NET operation with X66 ON Pr 79 Pr 340 5 263 67 X67 Command source switchover Command by Pr 338 Pr 339 enabled with X67 ON Pr 338 Pr 339 5 274 68 NP Simple position pulse train sign Pr 291 Pr 419 to Pr 430 Pr 464 5 171 69 CLR Si...

Page 605: ...ame signal is used to assign multi speed 7 speed and remote setting Setting cannot be per formed individually When the Load pattern selection forward reverse rotation boost X17 signal is not assigned RT signal will share this function If Pr 419 2 simple pulse train position command is set the terminal JOG is used for the simple position pulse train input regardless of the Pr 291 Pulse train I O se...

Page 606: ...is entered into the inverter To coast the motor to a stop When the start signal is turned OFF the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time but when the MRS signal is turned ON the motor coasts to a stop MRS signal logic inversion Pr 17 2 WhenPr 17 2 theMRSsignalcanbechangedtonormallyclosed NCcontact specification Thein verter will shut off the output with MRS signal...

Page 607: ... Output shutoff Tab 5 168 Output shutoff by external terminal or communication NOTES The MRS signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial status By setting 24 in either Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation mod...

Page 608: ...s Switching between regular use and emergency use Switching between heavy load and light load Change the acceleration deceleration time by break point acceleration deceleration Switching characteristics of main motor and sub motor Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 155 T730 RT signal function validity condition selection 0 0 Second third function is immediately enabled with ON of RT X...

Page 609: ... to Pr 462 Pr 738 to Pr 747 Pr 860 5 440 5 454 Offline auto tuning Pr 96 Pr 463 5 440 5 454 Online auto tuning Pr 95 Pr 574 5 465 PID control Pr 127 to Pr 134 Pr 753 to Pr 758 5 524 PID Pre charge function Pr 760 to Pr 764 Pr 765 to Pr 769 5 547 Brake sequence Pr 278 to Pr 285 Pr 639 Pr 640 Pr 641 to Pr 648 Pr 650 Pr 651 5 484 Droop control Pr 286 to Pr 288 Pr 994 Pr 995 Pr 679 to Pr 683 5 695 Low...

Page 610: ... the frequency setting signal For multi speed operation refer to page 5 189 By setting Pr 250 1000 to 1100 8888 STF signal becomes start command and STF signal becomes forward reverse command Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description Start signal STF STR Stop operation Refer to page 5 430 250 G106 Stop selection 9999 0 to 100 s STF signal Forward rotation start STR signal Reverse rotation st...

Page 611: ...nd then OFF Inverter will perform deceleration stop by turning the STP STOP signal OFF once I002657E Fig 5 214 2 wire type connection example Pr 250 8888 NOTES By setting Pr 250 0 to 100 1000 to 1100 it will perform coast to stop when the start command is turned OFF Refer to page 5 430 The STF and STR signals are assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the initial status STF signal can be assigne...

Page 612: ...ection example Pr 250 8888 STF STR SD STP STOP STF STR STP STOP Time Inverter Forward rotation start Stop Reverse rotation start Reverse rotation Forward rotation Output frequency ON ON OFF OFF ON STF STR STP STOP STF STR SD STP STOP ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Time Inverter Start Stop Forward rotation reverse rotation Forward rotation Reverse rotation Output frequency ...

Page 613: ...N the JOG signal STP STOP signal will be disa bled Even when the output is stopped by turning ON the MRS signal self holding function is not can celled STF STR Pr 250 setting and inverter condition 0 to 100 s 9999 1000 s to 1100 s 8888 OFF OFF Stop Stop OFF ON Reverse rotation ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation ON ON Stop Reverse rotation Tab 5 170 Start signal selection Parameters referred ...

Page 614: ... tuning P C000 P C100 to P C108 P C110 P C120 P C122 P C123 P C126 P C130 to P C133 P C150 P C182 P C185 P C200 to P C208 P C210 P C220 P C222 P C223 P C226 P C230 to P C233 P C282 P C285 Pr 9 Pr 51 Pr 71 Pr 80 Pr 81 Pr 83 Pr 84 Pr 90 Pr 92 Pr 93 Pr 96 Pr 450 Pr 453 Pr 454 Pr 456 to Pr 458 Pr 460 Pr 461 Pr 463 Pr 684 Pr 702 Pr 706 Pr 707 Pr 711 Pr 712 Pr 717 Pr 721 Pr 724 Pr 725 Pr 738 to Pr 747 P...

Page 615: ... 2 Standard motor such as SF JR Adjustable 5 points V F Refer to page 5 660 20 Mitsubishi standard motor SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 30 Vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU 1500 r min series SF THY 40 Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF HR 50 Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF HRCA 70 Mitsubishi high performance energy saving motor SF PR 330 IPM motor MM CF 8090 IPM motor other than MM CF 9090 SPM...

Page 616: ...1 mΩ Pr 92 Pr 460 and Pr 93 Pr 461 앫 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 앫 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 1 mΩ Pr 94 Pr 462 앫 0 to 500 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 앫 0 to 100 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 15 Constant torque motor 6 Standard motor Delta connection 16 Constant torque motor 9999 initial value No second applied motor NOTES Regardless of the Pr 71 Pr 450 setting offline auto tuning can be performed according to Pr 96 Pr 463 Auto tuning set...

Page 617: ...ning setting status Pr 463 Pr 96 Frequency search gain Pr 560 Pr 298 Online auto tuning selection Pr 574 Pr 95 Induced voltage constant phi f Pr 738 Pr 706 Motor Ld decay ratio Pr 739 Pr 711 Motor Lq decay ratio Pr 740 Pr 712 Starting resistance tuning compensation Pr 741 Pr 717 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width Pr 742 Pr 721 Maximum motor frequency Pr 743 Pr 702 Motor inertia ...

Page 618: ...Constant torque motor SF PR Standard motor Constant torque motor SF PR SLD LD ND HD SLD LD ND HD Pr 81 2 4 6 Pr 81 2 Pr 81 4 Pr 81 6 00046 0 4K 00023 0 4K 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 00077 0 75K 00038 0 75K 6 6 4 7 4 6 6 4 4 4 4 00105 1 5K 00052 1 5K 4 4 3 5 8 5 3 7 4 4 2 5 00167 2 2K 00083 2 2K 4 4 2 5 6 4 5 3 3 4 4 2 5 00250 3 7K 00126 3 7K 4 4 2 5 6 4 4 5 4 2 4 4 2 5 00340 5 5K 00170 5 5K 3 2 2 4 5 3 7 3...

Page 619: ...nverter to overheat and burn Parameters referred to Pr 0 Torque boost page 5 652 Pr 12 DC injection brake operation voltage page 5 663 Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status page 5 67 Pr 100 to Pr 109 Adjustable 5 points V F page 5 660 Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 422 Pr 684 Tuning data unit switchover page 5 67 Pr 800 Control method selection page 5 56 ...

Page 620: ...r capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Set the applied motor capacity 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of motor poles 9999 V F control 9 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay Rated inverter current 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 83 C104 Rated motor voltage 200 400 V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage V 84 C105 Rated motor freq...

Page 621: ...ications as Pr 71 9999 The function is disabled 453 C201 Second motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Set the capacity of the second motor 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 454 C202 Number of second motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor 9999 V F control 51 C203 Second electronic thermal O L relay 9999 0 to 500 A This function is enabled when the RT signal is ON Set the ...

Page 622: ...0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search of the second motor 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA and so on NOTES The function is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector con trol and vector control Even if a motor other than Mitsubishi standard motors SF JR 0 4 k...

Page 623: ...igh slip motor a high speed motor or a special motor The highest frequency is 400 Hz The motor may rotate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 1 is selected The slight motor rotation does not affect the tuning performance Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or before tuning make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates Ca...

Page 624: ...Control method selection 20 Set this parameter when using vector control or Real sensorless vector control 9 51 Electronic thermal O L relay Rated inverter current Set the rated motor current A 83 456 Rated motor voltage 200 V 400 V Set the rated motor voltage V printed on the motor s rating plate 84 457 Rated motor frequency 9999 Set the rated motor frequency Hz When the setting is 9999 the Pr 3 ...

Page 625: ...tandard motor 0 initial value 3 4 5 star connection motor 6 delta connection motor Other manufacturer s constant torque motor 1 13 14 15 star connection motor 16 deltaconnection motor Tab 5 175 Motor selection NOTES If the SF V5RU other than the 1500 r min series is used be sure to perform auto tuning after set ting 1 13 or 14 in Pr 71 and setting Pr 83 and Pr 84 If Pr 11 DC injection brake operat...

Page 626: ...RS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM CA and AM Do not perform ON OFF switching of the Second function selection RT signal during offline auto tuning Auto tuning will not be performed properly...

Page 627: ...tation Pr 96 101 Approx 40 s The following offline auto tuning time is set according to the acceleration deceleration time setting Offline auto tuning time acceleration time deceleration time approx 30 s Tab 5 178 Offline auto tuning time when the initial value is set NOTES The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offli...

Page 628: ...tivated Set the acceleration deceleration time longer Set Pr 156 1 92 The converter output voltage has dropped to 75 of the rated voltage Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation Check the Pr 84 Rated motor frequency setting 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the Pr 83 and Pr 84 settings Check the motor wiring and make the setting again 94 Rotation tuning frequency setting...

Page 629: ...rmula to find the Pr 94 setting value and set a given value as the motor constant parameter Motor Pr 71 setting Mitsubishi standard motor Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF JR 0 initial value SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 20 SF HR 40 Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF JRCA 4P 1 SF HRCA 50 Mitsubishi high performance energy saving motor SF PR 70 Vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU 1500 r min series...

Page 630: ... 0 1 mH 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 94 462 Motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 0 01 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767 9999 1 Tab 5 181 Parameter setting ranges NOTE If 9999 is set tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi motors SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA and SF V5RU 1500 r...

Page 631: ...H 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 93 461 Motor constant L2 q shaft inductance Lq 0 to 6000mH 9999 0 1 mH 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 94 462 Motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 0 01 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767 9999 1 0 to 32767 9999 1 Tab 5 183 Parameter setting ranges NOTES As the motor constants measured...

Page 632: ...0 458 Motor constant r1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 91 459 Motor constant r2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 92 460 Motor constant 1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 93 461 Motor constant 2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 94 462 Motor constant m 0 to 500 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 0 to 100 Ω 9999 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current ...

Page 633: ...ce Lq Pr 461 Pr 93 Motor constant X Pr 462 Pr 94 Auto tuning setting status Pr 463 Pr 96 Frequency search gain Pr 560 Pr 298 Tab 5 185 Validation of parameters by the RT signal NOTES The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using ...

Page 634: ...r are set 80 C101 Motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Applied motor capacity setting 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of motor poles 9999 V F control 9 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay Rated inverter current 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 83 C104 Rated motor voltage 200 400 V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage V 84...

Page 635: ...mum current OCT level of the motor 9999 Uses the MM CF constant for the IPM motor MM CF and 200 for a PM motor other than MM CF 450 C200 Second applied motor 9999 0 1 3 to 6 13 to 16 20 23 24 30 33 34 40 43 44 50 53 54 70 73 74 330 333 334 8090 8093 8094 9090 9093 9094 Set this parameter when using the second motor the same specifications as Pr 71 9999 The function is disabled 453 C201 Second moto...

Page 636: ...M CF and the inverter internal data for a PM motor other than MM CF 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 460 C222 Second motor constant L1 d shaft inductance Ld 9999 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 to 50 mH 9999 461 C223 Second motor constant L2 q shaft inductance Lq 9999 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 to 50 mH 9999 860 C226 Second motor torque current Rated PM motor current 9999 0 to 500 A 9999 0 to 3600 A 9999 738 C230 Second motor induced...

Page 637: ...ate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 1 or 11 is selected It does not affect the tuning performance Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or before tuning make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications Tuning is not available during position control under PM sen...

Page 638: ...Rated motor voltage Rated motor voltage V Rated motorvoltage V written on the rated plate 71 450 Applied motor 8090 8093 IPM motor 9090 9093 SPM motor 330 and 333 96 463 Auto tuning setting status 1 11 Tab 5 186 Set the parameters before performing tuning Motor Pr 71 setting Motor constant parameter Ω mH and A unit setting Motor constant parameter Internal data setting IPM motor MM CF 330 333 334 ...

Page 639: ... value Input terminals effective signals STP STOP OH MRS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM CA and AM Do not perform ON OFF switching of the Second function selection RT signal during offline ...

Page 640: ... tuning monitor display NOTES The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again However the tuning data is cleared by performing all parameter clear Changing Pr 71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant For example if Pr 71 8093 is set after tuning is performed with Pr 71 80...

Page 641: ...ing 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the motor wiring and make the setting again 94 Rotation tuning frequency setting error The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed the maximum frequency setting or to be in the frequency jump range Check the Pr 1 Maximum frequency and Pr 31 to Pr 36 Frequency jump settings Tab 5 190 Settings for Pr 96 Pr 463 NOTES An instantane...

Page 642: ... values are stored in the EEPROM as motor constant parameters and two types of motor constants can be stored First motor Pr Second motor Pr Name Other than MM CF Pr 96 Pr 4 63 1 V F control or MM CF Pr 96 Pr 463 11 Description 90 458 Motor constant R1 Resistance per phase 92 460 Motor constant L1 d shaft inductance Ld d shaft inductance 93 461 Motor constant L2 q shaft inductance Lq q shaft induct...

Page 643: ...Setting increments Initial value 90 458 Motor constant R1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 9999 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 92 460 Motor constant L1 d shaft inductance Ld 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 01 mH 0 to 50 mH 9999 0 001 mH 93 461 Motor constant L2 q shaft inductance Lq 0 to 500 mH 9999 s 0 01 mH 0 to 50 mH 9999 0 001 mH 706 738 Induced voltage constant phi f 0 to 5000 mV rad s 9999 0 1 mV rad s 859 860 Torque cu...

Page 644: ... phi f 0 to 5000 mV s rad 9999 0 1 mV rad s 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A Tab 5 195 Parameter setting ranges NOTES As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data refer to the following setting example when making setting Setting example To slightly increase Pr 90 value 5 If Pr 90 2516 i...

Page 645: ...s 3 or 103 offline auto tuning completion Set Pr 95 Online auto tuning selection 1 online auto tuning at start Check that the following parameters are set before starting operation Ifamotorwithsubstantiallylowratedcurrentcomparedwiththeratedinvertercurrentisused speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples etc Set the rated motor current to about 40 or higher of the rated inve...

Page 646: ...n is required to prevent the object from dropping Use of the start time tuning start X28 signal is recommended to perform tuning Refer to page 5 466 Perform online auto tuning at startup when the motor is stopped The online auto tuning is disabled when the MRS signal is being input the setting speed is Pr 13 Starting frequency or lower V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control an inverter ...

Page 647: ...xistsafewseconds Completed Tuning is not performedif the Y39 signalis ON While the X28 signal is ON X28 Signal Tuning status at starting Y39 signal Start signal Output frequency OFF OFF OFF ON ON Tune Tuning is not performed at start since X28 signal and Y39 signal is ON Completed 0 Hz Time While the X28 signal is OFF X28 Signal Tuning status at starting Y39 signal Output frequency Start signal OF...

Page 648: ...N as long as there is second flux even after the motor is stopped The X28 signal is disabled while the Y39 signal is ON The STF and STR signals are enabled after completing tuning at start The Inverter running RUN signal is not turned ON during online auto tuning The RUN signal is turned ON after starting up It is disabled during V F control or PM sensorless vector control Changing the terminal as...

Page 649: ...tor current equal to or lower than the rated inverter current 454 Number of motor poles Tab 5 197 Related Parameters NOTES The RT signal is a second function selection signal The RT signal also enables other second func tions Refer to page 5 422 The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT sig...

Page 650: ...o P A625 P A640 to P A644 P A650 to P A655 P A661 to P A665 Pr 127 to Pr 134 Pr 553 Pr 554 Pr 575 to Pr 577 Pr 609 Pr 610 Pr 753 to Pr 758 Pr 1015 Pr 1134 Pr 1135 Pr 1140 Pr 1141 Pr 1143 to Pr 1149 5 524 PID pre charge function P A616 to P A620 P A656 to P A660 Pr 760 to Pr 769 5 547 PID display adjustment P A630 to P A633 P A670 to P A673 C42 to C45 Pr 934 Pr 935 Pr 1136 to Pr 1139 5 543 To contr...

Page 651: ... longer than the time period from the ON signal input to the actual pick up operation of MC3 0 3 to 0 5 s 138 A003 Bypass selection at a fault 0 0 Inverter output stop motor coasting at inverter failure 1 Automatic switchover to commercial power supply operation at inverter failure Switchover is not possible when an external thermal relay E OHT or CPU fault E CPU is occurring 139 A004 Automatic sw...

Page 652: ...F of the magnetic contactor at the inverter output side The inverter s electronic bypass sequence that outputs timing signals for the magnetic contactors can act as a complicated interlock between the commercial power supply operation and the inverter operation Connection diagram A typical connection diagram of the electronic bypass sequence is shown below NOTE The commercial power supply operatio...

Page 653: ... converter type Output terminal capacity Output terminal permissible load Open collector output of inverter RUN SU IPF OL FU 24 V DC 0 1 A Inverter relay output A1 C1 B1 C1 A2 B2 B2 C2 Relay output option FR A8AR 230 V AC 0 3 A 30 V DC 0 3 A NOTES Use the electronic bypass function in External operation mode In addition the wiring terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 must be connected to a separate power s...

Page 654: ...the external thermal relay is operating MC3 Between inverter output side and motor Open Shorted Open Tab 5 198 Operations of magnetic contactors Signal Applied terminal Function Operation MC operation MC1 MC2 MC3 MRS MRS Selects whether or not operation is available ON Electronic bypass operation available OFF Electronic bypass operation not available Invariance CS CS Inverter commercial power sup...

Page 655: ...signal of the magnetic contactor MC1 on the inverter s input side MC2 18 Operation output signal of the magnetic contactor MC2 for the commercial power supply operation MC3 19 Operation output signal of the magnetic contactor MC3 on the inverter s output side Tab 5 200 Output signals I002669E Fig 5 222 Signal timing when there is no automatic switchover sequence Inverter run command STF Power supp...

Page 656: ... A A B C D ON OFF Output frequency Pr 139 Frequency command Actual motor speed ON OFF INV operation Commercial power supply operation ON OFF A Pr 136 MC switchover interlock time C Pr 57 Restart coasting time B Pr 137 Start waiting time D Pr 58 Restart cushion time Time Time STF MC3 MC2 C A A B C D A A B C D ON OFF Output frequency Frequency command Actual motor speed ON OFF ON OFF Commercial powe...

Page 657: ...on switched to the inverter operation inverter ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON MC3 turns ON after MC2 turns OFF Waiting time is 4 s while coasting Stop ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON Tab 5 201 Signals after parameter setting 앫 Pr 135 1 open collector output terminal of inverter 앫 Pr 136 2 0 s 앫 Pr 137 1 0 s Set the time until MC3 is actually turned ON and the inverter and motor are electrically connected If...

Page 658: ... functions When the electronic bypass sequence function Pr 135 1 and PU operation interlock function Pr 79 7 are used at the same time the MRS signal is shared with the PU operation external interlock if the X12 signal is not assigned The inverter operation is available when the MRS and CS signals are ON Set the acceleration time to the level that does not activate the stall prevention operation W...

Page 659: ...ault X96 Converter unit fault E OHT E CPU X94 Control signal for main circuit power supply MC MC operation Converter status MC1 MC2 MC3 OFF OFF ON Converter fault E OHT Pr 248 2 OFF Converter fault E OHT Pr 248 1 E CPU ON ON ON Converter normal OFF ON ON Converter fault other than the circuit failure fault or E OHT Pr 248 2 OFF Converter fault other than E OHT or E CPU Tab 5 202 Input signals of s...

Page 660: ...to 0 5 s 254 A007 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 600 s 0 to 3600 s Set the waiting time until the main circuit power supply is turned OFF after the motor is stopped 9999 The main circuit power supply is turned OFF only when the protective function selected by Pr 248 is activated 30 E300 Regenerative function selection 0 100 101 Power supply to the inverter AC terminals R S and T When power is...

Page 661: ...in circuit power supply OFF Set Pr 254 to prevent frequent MC operation Turning ON the start signal turns ON the MC1 signal and closes the MC on the input side main circuit power supply ON After the time set in Pr 137 Start waiting time has passed the inverter starts Set time slightly longer about 0 3 to 0 5 s than the time period from the MC1 ON to the actual pick up operation of the MC is turned...

Page 662: ...al of the inverter is assigned To use the X94 signal set 94 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function to an input terminal Fault record Inrush current limit circuit fault E IOH CPU fault E CPU CPU fault E 6 CPU fault E 7 Parameter storage device fault E PE Parameter storage device fault E PE2 24 VDC power fault E P24 Operation panel power supply short circ...

Page 663: ... supplied only to the control circuit set 100 or more in Pr 30 For the separated converter type setting Pr 30 of the converter unit is also required When supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit there is a little waiting time before starting To use X94 signal for the separated converter type use a converter unit manufactured in August 2014 o...

Page 664: ...to 5 s When Pr 292 7 set the mechanical delay time until the brake closes 0 1 s When Pr 292 8 set the mechanical delay time until the brake closes approx 0 2 to 0 3 s 284 A106 Deceleration detection function selection 0 0 The deceleration detection function disabled 1 The protective function activates when the deceleration speed of the deceleration operation is not normal 285 A107 Overspeed detect...

Page 665: ...to Pr 282 647 A125 Second brake operation time at stop 0 3 s 0 to 5 s Refer to Pr 283 648 A126 Second deceleration detection function selection 0 0 1 Refer to Pr 284 650 A128 Second brake opening current selection 0 0 1 Refer to Pr 639 651 A129 Second brake operation frequency selection 0 0 1 Refer to Pr 640 I002673E Fig 5 229 Connection example with mechanical brake Pr 184 15 Pr 190 20 NOTES The ...

Page 666: ...rm brake operation while referring to the frequency command regardless of the Pr 640 setting Operation with brake opening completion signal input Pr 292 7 When the start signal is input to the inverter the inverter starts running and when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr 278 Brake opening frequency and the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than the Pr 27...

Page 667: ...he time set in Pr 283 Brake operation time at stop And after the set time in Pr 283 passes the inverter decelerates again Pr 13 Starting frequency setting or 0 5 Hz whichever is lower I002674E Fig 5 230 Operation when parameter 292 7 I002675E Fig 5 231 Operation when parameter 292 8 NOTE Even if the brake sequence operation has been selected inputting the JOG signal JOG operation will change the o...

Page 668: ...uts off output and turns OFF the brake opening request signal BOF Pr 641 setting Brake sequence function when the RT signal is ON 0 initial value Normal operation The first and second brake sequence functions invalid 7 Second brake sequence mode 1 8 Second brake sequence mode 2 9999 First brake sequence mode is valid Tab 5 205 Multiple brake sequence functions Fault indication Description E MB1 Wh...

Page 669: ...equency equal to or higher than the Pr 13 setting or 0 5 Hz Pr 285 Overspeed detection frequency is valid under encoder feedback control used with the FR A8AP option even if a value other than 7 or 8 is set in Pr 292 Automatic acceleration decel eration Setting Pr 278 too high activates the stall prevention and may cause E MB4 E MB4 occurs when the acceleration time from Pr 13 to Pr 278 Pr 280 rea...

Page 670: ...r to page 5 494 11 Stop on contact control E OLT is invalid under stop on contact control 13 Stop on contact load torque high speed frequency control Refer to page 5 494 275 A205 Stop on contact excitation current low speed multiplying factor 9999 0 to 300 Set the force holding torque for stop on contact control Normally set it from 130 to 180 9999 No compensation 276 A206 PWM carrier frequency at...

Page 671: ...Pr 5 Pr 6 Normal mode Stop on contact control mode Time Output frequency ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF Goes into stop on contact control mode when both RL and RT switch on RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any time difference a Acceleration time Pr 7 b Deceleration time Pr 8 c Second deceleration time Pr 44 Pr 45 ...

Page 672: ...or hold a load for an extended period this function can cause the motor to overheat After a stop immediately switch to a mechanical brake to hold the load Under the following operating conditions the stop on contact function is invalid PU operation Pr 79 JOG operation JOG signal PU External operation Pr 79 PID control function operation Pr 128 Remote setting function operation Pr 59 Automatic acce...

Page 673: ...ed 4 ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 5 Multi speed setting middle speed ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 6 Multi speed setting low speed ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON ON Pr 6 Multi speed setting low speed ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog fre...

Page 674: ... 489 2 Load torque high speed frequency control 3 Stop on contact refer to page 5 489 load torque high speed frequency control 11 Stop on contact control E OLT invalid under stop on contact control 13 Stop on contact load torque high speed frequency control Refer to page 5 489 271 A201 High speed setting maximum current 50 0 to 400 Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and middle s...

Page 675: ... in the currentaveragingrange Thecurrentaveragingrangeisfromthe1 2thePr 5tothefullPr 5setting in the current averaging range To use the X19 signal set 19 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function to an input terminal This is valid in External operation mode and Network operation mode The control can be activated at every start I002679E Fig 5 236 Connection...

Page 676: ...cy regardless of the average current When Pr 273 is used the current averaging range can be set between one half of the frequency of the Pr 273 setting value and the Pr 273 set frequency However the setting value must be smaller than Pr 5 setting When the average current is larger than rated inverter current Pr 271 setting and smaller than rated inverter current Pr 272 setting linear compensation ...

Page 677: ...terminal Under the following operating conditions the load torque high speed frequency function is inva lid PU operation Pr 79 PU External operation Pr 79 JOG operation PID control function opera tion Pr 128 remote setting function operation Pr 59 orientation control function operation multi speed setting RH RM RL signal torque control position control When the average current during acceleration ...

Page 678: ...with f3 f1 Pr 595 and the inverter accelerates again to f0 f1 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 592 A300 Traverse function selection 0 0 Traverse function invalid 1 Traverse function valid only in External operation mode 2 Traverse function valid regardless of the operation mode 593 A301 Maximum amplitude amount 10 0 to 25 Level of amplitude during traverse operation 594 A302 Amplitu...

Page 679: ...e selected S pattern acceleration deceleration operation occurs only in the range operated at the normal acceleration deceleration time Pr 7 Pr 8 Acceleration deceleration during traverse operation is performed linearly If stall prevention activates during traverse operation traverse operation stops and normal opera tion begins When stall prevention operation is completed the inverter accelerates ...

Page 680: ...aches the Pr 10 DC injection brake operation frequency or lower 1073 A311 Swinging suppression control operation selection 0 0 Swinging suppression control disabled 1 Swinging suppression control enabled 1074 A312 Swinging suppression frequency 1 Hz 0 05 to 3 Hz Sets the swinging frequency of the load 999 A swinging frequency is estimated based on the Pr 1077 to Pr 1079 settings and swinging suppr...

Page 681: ... swinging suppression control Pr 1072 Set the time from when the output frequency becomes the Pr 10 DC injection brake operation fre quency or less to when the zero speed control or the servo lock operation starts in the Pr 1072 DC brake judgment time for swinging suppression control operation Setting value 3 2 1 0 Depth Shallow Deep Gain 4 dB 8 dB 14 dB Tab 5 209 Setting of depth and gain I002840...

Page 682: ... Pr 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection page 5 281 Pr 286 Droop gain page 5 695 Pr 292 Automatic acceleration deceleration page 5 255 Pr 592 Traverse function selection page 5 498 Pr 690 Deceleration check time page 5 118 Pr 875 Fault definition page 5 302 Pr 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection page 5 685 ...

Page 683: ...on pulses reach the specified start position of the DC injection brake 356 A531 Internal stop position command 0 0 to 16383 When 0 is set in Pr 350 the internal position command is activated and the setting value of Pr 356 becomes the stop position 357 A532 Orientation in position zone 5 0 to 255 Set the in position width at a stop of the orientation 358 A533 Servo torque selection 1 0 to 13 Opera...

Page 684: ...ignal is turned OFF with the orientation command X22 ON after stopping the motor by orientation control the present position is checked again after the set time elapses and the orientation complete signal ORA or orientation fault signal ORM is output 9999 Not checked 369 C140 852 C241 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of encoder pulses Set the number of pulses before it is mul...

Page 685: ... motor is selected the orientation control is disabled 862 C242 Encoder option selection 0 0 First motor plug in option that supports the vector control Second motor control terminal option that supports the vector control Machine end orientation invalid 1 First motor control terminal option that supports the vector control Second motor plug in option that supports the vector control Machine end o...

Page 686: ...age 2 67 A separate power supply of 5 V 12 V 15 V 24 V is necessary according to the encoder power specification Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output voltage and connect the external power supply between PG and SD When performing encoder feedback control and vector control together an encoder and power supply can be shared When a stop position command is input f...

Page 687: ...tting I O signals Selecting stop position command Pr 350 Stop position command selection Select either to use the internal stop position command Pr 356 Internal stop position com mand or the external stop position command 16 bit data using the FR A8AX When the internal stop position command Pr 350 0 is selected the Pr 356 setting is used as the stop position Fig 5 243 Connection of the resistor I0...

Page 688: ...R A8AX is the direct stop position command Example When the Pr 369 Number of encoder pulses setting is 1024 the stop position command from 0 to 4095 can be input using FR A8AX and the digital signal of 2048 H800 is input to stop the motor at a 180 position 2 to 127 Set the stop position command by dividing up to 128 stop positions If the external stop command input is greater than the setting the ...

Page 689: ...on Internal stop position command is given when no option is mounted or Pr 360 0 even if 1 external stop position command is set in Pr 350 Pr 350 Stop position command selection Pr 360 16 bit data selection Operation status Stop position command 16 bit data FR A8AX Speed command 0 internal 0 speed command Internal Pr 356 Speed command 16 bit data 1 2 to 127 position command Internal Pr 356 Invalid...

Page 690: ...ition pulse monitor is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor of the PU Displayed only when a vector control compatible option is mounted Orientation status When 22 is set in Pr 52 the orientation status is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor of the PU Displayed only when a vector control compatible option is mounted 0 Other than orientation operation or orientation speed is n...

Page 691: ...et in Pr 363 Pr 357 is initially set to 5 Pr 363 is initially set to 0 5 s If the orientation is not completed continuously in Pr 365 Orientation limit after passing the creep switchover position the orientation fault signal ORM is output After the orientation start if the motor is stopped by external force etc before reaching the in position width and therefore the ORA signal has not been output ...

Page 692: ...ing running I001581E Fig 5 247 Action time chart for orientation from stop 0 Main spindle speed encoder Pr 351 Pr 352 Start signal STF STR Orientation command X22 Current position signal Origin signal DC injection brake Orientation completion signal ORA Orientation speed set with Pr 351 Creep speed set with Pr 352 Creep switchover position set with Pr 353 Position loop switchover set with Pr 354 S...

Page 693: ...econds as continuous operation of the DC injection brake will cause the motor to overheat leading to burnout Because the servo lock function is not available after orientation stop provide a holding mecha nism such as a mechanical brake or knock pin when secure holding of the main shaft is required To ensure correct positioning the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction and the A and...

Page 694: ...rque function until output of the orientation complete signal ORA With servo torque function Without servo torque function Retry function With retry function Without retry function Output frequency compensation when the motor stops outside the in position zone With frequency compensation Without frequency compensation DC injection brake and servo torque when the motor exits the in position zone af...

Page 695: ...rientation stop position The output frequency is gradually increased to the Pr 352 Creep speed This function cannot be used with the retry function DC injection brake and servo torque selection when the position pulse exits the in position zone after output of the ORA signal If the motor exits the in position width select the setting either to fix the shaft with the DC injection brake or by return...

Page 696: ...position can be moved using Pr 361 Position shift Pr 393 setting Rotation direction Remarks 0 initial value Pre orientation Orientation is executed from the current rotation direction Motor end orientation 1 Forward rotation orientation Orientation is executed from the forward rotation direction If the motor is running in reverse orientation is executed from the forward rotation direction after de...

Page 697: ... is running in the reverse rotation direction it will make an orientation stop with the same method as orientation from the current rotation direction If the motor is running in forward it will decelerate change to the reverse rotation direction and then orientation stop will be executed P WARNING IftheX22isturnedOFFwhilethestartsignalisinput themotorwillacceleratetowardthespeed of the current spe...

Page 698: ...ing position is exceeded NOTES Couple the encoder with the motor shaft that stops the shaft at the specified position Couple it with the speed ratio of 1 1 and without any mechanical looseness To ensure correct positioning the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction and the A and B phases must be connected correctly If the pulse signal from the encoder stops due to encoder signal loss...

Page 699: ...2 setting Increase the Pr 396 and Pr 397 settings The orientation time is long Increase the Pr 399 setting Increase the Pr 362 setting Hunting occurs during stopping Decrease the Pr 362 setting Decrease the Pr 396 setting and increase the Pr 397 setting Low servo rigidity during stopping Increase the Pr 396 setting and decrease the Pr 397 setting Increase the Pr 362 setting Tab 5 217 Adjustment of...

Page 700: ...ientation stop Notethat the orientation time will increase I001590E Fig 5 252 Orientation speed NOTE When 19 is set in Pr 52 Operation panel main monitor selection the position pulse monitor is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor on the PU Decelerate according to the deceleration ratio of Pr 399 Orientation command completion ON OFF ON Frequency Hz Pr 351 Orientation speed Orientation ...

Page 701: ...l function selection to assign the function to a terminal Refer to page 5 361 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft Speed ratio must be 1 1 I002872E Fig 5 253 Machine end orientation connection example R L1 S L2 T L3 DY U V W U V W E C X0 X1 X14 X15 R PA3 PAR3 PB3 PBR3 PZ3 PZR3 PG PG SD SD A N B P H K STF STR SD SD X22 ORM ORA SE FR A8AX FR A8TP FR A8A...

Page 702: ...L refertotheInstruction Manual of the FR A8TP A separate power supply of 5 V 12 V 15 V is necessary according to the encoder power specifica tion When the encoder output is the differential line driver type only 5 V can be input If using the 24 V power supply of the FR A8TP 24 V power can be supplied from terminal PG24 Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output voltag...

Page 703: ... 394 and Pr 395 Pr 394 A C E Pr 395 B D F Exercise care so that the A C E and B D If either or both of them exceed that value make ap proximations A 15 C 43 E 60 B 10 D 28 F 55 Pr 394 15 43 60 38700 Pr 395 10 28 55 15400 Since Pr 394 setting exceeds 32767 at this time make approximations as follows 쑶 Fig 5 254 Gear ratio I002873E NOTE The pulley ratio is the ratio of vector driven motor side pulle...

Page 704: ...d for obtaining the same manipulated amount as proportional band P by only integral I action Arrival to the set point becomes quicker the shorter an integral time is set though hunting is more likely to occur 9999 Without integral control 131 A601 PID upper limit 9999 0 to 100 Sets the upper limit The FUP signal is output when the feedback value exceeds this setting The maximum input 20 mA 5 V 10 ...

Page 705: ...ion 1015 A607 Integral stop selection at limited frequency 0 0 Integral stopped at limited frequency integral cleared during output interruption 1 Integral continued at limited frequency integral cleared during output interruption 10 Integral stopped at limited frequency integral stopped during output interruption 11 Integral continued at limited frequency integral stopped during output interrupti...

Page 706: ... controller I001231E Fig 5 256 System configuration when Pr 128 20 or 21 set feedback value at the inverter Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description Kp 1 Td S 1 Ti S Set 0 to Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment When Pr 868 0 PID control is invalid Set point Deviation signal Kp Proportionality constant Ti Integral time S Operator Td Differential time Motor Manipulated variable Terminal 1 0...

Page 707: ...applies a manip ulated amount according to the speed of the deviation to improve excessive characteristics Fig 5 257 Operation example for stepped changes of measured value I002689E NOTE PI action is the result of P and I actions being added together Fig 5 258 Operation example for proportional changes of measured value I002687E NOTE PD action is the result of P and D actions being added together ...

Page 708: ...control that incorporates the respec tive strengths of these actions Fig 5 259 Operation example for proportional changes of measured value I002688E NOTE PID action is the result of all P I and D actions being added together Time Time Time Time Deviation Set point P action Measured value I action PID action D action ...

Page 709: ...reased andwhenthedeviationisaplusvalue themanipulatedamountisdecreased Relationship between deviation and manipulated amount output frequency I002690E Fig 5 260 Heating I002691E Fig 5 261 Cooling PID action setting Deviation Plus Minus Reverse action Forward action Tab 5 218 Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable X 0 X 0 Increase Heating Cold Hot Decrease Deviation Set point Meas...

Page 710: ... signal need not be input I002692E Fig 5 262 Connection diagram in sink logic MCCB 0 R L1 S L2 T L3 STF STR RT X14 SD 10 2 5 4 U V W FUP FU FDN OL SE M P PID SU RL IPF 1 COM OUT Sink logic Pr 128 20 Pr 183 14 Pr 191 47 Pr 192 16 Pr 193 14 Pr 194 15 Power supply Forward rotation Reverse rotation PID control selection Setting Potentiometer Set point setting Inverter Motor Pump 2 wire type 3 wire typ...

Page 711: ...lue input Deviation input 0 Invalid PID invalid 10 Reverse action Terminal 1 11 Forward action 20 Reverse action Terminal 2 or Pr 133 Terminal 4 21 Forward action 40 to 43 Valid Dancer control For details on dancer control refer to page 5 552 50 Invalid Reverse action CC Link communication 51 Forward action 60 Reverse action CC Link communication CC Link communication 61 Forward action 70 Reverse ...

Page 712: ...perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage from being entered as the deviation input signal Input of a minus volt age might damage devices and the inverter Input terminal Inspect specification Relationship with analog input Calibration parameter Set point Result Deviation Terminal 2 0 to 5 V 0 V 0 5 V 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 Pr 125 C2 to C4 0 to 10 V 0 V 0 10 V 100...

Page 713: ...upper limit FUP2 Second PID upper limit 201 301 FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr 132 PID lower limit Pr 1144 Second PID lower limit FDN2 Second PID lower limit 200 300 RL PID forward reverse rotation output 16 116 Hi is output when the output display of the parameter unit is forward rotation FWD and Low is output when the display is reverse rotation REV a...

Page 714: ... to output the signals FUP FDN Y48 only or to activate the protective function to output the inverter shutoff The stop action when the inverter output is shut off by the SLEEP function can be selected When each of Pr 131 Pr 132 and Pr 553 corresponding to each of the FUP FDN and Y48 signals is set to 9999 function not activated signal output and protective function are disabled I001234E Fig 5 263 ...

Page 715: ...ed the PID output suspension function is released and PID control operation is automatically restarted Whether to allow motor to coast to a stop or perform a deceleration stop when SLEEP operation is started can be selected using Pr 554 While the PID output suspension function is activated the PID output interruption signal SLEEP is output During this time the inverter running signal RUN turns OFF...

Page 716: ...ited to 100 during PID control The operation during output shutoff can be selected for the integral term using the PID output sus pension function SLEEP function I002694E Fig 5 265 Output interruption SLEEP function Pr 1015 setting Operation at limited frequency Operation during output interruption 0 initial value Integral stop Integral clear 1 Integral continuation Integral clear 10 Integral stop...

Page 717: ...easured value 0 1 0 to 100 93 Second PID measured value 67 PIDmeasured value 2 0 1 0 to 100 Displays PID measured value even if PID control operating conditions are not satisfied while the PID control is enabled 0 is displayed at all times when PID control is based in deviation input 95 Second PID measured value 2 54 PID deviation 0 1 Setting not available 100 to 100 900 to 1100 or 100 to 100 Usin...

Page 718: ...ightly shorter time When performing operation first set the proportional band Pr 129 toaslightlylargervalue theintegraltime Pr 130 toaslightlylonger time and the differential time Pr 134 to 9999 no function and while looking at the system operation decrease the proportional band Pr 129 and increase the integral time Pr 130 For slow response system where a deadband exists differential control Pr 13...

Page 719: ...xample 60 Hz to be output by the inverter when the deviation is 100 Using C4 Pr 903 set the voltage value at 100 쑶 Calibrating measured value input Apply the input for example 4 mA of measured value 0 across terminals 4 and 5 Perform calibration by C6 Pr 904 Apply the input for example 20 mA of measured value 100 across terminals 4 and 5 Perform calibration by C7 Pr 905 The figure below shows the ...

Page 720: ...ting is not applied to the frequency Pr 128 setting First PID setting Pr 753 setting Second PID setting Pr 155 setting RT signal PID setting applied to the output frequency 0 or not applied to the frequency 0 or not applied to the frequency Control other than PID control 0 or not applied to the frequency Applied to the frequency Second PID setting Applied to the frequency 0 or not applied to the f...

Page 721: ...7 Second output interruption detection time 576 Output interruption detection level 1148 Second output interruption detection level 577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 609 PID set point deviation input selection 1140 Second PID set point deviation input selection 610 PID measured value input selection 1141 Second PID measured value input selection Tab ...

Page 722: ... When PID control is selected the minimum frequency becomes the frequency of Pr 902 and the maximum frequency becomes the frequency of Pr 903 The Pr 1 Maximum frequency and Pr 2 Minimum frequency settings also are valid During PID operation the remote operation function is invalid When control is switched to PID control during normal operation the frequency during that oper ation is not carried ov...

Page 723: ...Pr 935 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 759 A600 Operation mode selection 0 0 to 43 Change the PID control related display unit that is displayed on the LCD operation panel FR LU08 or the parameter unit FR PU07 9999 Without display unit switching C42 A630 934 PID display bias coefficient 9999 0 to 500 Set the coefficient of the bias side minimum of measured value input 9999 Displaye...

Page 724: ...sitive value even though a positive negative deviation is given Pr 934 PID bias coefficient Pr 935 PID gain coefficient To perform a reverse action set Pr 128 PID action selection to forward action Alternatively to perform a forward action set Pr 128 to reverse action I002699E Fig 5 268 PID bias and gain NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage current input specification with Pr...

Page 725: ...hutoff release at deviation of 40 or higher set Pr 577 960 쑶 Pr Name Pr Name 131 PID upper limit 1143 Second PID upper limit 132 PID lower limit 1144 Second PID lower limit 133 PID action set point 755 Second PID action set point 553 PID deviation limit 1145 Second PID deviation limit 577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 761 Pre charge ending level 766 ...

Page 726: ... Inch 27 lbM Pound per Minute 5 MPa Mega Pascal 28 lbS Pound per Second 6 kPa Kilo Pascal 29 iWC Inch Water Column 7 Pa Pascal 30 iWG Inch Water Gauge 8 bar Bar 31 fWG Feet of Water Gauge 9 mbr Millibar 32 mWG Meter of Water Gauge 10 GPH Gallon per Hour 33 iHg Inches of Mercury 11 GPM Gallon per Minute 34 mHg Millimeters of Mercury 12 GPS Gallon per Second 35 kgH Kilograms per Hour 13 L H Liter pe...

Page 727: ... Output terminal function selection to assign the function Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 760 A616 Pre charge fault selection 0 0 Fault indication with output shutoff immediately after pre charge fault occurs 1 Fault indication with deceleration stop after pre charge fault occurs 761 A617 Pre charge ending level 9999 0 to 100 Set the measured amount to end the pre charge operation...

Page 728: ...Not assigned Result Time Assigned Result Time X77 Tab 5 233 Settings of the pre charge function NOTES During the pre charge operation it is regarded as integrated value estimated value The motor speed may drop shortly from the automatic switchover frequency depending on the parameter settings Parameter changes and switchover to the second PID control are applied immediately If PID con trol has not...

Page 729: ...D control is performed When the signal is input to end the pre charge operation When the X77 signal turns ON the pre charge operation ends and the PID control starts If a start command is given while the X77 signal is ON the pre charge operation is not performed and PID control starts I002702E Fig 5 269 Pre charge ending level Pr 761 9999 I002703E Fig 5 270 Pre charge ending time Pr 762 9999 I0027...

Page 730: ...nction is released set the X77 signal to OFF after checking that the during pre charge oper ation signal Y49 is OFF When the PID output suspension SLEEP function is in use and PID control is to be performed immediately after this function is released leave the X77 signal ON until PID control ends When the pre charge operation is valid the pre charge operation is performed at the output shut off ca...

Page 731: ... Pre charge upper detection level 768 Second pre charge upper detection level 764 Pre charge time limit 769 Second pre charge time limit Tab 5 234 Parameters for setting multiple PID pre charge functions Classification First pre charge function parameters Second pre charge function parameters Signal Name Signal Name Input signal X77 Pre charge end command X78 Second pre charge end command Output s...

Page 732: ...slight changes in the measured value As a result response improves as the proportional band becomes narrower though stability worsens as shown by the occurrence of hunting Gain Kp 1 proportional band 9999 Without proportional band 130 A614 PID integral time 1s 0 1 to 3600 s With deviation step input this is the time Ti used for obtaining the same manipulated amount as proportional band P by only i...

Page 733: ...nput measured value from terminal 2 3 Input measured value from terminal 4 4 Input measured value via CC Link communication 5 Input measured value by PLC function 1134 A605 PID upper limit manipulated value 100 0 to 100 Set the upper limit of PID action 1135 A606 PID lower limit manipulated value 100 0 to 100 Set the lower limit of PID action I002706E Fig 5 274 Dancer control block diagram Pr Name...

Page 734: ...cer control NOTES Normally set Pr 7 Acceleration time and Pr 8 Deceleration time to 0 s When the Pr 7 and Pr 8 settings are large dancer control response becomes slow during acceleration deceleration The Pr 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency setting is enabled The larger setting value between Pr 7 and Pr 44 is used as the acceleration time during normal operation For the deceleration t...

Page 735: ...E Fig 5 276 Example in sink logic Pr 128 setting PID action Additive method Set point input Measured value input 0 PID invalid 40 Reverse action Fixed Set by Pr 133 or Input by terminal selected by Pr 609 Input by terminal selected by Pr 610 41 Forward action 42 Reverse action Ratio 43 Forward action Others Refer to page 5 524 Tab 5 236 PID control in dependence of parameter 128 MCCB R L1 S L2 T L...

Page 736: ...s of terminals 2 and 4 by Pr 73 Analog input selection or Pr 267 Terminal 4 input selection to match the specification of the input device When Pr 133 PID action set point 9999 Pr 133 is the set point When the set point is set at Pr 133 the setting frequency of Pr 902 is equivalent to 0 and the setting frequency of Pr 903 is equivalent to 100 When the same input method has been selected for the se...

Page 737: ...rminal 2 0 to 5 V 0 V 0 5 V 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 Pr 125 C2 to C4 0 to 10 V 0 V 0 10 V 100 0 V 0 10 V 100 0 to 20 mA 0 mA 0 20 mA 100 0 mA 0 20 mA 100 Terminal 1 0 to 5 V 5 V to 0 V 0 5 V 100 5 V to 0 V 0 5 V 100 When Pr 128 10 Pr 125 C2 to C4 When Pr 128 1000 C12 to C15 0 to 10V 10 V to 0 V 0 10 V 100 10 V to 0 V 0 10 V 100 Terminal 4 0 to 5 V 0 V to 1 V 0 5 V 100 0 V to 1 V 0 5 V 100 Pr 126 C5 to C7...

Page 738: ...sulting from frequency conversion of Pr 1134 to the main speed The lower limit of the manipulated amount is the frequency obtained by subtracting the value resulting from frequency conversion of Pr 1135 from the main speed I002710E Fig 5 278 Upper and lower limits of the PID manipulated amount Output frequency Upper limit of PID manipulated amount Main speed Lower limit of PID manipulated amount O...

Page 739: ... reset by turning ON this signal Tab 5 239 Input signals and parameter setting Signal Function Pr 190 to Pr 196 setting Description Positive logic Negative logic FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr 131 PID upper limit Pr 1143 Second PID upper limit FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr 132 PID lower limit Pr 1144 Second ...

Page 740: ...ecified as the measured value input or set point input the main speed is treated as 0 Polarity reversible operation of the main speed is not possible Adjustment procedure for dancer roll position detection signal When the input of terminal 4 is voltage input 0 V and 5 V 10 V are the lower limit position and upper limit position respectively When it is current input 4 mA and 20 mA are the lower lim...

Page 741: ... Pr 10 but the smaller value between Pr 13 and 0 5 Hz The set frequency monitor is the value main speed command PID control which is con stantly changing With the main speed setting frequency setting acceleration deceleration is performed for the acceleration deceleration time set at Pr 44 and Pr 45 and with the output frequency setting acceleration deceleration is performed for the acceleration d...

Page 742: ...o frequency search 12 Encoder detection frequency search at every start 13 Frequency search at every start reduced impact restart 299 A701 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 0 0 Without rotation direction 1 With rotation direction 9999 When Pr 78 0 with rotation direction When Pr 78 1 2 without rotation direction 57 A702 Restart coasting time 9999 0 Coasting time differs accordin...

Page 743: ... UVT are not activated Connection CS signal Restart is enabled at turn ON of the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start CS signal The inverter operation is disabled at turn OFF of the CS signal while Pr 57 Restart coasting time 9999 with restart NOTES To operate the inverter with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function ena bled check the following...

Page 744: ...minal MRS in the initial setting For the X10 signal of separated converter types NC contact input specification is selected in the initial setting Set Pr 599 0 to change the input specification to NO contact Fig 5 282 Connecting the signals X10 X11 CS I002850E NOTES The CS signal is assigned to terminal CS in the initial setting By setting 6 to any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selec...

Page 745: ... 162 offline auto tuning is required For details on offline auto tuning of Advanced magnetic flux vector control and Real sensorless vector control refer to page 5 67 and for details on offline auto tuning of V F control refer to page 5 575 Pr 162 setting Restart operation V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control Vector control PM sensorless vector control W...

Page 746: ...d is set to Pr 78 operation decelerates by reverse rotation and then changes to forward rotation when the start command is forward rotation The inverter does not restart when the start command is reverse rotation When 3 13 is set to Pr 162 limit the wiring length to within 100 m V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Instantaneous power failure time Power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 Motor spe...

Page 747: ...utput frequency that was active before the instantaneous power failure stored in memory If the instantaneous power failure time is 0 2 s or more the output fre quency can no longer be stored and held in memory so the restart is performed from Pr 13 Start ing frequency During Real sensorless vector control Pr 162 is set to 3 or 13 reduced impact restart I002715E Fig 5 285 Restart operation with enc...

Page 748: ...able below according to the Pr 30 setting NOTES If 2 12 are set to Pr 162 when encoder feedback control is invalid the automatic restart is with a frequency search Pr 162 0 10 In vector control encoder detection frequency search is used regardless of the Pr 162 setting The Pr 58 and Pr 299 settings are invalid at this time For the encoder feedback control refer to page 5 692 Pr 30 setting Operatio...

Page 749: ...ut frequency before instantaneous power failure when Pr 162 1 or 11 Normally the motor runs at the initial value as it is However adjust to suit the moment of inertia J of the load or the size of the torque Pr 58 is invalid under Real sensorless vector control or vector control Pr 570 setting Pr 162 setting 200 V class FR A820 첸 00046 0 4K 00077 0 75K 00105 1 5K 00167 2 2K 00250 3 7K 00340 5 5K 00...

Page 750: ...U and FU signals are not output during the restart These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is invalid when the load torque high speed frequency control Pr 270 2 3 13 is set E CAUTION Provide ...

Page 751: ...minal When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected motor driving is resumed at the power restoration after an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage E IPF and E UVT are not activated Connection CS signal Restart is enabled at turn ON of the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start CS signal The inverter operation is disabled at turn...

Page 752: ...rminal solely setting Pr 57 will enable the restart operation at all times If the restart operation is selected instantaneous power failure protection E IPF is disabled while the fault output signal is output at an instantaneous power failure The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes Restart operation is also performed af...

Page 753: ...e function Pr 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 1 to make startups stable If the overvoltage protective function E OV첸 still occurs with the regeneration avoidance function also use the retry function Pr 67 During PM sensorless vector control the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure func tion operates only when an MM CF IPM motor is connected When a built in brake or a ...

Page 754: ...ncy search 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA MM CF and so on 560 A712 Second frequency search gain 9999 0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search of the second motor 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA MM CF and so on 96 C110 Auto tuning setting sta...

Page 755: ... may run slightly without actually turning during offline auto tuning Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 11 so either firmly secure the motor by the mechanical brake or check to see if turning the motor will cause any safety problems Attention is required for lifts in particular The motor turning slightly will not affect tuning performance Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surg...

Page 756: ...g the start signal STF signal or STR signal OFF also ends tuning During offline auto tuning only the following I O signals are valid initial value Input terminals valid signals STP STOP OH MRS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tuning...

Page 757: ...ollowing parameters Status Operation panel FR DU08 display LCD operation panel FR LU08 display Setting Tuning in progress Normal end Tab 5 247 Display during tuning monitor display Parameter Name 90 Motor constant R1 298 Frequency search gain 96 Auto tuning setting status Tab 5 248 Set parameters NOTE The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their d...

Page 758: ...verter protective function operation Make the setting again 91 The current limit stall prevention function is activated Set the acceleration deceleration time longer Set Pr 156 Stall prevention operation selection 1 92 The converter output voltage fell to 75 of the rated value Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the motor wiring and ...

Page 759: ...The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal E CAUTION Note that the motor may start...

Page 760: ...ation from output frequency 9999 The motor decelerates from the output frequency Pr 262 264 A733 Power failure deceleration time 1 5 s 0 to 3600 s Set the slope applicable from the deceleration start to the Pr 266 set frequency 265 A734 Power failure deceleration time 2 9999 0 to 3600 s Set the slope applicable for the frequency range starting at Pr 266 and downward 9999 Same as Pr 264 266 A735 Po...

Page 761: ...61 of the converter unit in accordance with the inverter setting Refer to the Instruction Manual of the converter unit Outline of operation of deceleration stop at a power failure If an undervoltage or power failure occurs the output frequency is turned OFF only for the frequency set to Pr 262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start The motor decelerates for the time set to Pr 264 Power failure...

Page 762: ...e of power failure Deceleration stop time Undervoltage avoidance function 0 Coasts to stop Coasts to stop 1 Deceleration stop Deceleration stop According to Pr 262 to Pr 266 setting Not used 2 Re acceleration Not used 11 Deceleration stop With 12 Re acceleration With 21 Deceleration stop Automatic adjustment of deceleration time Not used 22 Re acceleration Not used Tab 5 252 Setting of Pr 261 Outp...

Page 763: ...celeration stop function is set enabled Pr 261 1 11 or 21 the power failure time deceleration stop function is disabled When the power failure time deceleration stop function is enabled Pr 261 1 11 21 the inverter will not start even if the power is turned ON or inverter reset is performed with the start signal STR STF ON Turn OFF the start signal once and then ON again to make a start Power suppl...

Page 764: ...currence of power failure Adjust the downward frequency slope and the response level using Pr 294 UV avoidance voltage gain Setting a large value improves the response to the bus voltage I002720E Fig 5 293 Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure NOTE The undervoltage avoidance function is invalid under torque control by Real sensorless vector control When 11 12 is set to Pr 261 opera...

Page 765: ...al of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which X48 signal of the inverter is assigned In the initial setting X48 signal is used with the normally closed NC contact input specification Use Pr 606 Power failure stop external signal input selection to change the specification to the normally open NO contact input To use the X48 signal set 48 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal f...

Page 766: ...leration stop function is selected undervoltage protection E UVT instantaneous power failure protection E IPF and input phase loss protection E ILF are not invalid When the load is high during PM sensorless vector control an undervoltage sometimes causes the inverter to coast to a stop To use the power failure time deceleration to stop function for the separated converter type use a converter unit...

Page 767: ...0001 When the pulse train is input from terminal JOG the number of sampled pulses can be converted The result of conversion is stored to SD1236 Number of sampled pulses input pulse value per count cycle pre scale setting value Pr 417 unit scale factor Pr 416 417 A803 Pre scale setting value 1 0 to 32767 Pre scale setting value 498 A804 PLC function flash memory clear 0 0 9696 0 to 9999 0 Clears th...

Page 768: ...ction selection to assign the function to a terminal When 1 is set in Pr 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting the inverter can be operated only when the sequence program is running By changing the PLC program status from RUN to STOP during inverter operation the motor decelerates to stop To stop the inverter operation at the STOP status of the PLC program while performing auto operation using ...

Page 769: ...age 2 58 for an outline of the USB communication function I002722E Fig 5 295 Copying the PLC function project data to USB memory Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Faults history mode USB memory mode Project data file number displays 1 to 99 unrelated to the number of files saved in the USB memory device Overwrite the inverter project data file onto the designated file in the USB me...

Page 770: ...ted Supported DAT Project management information Supported Not available TXT Copy information Supported Not available Tab 5 253 Data that can be copied NOTE If the project data of the PLC function is locked with a password using FR Configurator2 copying to the USB memory device and verification are disabled Also if set to write disabled writing to the inverter is disabled For the details of the PL...

Page 771: ...nalog or digital trigger OR logic 4 Both analog and digital trigger AND logic 1026 A906 Number of sampling before trigger 90 0 to 100 Set the percentage of the pre trigger sampling time with respect to the overall sampling time 1027 A910 Analog source selection 1ch 201 1 to 3 5 to 14 17 to 20 22 to 24 32 to 36 40 to 42 46 52 to 54 61 62 64 67 71to74 87 to 98 201 to 213 222 to 227 230 to 232 235 to...

Page 772: ...l source selection 4ch 4 1042 A934 Digital source selection 5ch 5 1043 A935 Digital source selection 6ch 6 1044 A936 Digital source selection 7ch 7 1045 A937 Digital source selection 8ch 8 1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the digital channel to be the trigger 1047 A939 Digital trigger operation selection 0 0 Trace starts when the signal turns ON 1 Trace starts when the signal turn...

Page 773: ...M on the inverter If automatic transfer is set the trace data in internal RAM is transferred to USB memory device when the trigger is being generated Data can be transferred to a USB memory device as long as data is held in internal RAM Trace data in internal RAM is cleared when the power supply is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset 1 Memory mode automatic transfer 2 Recorder mode In this mo...

Page 774: ...18 Motor excitation current 202 U Phase Output Current ND rated current 19 Position pulse 65535 203 V Phase Output Current ND rated current 20 Cumulative energization time 65535 204 W Phase Output Current ND rated current 22 Orientation status 65535 205 Converter Output Voltage 23 Actual operation time 65535 206 Output Current all three phases ND rated current 24 Motor load factor 207 Excitation C...

Page 775: ...ated motor frequency 120 number of motor poles 64 PTC thermistor resistance Pr 561 232 Speed Command 67 PID measured value 2 235 Torque Command 100 71 Cumulative pulse 236 Motor Torque 100 72 Cumulative pulse overflow times 237 Excitation Current Command 100 73 Cumulative pulse control terminal option 238 Torque Current Command 100 Setting value Monitored item Minus sign display Triggerlevel crite...

Page 776: ...3 DO2 10 STP STOP 124 DO3 11 RES 125 DO4 12 CS 126 DO5 21 X0 For the details of the signals refer to the Instruction Manual of FR A8AX option 127 DO6 22 X1 128 RA1 For the details of the signals refer to the Instruction Manual of FR A8AR option 23 X2 129 RA2 24 X3 130 RA3 25 X4 26 X5 27 X6 28 X7 29 X8 30 X9 31 X10 32 X11 33 X12 34 X13 35 X14 36 X15 37 DY Tab 5 257 Digital source monitored item sel...

Page 777: ... be transferred during sampling To automatically start sampling when the power supply is turned ON or at a recovery after an inverter reset set 1 to Pr 1024 Sampling auto start Pr 1036 setting Trigger generation conditions Trigger level setting 0 Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger exceeds the value specified at the trigger level Set the trigger level by Pr 1037 400 to 40...

Page 778: ...ingONandOFF respectively To input the TRG signal set 46 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection and to input the TRC signal set 47 to assign the function to a terminal I002724E Fig 5 297 Selection of the trace mode settings NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirmi...

Page 779: ...g the trace status Monitor value Trace status 1000s place 100s place 10s place 1s place 0 or no display No trace data in internal RAM USB memory not accessed Trigger not detected Trace stopped 1 Trace data in internal RAM USB memory being accessed Trigger detected Trace operation 2 USB memory transfer error 3 USB buffer overrun Tab 5 262 Trace status LED status Operating status OFF No USB connecti...

Page 780: ...er link communication PU connector P N020 to P N028 Pr 117 to Pr 124 5 610 To operate via communication from RS 485 terminals Initial setting of computer link communication RS 485 terminals P N030 to P N038 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 341 MODBUS RTU communication specification P N002 P N030 P N031 P N034 P N080 Pr 539 Pr 331 Pr 332 Pr 334 Pr 343 5 630 To Communicate using USB FR Configurator2 USB communic...

Page 781: ...nces in electrical specifications I002727E Fig 5 300 Connecting to the PU connector I002764E Fig 5 301 Connection to an inverter FR DU08 Operation panel connector FR ADP option PU connector Inverter RJ 45 connector Communication cable RS 485 interface terminals RJ 45 connector Computer Station 0 Inverter PU connector RS 232C cable Maximum 15 m RS 232C connector Computer Station 0 Inverter PU conne...

Page 782: ...anufacturer Refer to the following table when fabricating the cable on the user side Commercially available products as of November 2013 Do not use pins No 2 and 8 of the communication cable I002384E Fig 5 302 RS 485 terminals layout Model Manufacturer Interface embedded cable DAFXIH CAB D SUB25P for personal computer side DAFXIH CABV D SUB9P for personal computer side Connector conversion cable D...

Page 783: ...r branch P5S VCC 5 V Permissible load current 100 mA SG GND Earthing grounding connected to terminal SD Tab 5 265 RS 485 terminal description NOTES To avoid malfunction keep the RS 485 terminal wires away from the control circuit board When the FR A820 01250 22K or lower or the FR A840 00620 22K or lower is used with a plug in option lead the wires through the hole on the side face of the front co...

Page 784: ...face terminals Twisted pair cable Converter Twisted pair cable Set the terminating resistor switch to the 100 position RS 485 terminals RS 485 interface terminals RS 232C cable Computer Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Station 0 Station 1 Station n Inverter Inverter Inverter RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals Inverter Inverter...

Page 785: ...ection to several inverter NOTE For branching connect the wires as shown below I002733E Fig 5 307 2 wire type connection NOTE A program should be created so that transmission is disabled receiving state when the computer is not sending and reception is disabled sending state during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA SG RSB CSA CSB FG SG SG SG SG SG 2 ...

Page 786: ...e shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting unchanged from 0 initial value EEPROM write Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 549 N000 Protocol selection 0 0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol computer link 1 MODBUS RTU protocol 342 N001 Communication EEPROM write selection 0 0 Parameter values written by communication are written to the EEPROM and RAM 1 Parameter val...

Page 787: ... When the communication error is removed during deceleration the motor re accelerates Under position control the motor does not re accelerates even when the communication error is removed during deceleration NOTES Turning OFF the inverter s power supply clears the modified parameter settings when Pr 342 1 write only to RAM Therefore the parameter values at next power ON are the values last stored ...

Page 788: ...ime Decelerates to stop Motor coasting Motor coasting Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault removal Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault recognition Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Communication fault Pr 502 setting 2 Pr 502 setting 3 Communication fault Communication fault Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Display Display Faultdisplay Fault output ALM A...

Page 789: ...s are valid under the Network operation mode When performing communica tion with RS 485 terminals set Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection to 2 ini tial value Pr 502 is valid for the device that has the command source under the Network operation mode If a communication option is installed while Pr 550 9999 initial value a communication error in RS 485 terminals occurs and Pr 502 becom...

Page 790: ...r example if 192 is set the communication speed is 19200 bps N022 PU communication data length 0 0 Data length 8 bits 1 Data length 7 bits N023 PU communication stop bit length 1 0 Stop bit length 1 bit 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 119 PU communication stop bit length data length 1 0 Stop bit length 1 bit Data length 8 bits 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 10 Stop bit length 1 bit Data length 7 bits 11 Stop b...

Page 791: ...ication retry count 1 0 to 10 9999 Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception Same specifications as Pr 121 336 N036 RS 485 communication check time interval 0 s 0 RS 485 communication is available but the inverter trips in the NET operation mode 0 1 to 999 8 s Set the interval of the communication check signal loss detection time Same specifications as Pr 122 9999 No co...

Page 792: ...perly Item Description Related Parameter Communication protocol Mitsubishi protocol computer link Pr 551 Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 Connectable units 1 N maximum 32 units setting is 0 to 31 stations Pr 117 Pr 331 Communication Speed PU connector Selected among 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Pr 118 RS 485 terminals Selected among 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 38400 57600 76800 115200 b...

Page 793: ... from the inverter to the inverter reset request can be selected Refer to page 5 623 At mode error and data range error C1 data contains an error code Refer to page 5 629 Except for those errors the error is returned with data format D Symbol Operation Operation command Operation frequency Multi command Parameter write Inverter reset Monitor Parameter read Communication request is sent to the inve...

Page 794: ...iage return and LF line feed are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers In this case settingmustbealsomadeontheinverteraccordingtothecomputer WhethertheCRandLFcodes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr 124 and Pr 341 CR LF selection Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A ENQ Inverter station No Instruction code Data Sum c...

Page 795: ... CR carriage return and LF line feed are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers In this case settingmustbealsomadeontheinverteraccordingtothecomputer WhethertheCRandLFcodes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr 124 or Pr 341 CR LF selection Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B ENQ Inverter stationNo Instruction code Sum check Format Number of charact...

Page 796: ... transmission of reply data Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer in the range of 0 to 150 ms in 10 ms increments For example 1 10 ms 2 20 ms Signal name ASCII Code Description STX H02 Start Of Text Start of data ETX H03 End Of Text End of data ENQ H05 Inquiry Communication request ACK H06 Acknowledge No data error detected LF H0A Line Feed CR H0D Carriage Retur...

Page 797: ...ers from the initial setting H5 Overrun error New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data H6 H7 Character error The character received is invalid other than 0 to 9 A to F control code Does not accept the received data but the inverter does not trip H8 H9 HA Mode error Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode ...

Page 798: ...on specifications NOTES In addition to the above 1 start bit is necessary Minimum number of total bits 9 bits maximum number of total bits 12 bits Item Check time Various monitors operation command Frequency setting RAM 12 ms Parameter read write Frequency setting EEPROM 30 ms Parameter clear all clear 5 s Reset command No answer Tab 5 273 Data check time Error Code Error Item Error Description In...

Page 799: ... signal To use the LF signal set 98 positive logic or 198 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to an output terminal I002738E Fig 5 313 Data transmission error NOTE For the RS 485 terminal communication the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr 502 Stop mode selection at communication error setting Refer to pa...

Page 800: ... the communication check time interval The inverter makes a communication check clearing of communication check counter regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master Communication check is started at the first communication in the operation mode having the operation source PU operation mode for PU connector communication in the initial setting or Network operation mode ...

Page 801: ...f changed communication information if bRet TRUE Set COM1 port timeout GetCommTimeouts hCom hTim Get current timeout values hTim WriteTotalTimeoutConstant 1000 Write timeout 1 second hTim ReadTotalTimeoutConstant 1000 Read timeout 1 second hTim ReadTotalTimeoutConstantSetCommTimeouts hCom hTim Setting of changed timeout values Setting of command for switching the station number 1 inverter to the N...

Page 802: ... signal cable breakage etc the inverter cannot be stopped When the communication check time interval has elapsed the inverter will trip E PUE E SER The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching ON the RES signals or by switching the power OFF If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage computer fault etc the inverter does not detect such a fault This should be fully noted Port ope...

Page 803: ... lower Increment 0 1 A FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher 4 digits B E D Output voltage Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF Output voltage hexadecimal in 0 1 V increments 4 digits B E D Special monitor Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3 4 digits B E D Special monitor selection No Read H73 Monitor selection data Refer to page 5 327 for details on sele...

Page 804: ...ation parameters or not can be selected according to the data 앫 Parameter clear H9696 Communication parameters are cleared H5A5A Communication parameters are not cleared 앫 All parameter clear H9966 Communication parameters are cleared H55AA Communication parameters are not cleared For the details of whether or not to clear parameters refer to page A 5 When a clear is performed with H9696 or H9966 ...

Page 805: ...ad in increments of 0 1kW and rounds down to 0 01kW increments H20 blank code is set for blank area Example 0 75K 7 H20 H20 H20 H20 H20 H37 6 digits B E2 D NOTES Set 65520 HFFF0 as a parameter value 8888 and 65535 HFFFF as 9999 For the instruction codes HFF HEC and HF3 their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all clear is performed When a 32 bit parameter se...

Page 806: ... signal 1F 9F 9 C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1 C11 931 Current output gain current 1F 9F 9 126 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1 C38 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque 20 A0 9 C7 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1 C39 932 Terminal 4 bias torque 20 A0 9 C12 917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed 11 91 9 C40 933 Terminal 4 gain command torque 21 A1 9 C...

Page 807: ...mple Operation command HFA 8 bits b0 AU Terminal 4 input selection b1 Forward rotation command b2 Reverse rotation command b3 RL Low speed operation command b4 RM Middle speed operation command b5 RH High speed operation command b6 RT Second function selection b7 MRS Output stop Operation command extended HF9 16 bits b0 AU Terminal 4 input selection b1 Forward rotation command b2 Reverse rotation ...

Page 808: ...oad warning b5 IPF Instantaneous power failure undervoltage b6 FU Output frequency detection b7 ABC1 Fault Inverter status monitor extended H79 16 bits b0 RUN Inverter running b1 During forward rotation b2 During reverse rotation b3 SU Up to frequency b4 OL Overload warning b5 IPF iInstantaneous power failure undervoltage b6 FU Output frequency detection b7 ABC1 Fault b8 ABC2 b9 Safety monitor out...

Page 809: ...acters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A2 ENQ Inverterstation No Instruction Code HF0 Wait ing time Send datatype Receive datatype Data1 Data2 Sum check CR LF Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 C1 STX Inverterstation No Send datatype Receive datatype Error code1 Error code2 Data1 Data2 ETX Sum check CR LF Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks 0 Op...

Page 810: ...bit length 1 bit 343 N080 Communication error count 0 Displays the communication error count during MODBUS RTU communication Read only 539 N002 MODBUS RTU communication check time interval 9999 0 MODBUS RTU communication but the inverter trips in the NET operation mode 0 1 to 999 8 s Set the interval of the communication check signal loss detection time same specifications as Pr 122 9999 No commun...

Page 811: ...ommunication Speed Selected among 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 115200 bps Pr 332 Control procedure Asynchronous system Communication method Half duplex system Communica tion specifica tions Character system Binary fixed at 8 bits Start bit 1 bit Stop bit length Select from the following three types No parity check stop bit length 2 bits Odd parity check stop bit length 1 bit...

Page 812: ...themasterexecutetherequestedfunction Withthistypeofcommunication slaves do not return a response to the master Message frame protocol Communication method Basically the master sends a Query message question and slaves return the Response message response At normal communication the Device Address and Function Code are copied as they are and at erroneous communication illegal function code or data ...

Page 813: ...ve as the request and the slave performs the requested operation Function code list summarizes the supported function codes An error response is generated when a function code other than Function code list is set At a response from the slave the function code set by the master is returned in the case of a normal response At an error response H80 the function code is returned DATA field The format ...

Page 814: ...8 Functions are diagnosed communication check only A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return message subfunction code H00 function Subfunction code H00 Return Query Data Not available 5 637 Preset Multiple Registers Read H10 Data is written to consecutive multiple holding registers Data can be written to consecutive m...

Page 815: ...02 is read No of Points Set the number of holding registers to read Data can be read from up to 125 registers Tab 5 283 Description of the query message Message Description Byte Count The setting range is H02 to HFA 2 to 250 Twice the number of reads specified by is set Data The amount of data specified by is set Read data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes and is arranged as follows da...

Page 816: ...s Message Description Slave Address Set the address to send messages to Setting 0 enables broadcast communication Function Set H06 Register Address Set the address from data is written to the holding register Register address holding register address decimal 40001 For example when register address 0001 is set data is written to holding register address 40002 Preset Data Set the data to write to th...

Page 817: ...function Data CRC Check 8 bits H08 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Slave Address Function Subfunction Data CRC Check 8 bits H08 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Message Description Slave Address Set the address to send messages to Broadcast communication is not possible Invalid when 0 is set Function Set H08 Subfunction Set H0000 Dat...

Page 818: ...the holding register Start address start register address decimal 40001 For example when start register address 0001 is set the data of holding register address 40002 is read No of Points Set the number of holding registers to write to Data can be written to up to 125 registers Byte Count The setting range is H02 to HFA 2 to 250 Set twice the value specified by d Data Set the amount of data specif...

Page 819: ...n is not possible Invalid when 0 is set Function Set H46 Tab 5 288 Description of the query message Message Description Starting Address The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is returned Start address start register address decimal 40001 For example when start address 0001 is returned the holding register address that was successfully accessed is 40002 No of Poin...

Page 820: ...response is also returned in the case of broadcast communication Slave Address Function Exception Code CRC Check 8 bits H80 Function 8 bits 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Message Description Slave Address Set the address received from the master Function The function code requested by the master H80 is set Exception Code The codes in the following table are set Tab 5 290 Description of response data Cod...

Page 821: ...frame error The data length of the message frame is checked and an error is generated if the received data length is less than 4 bytes CRC check error An error is generated if the data in the message frame does not match the calculation result Tab 5 292 Error check items NOTE The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection Changing...

Page 822: ...al time monitor Refer to page 5 327 for the register numbers and monitored items of the real time monitor Bit Definition Control input command Inverter status 0 Stop command RUN Inverter running 1 Forward rotation command During forward rotation 2 Reverse rotation command During reverse rotation 3 RH High speed operation command SU Up to frequency 4 RM Middle speed operation command OL Overload wa...

Page 823: ...requency setting gain analog value Read Write Analog value set to C7 905 43905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C12 917 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed Read Write C13 917 42107 Terminal 1 bias speed Read Write Analog value set to C13 917 43917 Terminal 1 bias speed terminal analog value Read Analog value of vol...

Page 824: ... 931 41931 Current output gain signal Read Write C11 931 42121 Current output gain current Read Write Analog value set to C11 931 C38 932 41932 Terminal 4 bias command torque Read Write C39 932 42122 Terminal 4 bias torque Read Write Analog value set to C39 932 43932 Terminal 4 bias torque terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C40 933 41933 Terminal 4 gai...

Page 825: ...ers Read 44003 Model Fifth and sixth characters Read 44004 Model Seventh and eighth characters Read 44005 Model Ninth and tenth characters Read 44006 Model Eleventh and twelfth characters Read 44007 Model Thirteenth and fourteenth characters Read 44008 Model Fifteenth and sixteenth characters Read 44009 Model Seventeenth and eighteenth characters Read 44010 Model Nineteenth and twentieth character...

Page 826: ...er within the communication check time interval The inverter makes a communication check clearing of communication check counter regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master The communication check is made from the first communication in the Network operation mode can be changed by Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection The communication check time by query ...

Page 827: ...mple RS 485 terminal communication Pr 539 0 1 to 999 8s Query communication Broadcast communication Operation mode External PLC master Inverter slave Inverter slave PLC master Pr 539 Communication check counter Response Message 1 Response Message 2 Query Message 2 Query Message 1 Data absence time 3 5 bytes or more Check start OFF ON Time Fault E SER Pr 539 PLC master Inverter slave Inverter slave...

Page 828: ...er specification 548 N041 USB communication check time interval 9999 0 USB communication is possible however the inverter will trip E USB when the mode changes to the PU operation mode 0 1 to 999 8 s Set the communication check time interval If a no communication state persists for longer than the permissible time the inverter will trip E USB 9999 No communication check Specification Description I...

Page 829: ... parameter setting When Pr 549 Protocol selection 1 MODBUS RTU protocol the setting range is as shown in the parentheses When the set value is outside of the setting range the initial value is applied Automatic connection system configuration Parameters referred to Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 274 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 117 N020 PU communication...

Page 830: ...ge parameter Setting value after change PU connector connection RS 485 terminal connection Communication speed Pr 118 Pr 332 Depending on the setting of the connected device on the GOT side Data length stop bit Pr 119 Pr 333 Parity Pr 120 Pr 334 Waiting time setting Pr 123 Pr 337 CR LF selection Pr 124 Pr 341 Number of communication retries Pr 121 Pr 335 9999 fixed Communication check time interva...

Page 831: ...2 Pr 660 to Pr 662 5 689 To select the control method Control method selection P G200 P G300 Pr 800 Pr 451 5 56 To secure the low speed torque by compensating the slip of the motor Slip compensation P G203 to P G205 Pr 245 to Pr 247 5 691 To select the torque characteristic Constant output range torque characteristic selection P G210 Pr 803 5 84 5 132 To adjust the speed control gain Speed control...

Page 832: ... 55K Initial value for the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher Starting torque adjustment Assuming Pr 19 Base frequency voltage is 100 set the output voltage at 0 Hz to Pr 0 Pr 46 Pr 112 in percentage Perform the adjustment of the parameter little by little approximately 0 5 and confirm the status of the motor each time The motor may overheat when the value is set too high ...

Page 833: ... 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Set a larger value when the distance between the inverter and the motor is long or when there is not enough motor torque in the low speed range It may cause overcurrent trip when it is set too large Setting for Pr 0 Pr 46 and Pr 112 becomes enabled only when the V F control is selected When the initial val...

Page 834: ... enabled when the RT signal turns ON and Pr 113 when the X9 signal turns ON To input the X9 signal set 9 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function to a terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description FM CA 3 G001 Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at the rated motor torque 50 Hz 60 Hz 19 G002 Base frequency voltage 9999 8888 ...

Page 835: ... 30kW or lower 160 V 33 33 Hz SF V5RU1 37kW 170 V SF V5RU3 22kW or lower 160 V SF V5RU3 30kW 170 V SF V5RU4 3 7kW and 7 5kW 150 V 16 67 Hz SF V5RU4 and motors other than described above 160 V SF VR 160 V 50 Hz SF VRH 320 V Tab 5 302 Setting of base frequency voltage NOTES When the operation becomes not possible due to failure in encoder etc at the time of vector control set Pr 80 Motor capacity or...

Page 836: ...d motor frequency page 5 67 Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 422 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 14 G003 Load pattern selection 0 0 For constant torque load 1 For variable torque load 2 For constant torque lift boost at reverse rotation 0 3 For constant torque lift boost at forward rotation 0 4 RT signal ON for constant torque load RT signal OFF for constan...

Page 837: ... driving mode during reverse rotation and in the regenerativeload modeduring forward rotationaccordingto the loadweight e g counterweight system Fig 5 325 Variable torque load I002751E I001547E Fig 5 326 Characteristic with manual torque boost NOTE When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr 19 Base frequency voltage to prevent trip ...

Page 838: ...e 2 5 ON For constant torque load same as setting value 0 OFF For lift boost at forward rotation 0 same as setting value 3 Tab 5 303 Load selection by terminal NOTES The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 ...

Page 839: ...nitial value Setting range Description 60 G030 Energy saving control selection 0 0 Normal operation 4 Energy saving operation 9 Optimum excitation control NOTES An energy saving effect is not expected with the energy saving operation mode for applications with high load torque or with the equipment with frequent acceleration and deceleration An energy saving effect is not expected with the Optimum...

Page 840: ... Setting range Description 71 C100 Applied motor 0 2 Standard motor such as SF JR Adjustable 5 points V F Others Refer to page 5 434 100 G040 V F1 first frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 Set each point of the V F pattern frequency voltage 9999 Do not set V F 101 G041 V F1 first frequency voltage 0 V 0 to 1000 V 102 G042 V F2 second frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 103 G043 V F2 second frequency volta...

Page 841: ...equency voltage within the range of Pr 3 Base frequency and Pr 19 Base frequency voltage When Pr 71 2 Pr 47 Second V F base frequency and Pr 113 Third V F base frequency will not function When Pr 71 2 electronic thermal O L relay will make calculations assuming a standard motor By simultaneously using Pr 60 Energy saving control selection and the adjustable 5 points V F further energy saving effec...

Page 842: ...nt adjustment gain to fine tune the rotations per minute To reduce the rotations per minute to increase the compensation frequency set a larger value in Pr 674 To increase the rotations per minute to reduce the compensation frequency set a smaller value in Pr 674 Lower rotations per minute reduce the power consumption and higher rotations per minute increase the power consumption Pr Name Initial v...

Page 843: ... 7 5K or lower InitialvaluesfortheFR A820 00630 11K toFR A820 03160 55K FR A840 00310 11K toFR A840 01800 55K Initial value for the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 10 G100 DC injection brake operation frequency 3 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the operation frequency for the DC injection brake zero speed control and servo lock 9999 Op...

Page 844: ...ake operation frequency Press the STOP key on the operation panel Turning OFF of the STF STR signal 0 5 Hz or higher in Pr 10 Pr 10 setting Lower than 0 5 Hz in Pr 10 and 0 5 Hz or higher in Pr 13 0 5Hz Lower than 0 5 Hz in both Pr 10 and Pr 13 Pr 10 or Pr 13 setting whichever larger Set the frequency to 0 Hz Pr 13 setting or 0 5 Hz whichever larger Tab 5 304 DC injection brake operation frequency...

Page 845: ...l is turned ON DC injection brake will operate when the X13 signal is turned ON even while operating For the X13 signal input set 13 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 to assign the function Fig 5 329 When Pr 11 is set to 8888 I001559E NOTES Under Real sensorless vector control when the X13 signal turns ON while Pr 11 8888 the zero speed control is activated regardless of the Pr 850 Brake operation select...

Page 846: ...pplied motor setting Refer to page 5 438 However when an energy saving motor SF HR or SF HRCA is used change the Pr 12 setting as shown below Even if the setting value of Pr 12 is made larger braking torque will be limited so the output cur rent will be within the rated current of the inverter Inverter Pr 12 setting FR A820 00250 3 7K or lower FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower 4 FR A820 00340 5 5K FR A8...

Page 847: ...tartingfrequency setting whichever smaller during deceleration Inverter output voltage shutoff timing when Pr 850 2 Maximum time for the magnetic flux decay operation Regardless of the Pr 850 setting the magnetic flux decay output shutoff will operate immediately when the Magnetic flux decay output shutoff signal X74 is turned ON For the X74 signal set 74 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal ...

Page 848: ...ng the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure and online auto tuning during the start up When other output shutoff trigger inverter fault turning ON the MRS signal etc occurs during the magnetic flux decay operation the magnetic flux operation is terminated and the output is shut off immediately Unlike the MRS signal voltage is output during the magnetic flux decay output shutoff oper...

Page 849: ...nal position after the external force is removed To perform the position control this loop gain can be adjusted with Pr 422 Position control gain Pr 1298 Second position control gain Tab 5 306 Selection of pre excitation Control method Control mode Pr 802 Pr 1299 Pr 850 Deceleration stop LX ON X13 ON Pr 11 8888 V F control DC injection brake DC injection brake Advanced magnetic flux vector control...

Page 850: ... a start com mand input It must be confirmed that the motor running will not cause any safety problem before performing pre excitation Note that during the pre excitation operation a voltage is applied to the motor even with the FWD REV indicator OFF on the operation panel When offline auto tuning Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 1 11 101 is executed at the time of pre excitation operation pre exc...

Page 851: ...less vector control at the start Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 522 G105 Output stop frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop output shutoff 9999 No function I002843E Fig 5 333 Example for inverter output shutoff NOTE When the output stop function is valid Pr 522 9999 the DC injection brake zero speed con trol servo lock becomes invalid and the moto...

Page 852: ...vation of the restart function is recommended especially for a PM motor The output stop frequency function is disabled during PID control JOG operation power failure stop traverse function operation offline auto tuning orientation control position control torque control stop on contact control or machine analyzer operation Output stop function does not operate during reverse rotation deceleration ...

Page 853: ...frequency page 5 251 page 5 253 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description Start signal STF STR Refer to page 5 430 Stop operation 250 G106 Stop selection 9999 0 to 100 s STF signal Forward rotation start STR signal Reverse rotation start It will coast to stop after set time when the start signal is turned OFF 1000 s to 1100 s STF signal Start signal STR signal Forward reverse rotation signal...

Page 854: ...th motor rotation When Pr 250 9999 or 8888 acceleration deceleration is performed in accordance to the fre quency command until the output is shutoff by turning OFF the start signal When the restart signal is turned ON during the motor coasting the operation is resumed from Pr 13 Starting frequency Even with the setting of coasting to stop when the LX signal is turned ON the motor does not coast b...

Page 855: ...upplied only to the control circuit the reset operation when the power is supplied to the main circuit can be selected The initial value or setting range for the standard model The initial value or setting range for the separated converter type The initial value or setting range for the IP55 compatible model Available only with the standard model Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 30 ...

Page 856: ...ther than above 0 without the built in brake resistor P N 10 110 R S T P N 20 120 high duty brake resistor FR ABR R S T 1 101 10 6 FR ABR can be used with FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 00620 22K or lower P N 11 111 R S T P N 21 121 High power factor converter FR HC2 Power regeneration common converter FR CV P N 2 102 0 initial value Tab 5 308 FR A820 03160 55K or lower FR A840 01800 55K o...

Page 857: ...lt in brake resistor When using high duty brake resistor FR ABR FR A820 01250 22K or lower FR A840 00620 22K or lower Set Pr 30 1 11 21 Set Pr 70 as follows FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower 10 FR A820 00630 11K or higher FR A840 00310 11K or higher 6 When using brake unit FR BU2 FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher To use FR BU2 in combination with MT BR5 ...

Page 858: ... X11 FR HC2 con nection FR CC2 connection During the operation using RS 485 communication with the remote output and analog remote output functions enabled the X11 signal is used to store the status when the inverter is set to store the status before an instantaneous power failure Input the IPF signal instantaneous power failure detection signal of the FR HC2 or FR CC2 For the terminal to be used ...

Page 859: ... compatible models RDY negative logic initial setting RDYB RDB X10 ON Inverter output shutoff NO contact 1 Initial value of separated converter types RDY positive logic RDYA RDA X10 OFF Inverter output shutoff NC contact Tab 5 311 Selecting NO NC contact for X10 signal NOTES If the X10 signal is unassigned while Pr 30 2 FR HC2 FR CV connection or 10 or 11 DC feed ing mode 1 the MRS signal can be u...

Page 860: ...0 100orhigher theinverterresetisnotperformedwhenthepowerissupplied R L1 S L2 T L3 input to the main circuit When a communication option etc is used communication interruption due to the inverter reset can be avoided I002756E Fig 5 338 Regenerative overload NOTES When Pr 30 0 initial value 10 or 20 for FR A820 00630 11K or higher and FR A840 00310 11K or higher the RB display are disabled When the ...

Page 861: ...r supply such as batteries at the time of power failure Connect the AC power supply to the AC power supply connecting terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 and connect the DC power supply to the terminals P and N Also for the standard model remove the jumpers between terminal R L1 and R L11as well as between S L2 and S1 L21 and connect the terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 to the terminals P and N respectively O...

Page 862: ...p Pr 261 0 will occur and Y85 signal will turn OFF after stopping After turning ON the X71 signal operation is not possible even if the X70 signal is turned ON Set 71 to either of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Output Y85 DC feeding signal This will turn ON during power failure or undervoltage of the AC power supply It will turn OFF when the X71 signal turns ON or power restoration The Y85 signal will not turn ...

Page 863: ... 5 342 Operation example 2 at power failure when DC power is restored Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70 X71 STF STR Output frequency Hz Time AC power supply DC power supply ON ON ON ON ON ON Motor coasting Approx 200 ms Back up operation Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70 X71 STF STR Output frequency Hz Time AC power supply DC ON ON ON ON ON Motor coasting Approx 200 ms ...

Page 864: ...ower supply is connected to the R L1 S L2 and T L3 terminals during the DC feed ing with Pr 30 2 10 11 DC feeding an option fault E OPT will occur When set to Pr 30 2 10 11 20 21 DC feeding and operated by DC feeding detection of undervoltage E UVT and instantaneous power failure E IPF is not performed When DC power is switched on a larger inrush current flows than in AC power The number of power ...

Page 865: ...o 800 V Set the bus voltage level to operate the regeneration avoidance operation When the bus voltage level is set low it will be harder to generate overvoltage error but actual deceleration time will be longer Set the setting value higher than power supply voltage 400V Class 760VDC 884 G122 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 0 0 Disables regeneration avoidance due to bu...

Page 866: ...lue of Pr 883 will not get under DC bus voltage level The frequency will rise with operation of the regeneration avoidance function even at the time of no regenera tive status The stall prevention overvoltage oL will only operate during deceleration stopping the lower ing of output frequency but on the other hand the regeneration avoidance function will con stantly operate Pr 882 1 or operate only...

Page 867: ...d During deceleration when the frequency increases due to the regeneration avoidance operation and exceeds the limit value the limit value will be retained until the output frequency is reduced to be the half the Pr 885 setting When the frequency that have increased by the regeneration avoidance operation exceeds Pr 1 Maximum frequency it will be limited to the maximum frequency By setting to Pr 8...

Page 868: ...generation avoidance operation The regeneration avoidance function cannot decrease the actual deceleration time for the motor to stop The actual deceleration time is determined by the regenerative power consumption per formance so to decrease the deceleration time consider using a regeneration unit FR BU2 BU FR BU FR CV FR HC2 or brake resistor FR ABR etc When using regeneration unit FR BU2 BU FR ...

Page 869: ...crease the deceleration time or lower the setting value of Pr 661 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration is enabled with V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control speed control and vector control speed control Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 660 G130 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection 0 0 Without increased magne...

Page 870: ...nt preventive function will be disabled when Pr 662 0 NOTE When set to Pr 662 Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level overcurrent preventive function will operate at the setting value of Pr 22 Operates at Pr 622 when Pr 22 0 Parameters referred to Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level page 5 84 Pr 30 Regenerative function selection page 5 675 Pr 60 Energy saving control selection page 5 659 Pr 162...

Page 871: ...rror will occur more frequently when the load inertia is larger 247 G205 Constant power range slip compensation selection 9999 0 Do not perform slip compensation at constant output range frequency range higher than the frequency set in Pr 3 9999 Perform the slip compensation of the constant output range Rated slip Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency rated rotation speed 100 Synchroniz...

Page 872: ...rol and the encoder feed control 285 H416 Overspeed detection frequency 9999 0 to 30 Hz When the difference between the detected frequency and the output frequency exceeds the set value at the time of encoder feedback control an inverter fault E MB1 is generated 9999 Overspeed detection disabled 359 C141 852 C241 Encoder rotation direction 1 0 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation enco...

Page 873: ...d motor speed rated load If the setting is too large response becomes slow For example when the rated speed of a motor 4 poles is 1740 r min at 60 Hz Slip Nsp Synchronous speed Rated speed 1800 1740 60 r min Frequency equivalent to slip fsp Nsp Number of poles 120 60 4 120 2 Hz NOTES When the inverter is operated with Pr 144 0 10 110 it will cause E 1 to E 3 When set to Pr 144 102 104 106 108 numb...

Page 874: ...coder feedback control is not performed during the acceleration and deceleration to prevent the unstable phenomenon such as hunting Encoder feedback control is performed after the output frequency has reached set frequency speed feedback range once When following status occurs at the time of encoder feedback control operation inverter will not stop with an alarm and operate with output frequency o...

Page 875: ...eleration With 0 limit Motor speed is the droop compensation reference 11 Constantly droop control during operation With 0 limit 994 G403 Droop break point gain 9999 0 1 to 100 Set the droop amount to be changed as value of the rated motor frequency 9999 No function 995 G404 Droop break point torque 100 0 1 to 100 Set the torque when the droop amount is to be changed 679 G420 Second droop gain 999...

Page 876: ...r control the lowest frequency among 400 Hz Pr 1 and maximum motor frequency becomes the upper limit droop compensation frequency When Pr 288 0 to 2 or Advanced magnetic flux control When Pr 288 10 11 I001627E Fig 5 347 Droop control Droop compensation frequency Current for torque after filtering Rated motor frequency droop gain Rated torque current 100 Droop compensation frequency Current for tor...

Page 877: ...on reference 0 initial value Without droop control during acceleration deceleration Limit with 0 Hz Limit with 0 5 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control Rated motor frequency 10 Motor speed 1 Constantlydroopcontrolduring operation Rated motor frequency 11 Motor speed 2 Constantlydroopcontrolduring operation Do not limit reverse At the time of vector control PM sensorless vector control Ra...

Page 878: ...ignal also enables other second func tions The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each termi...

Page 879: ...quency of torque deviation speed deviation or converter output voltage deviation by the mechanical resonance with a measurement device etc set the frequency of 1 2 to 1 times the vibration frequency in Pr 654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency Setting vibrational frequency range can suppress the vibration better Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 653 G410 Speed smoothing control 0 0 to ...

Page 880: ... number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number To perform a parameter clear turn to and to perform all parameter clear turn it to and press initial value appears Parameter clear Turn to change the set value to Press to enter the setting and flicker alternately after parameters are cleared 앫 Turn to read another parameter 앫 Press to show the setting again 앫 Press twice to show the n...

Page 881: ...e destination inverter is other than the FR A800 series or when parameter copy is attempted after the parameter copy reading was stopped model error appears Refer to the parameter list on page A 5 for the availability of parameter copy When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected etc during parameter copy writing write again or check the setting values by parameter verificati...

Page 882: ...5 320 Reading the parameter settings of the inverter to the operation panel NOTE appears Why Parameter read error Perform the operation from step again Operation Connect the operation panel to the destination inverter Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn to parameter copy and press appears...

Page 883: ...ocedure on page 5 702 Move the operation panel to the inverter to be verified Screen at power ON The monitor display appears Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn to parameter copy Press appears Parameter verification Turn to change to setting value parameter copy verification mode Press Ve...

Page 884: ...emory in the inverter The USB memory mode is displayed and USB memory opera tions are possible I002762E Fig 5 351 Changes in USB memory copy operation states Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Faults history mode USB memory mode Copy the parameter setting from the inverter to the USB memory device Overwrite the inverter parameter setting onto the designated file in the USB memory de...

Page 885: ...gurator2 During password lock parameter copy and parameter verification cannot be performed refer to page 5 207 Operation Insert the USB memory into the copy source inverter USB memory mode Press to change to the USB memory mode Displaying the file selection screen Press three times to display file selection screen and press To overwrite files on USB memory display the file selection screen turn t...

Page 886: ...75K or higher or FR A840 02160 75K or higher When CP and 0 00 flicker alternately set the Pr 989 Parameter copy alarm release as shown below initial value After setting Pr 989 perform setting of Pr 9 Pr 30 Pr 51 Pr 56 Pr 57 Pr 61 Pr 70 Pr 72 Pr 80 Pr 82 Pr 90 to Pr 94 Pr 453 Pr 455 Pr 458 to Pr 462 Pr 557 Pr 859 Pr 860 and Pr 893 again When the destination inverter is other than the FR A800 series...

Page 887: ...e file number Turn to select the file number to be verified and press Parameter verification Turn to display the setting parameter copy verification mode and press appears Press Verification of the parameter settings copied to the USB memory and the parameter settings of the verification destination inverter is started It takes about 15 seconds to verify all the settings During verification flicke...

Page 888: ...in order If is pressed with parameters that have been changed the parameter settings can be changed as they are Parameter numbers are no longer displayed in the list when they are returned to their initial values Other changed parameters appear by turning is returned to when the last changed parameter is displayed Tab 5 326 Initial value change list NOTES Calibration parameters C0 Pr 900 to C7 Pr ...

Page 889: ...ter therefore the fault output will not be retained Fault or alarm indication When a protective function activates the operation panel displays a fault indication Operation restart method While a protective function is activated the inverter output is kept shutoff Reset the inverter to restart the operation Tab 6 1 Behaviour when a protective function is activated Displayed item Description Error ...

Page 890: ...ult occurs Refer to page 6 18 of the Instruction Manual for faults Switch the power OFF once then switch it ON again Turn ON the reset signal RES for 0 1 s or more If the RES signal is kept ON Err appears flickers to indicate that the inverter is in a reset status Fig 6 1 Resetting the inverter by using the operation panel I002451E Fig 6 2 Resetting the inverter by switching the power supply off a...

Page 891: ...ed and accumulated again from 0 I002453E Fig 6 4 Displaying the alarm list and the status values for the time of the alarm Monitor mode Faults history mode Parameter setting mode Faults history 1 Operation for displaying faults history Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial The latest fault is ended by Output frequency Flickering Output current Flickering Flickering Faults histor...

Page 892: ...e parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn until faults history clear appears Press to read the present set value initial value appears Faults history clear Turn to change the set value to Press to start clear and flicker alternately after parameters are cleared 앫 Turn to read another parameter 앫 Press to show the setting again 앫 Press...

Page 893: ...aults history 6 3 HOLD Operation panel lock 6 9 LOCD Password locked 6 9 to Er1 to Er4 Er8 Parameter write error 6 9 to to rE1 to rE4 rE6 to rE8 Copy operation error 6 10 Err Error 6 12 Tab 6 4 Error message Operation panel indication Name Refer to page OL Stall prevention overcurrent 6 13 oL Stall prevention overvoltage 6 14 Rb Regenerative brake pre alarm 6 14 TH Electronic thermal relay functio...

Page 894: ...eceleration or stop 18 H12 6 20 E OV1 Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration 32 H20 6 20 E OV2 Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed 33 H21 6 21 E OV3 Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop 34 H22 6 21 E THT Inverter overload trip electronic thermal relay function 48 H30 6 22 E THM Motor overload trip electronic thermal relay function 49 H31 6 22 E FIN H...

Page 895: ...arameter storage device fault 179 HB3 6 28 E CPU CPU fault 192 HC0 6 28 E 5 245 HF5 E 6 246 HF6 E 7 247 HF7 E CTE Operation panel power supply short circuit RS 485 terminal power supply short circuit 193 HC1 6 29 E P24 24 V DC power fault 194 HC2 6 29 E CDO Abnormal output current detection 196 HC4 6 29 E IOH Inrush current limit circuit fault 197 HC5 6 30 E SER Communication fault inverter 198 HC...

Page 896: ...lt 213 HD5 6 33 E MB2 214 HD6 E MB3 215 HD7 E MB4 216 HD8 E MB5 217 HD9 E MB6 218 HDA E MB7 219 HDB E EP Encoder phase fault 220 HDC 6 33 E MP Magnetic pole position unknown 222 HDE 6 33 E IAH Abnormal internal temperature 225 HE1 6 34 E LCI 4 mA input fault 228 HE4 6 34 E PCH Pre charge fault 229 HE5 6 34 E PID PID signal fault 230 HE6 6 34 E 1 Option fault 241 HF1 6 35 E 2 242 HF2 E 3 243 HF3 E ...

Page 897: ... Parameter write selection is set to disable parameter write 앫 Overlapping range has been set for the frequency jump 앫 Overlapping range has been set for the adjustable 5 points V F 앫 The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication 앫 IPM parameter initialization was attempted while Pr 72 25 Check point 앫 Check the Pr 77 Parameter write selection setting Refer to page 5 203 앫 Check the setting...

Page 898: ...USB memory device operation 앫 A copy operation writing was performed while the PLC function was in the RUN state 앫 A copy operation was attempted for a password locked project Check point 앫 Check if the USB memory device is operating 앫 Check if the PLC function is in the RUN state 앫 Check if the project data is locked with a password Corrective action 앫 Perform the operation after the USB memory d...

Page 899: ...meter verification 앫 The data in the inverter are different from the data in the USB memory device or the personal computer FR Configurator2 Check point 앫 Check the parameter setting of the source inverter against the setting of the destination inverter Corrective action 앫 Continue the verification by pressing SET key Perform parameter verification again Refer to page 5 703 앫 The operation panel F...

Page 900: ... to page 5 704 Operation panel indication rE8 Name No PLC function project file Description The specified PLC function project file does not exist in the USB memory device Check point 앫 Check that the file exists in the USB memory device 앫 Check that the folder name and the file name in the USB memory device is correct Corrective action The data in the USB memory device may be damaged Operation pa...

Page 901: ...e output current output torque under Real sensorless vector control or vector control of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level etc this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level...

Page 902: ...Check point 앫 Check if the brake resistor duty is not too high 앫 Check that the Pr 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr 70 settings are correct Corrective action 앫 Set the deceleration time longer 앫 Check the Pr 30 and Pr 70 settings Refer to page 5 675 Operation panel indication TH FR LU 08 TH Name Electronic thermal relay function pre alarm Description Appears if the cumulative value of the...

Page 903: ... is necessary Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr 989 Parameter copy alarm release Operation panel indication SA FR LU 08 Name Safety stop Description Appears when safety stop function is activated during output shutoff Refer to page 2 54 Check point 앫 Check if an emergency stop device is activated 앫 Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when n...

Page 904: ...r Check point Check if a USB device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector Corrective action 앫 If a device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector remove the device 앫 Setting Pr 1049 USB host reset 1 or inverter reset clears the UF indication Operation panel indication HP1 to HP3 to FR LU 08 HP1 to HP3 Name Home position return error Descripti...

Page 905: ...tops due to a fault low rotation speed or different operation from the setting of Pr 244 Cooling fan operation selection Check point Check the cooling fan for a failure Corrective action The fan may be faulty Please contact your sales representative Operation panel indication FN2 FR LU 08 FN2 Name Internal fan alarm IP55 compatible models only Description FN2 appears on the operation panel when th...

Page 906: ...rol 앫 Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity PM sensorless vector control 앫 Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting PM sensorless vector control Corrective action 앫 Set the acceleration time longer Shorten the downward acceleration time of the lift 앫 If E OC1 always appears at start disconnect the motor once and restart the inverter I...

Page 907: ...tor capacity PM sensorless vector control 앫 Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting PM sensorless vector control Corrective action 앫 Keep the load stable 앫 Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur 앫 Lower the stall prevention operation level Activate the fast response current limit operation Refer to page 5 84 앫 Check RS 485 termi...

Page 908: ...ctor control 앫 Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward during torque control under Real sensorless vector control 앫 Choose inverter and motor capacities that match PM sensorless vector control 앫 Input a start command after the motor stops Alternatively use the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start functio...

Page 909: ...ring stall prevention operation 10 11 Refer to page 5 84 앫 Set the acceleration deceleration time longer Under vector control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control the output torque can be increased However sudden acceleration may cause an overshoot in speed resulting in an occurrence of overvoltage Operation panel indication E OV3 FR LU 08 OV During Dec Name Regenerative overvoltage trip durin...

Page 910: ... L relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat which is caused by overload or reduced cooling capability during low speed operation When the cumulative heat value reaches 85 of the Pr 9 Electronic thermal O L relay setting pre alarm TH is output When the accumulated value reaches the specified value the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output Check point 앫 Check the m...

Page 911: ...Name Undervoltage Standard models and IP55 compatible models only Description If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases the control circuit will not perform normal functions In addition the motor torque will be insufficient and or heat generation will increase To prevent this if the power supply voltage decreases to about 150 V AC 300 V AC for the 400 V class or below this function shu...

Page 912: ... the PM sensorless vector control test operation Refer to page 5 60 앫 Also check that the stall prevention overcurrent warning OL or the stall prevention overvoltage warning oL countermeasure is taken Operation panel indication E SOT FR LU 08 Motor step out Name Loss of synchronism detection Description The inverter trips when the motor operation is not synchronized This function is only available...

Page 913: ...rter s output side load side is lost Check point 앫 Check the wiring Check that the motor is normally operating 앫 Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter 앫 Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting PM sensorless vector control Corrective action 앫 Wire the cables properly 앫 Input a start command after the motor stops Alte...

Page 914: ...ption FRA8TP is not installed 앫 Appears when the switch for manufacturer setting of the plug in option is changed 앫 Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr 296 Password lock level 0 or 100 Check point 앫 Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R L1 S L2 or T L3 when a high power factor converter FR HC2 or power regeneration common converter FR CV is connect...

Page 915: ...act your sales representative Operation panel indication E 16 to E 20 to FR LU 08 Fault 16 to Fault 20 Name User definition error by the PLC function Description The protective function is activated by setting 16 to 20 in the special register SD1214 for the PLC function The inverter trips when the protective function is activated The protective function is activated when the PLC function is enable...

Page 916: ...peration panel or the parameter unitsecurely Operation panel indication E RET FR LU 08 Retry count excess Name Retry count excess Description The inverter trips if the operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set in Pr 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence Check point Find the cause of the fault occurrence Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding thi...

Page 917: ...U 08 24 VDC power fault Name 24 V DC power fault Description When the 24 V DC power output from the PC terminal is shorted this function shuts off the power output At this time all external contact inputs switch OFF The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal To reset it use the operation panel or switch power OFF then ON again Check point 앫 Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal...

Page 918: ...on from the RS 485 terminals The inverter also trips if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr 336 RS 485 communication check time interval Check point Check the RS 485 terminal wiring Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS 485 terminals properly Operation panel indication E AIE FR LU 08 Analog input fault Name Analog input fault Description The inverter trips when a 30 mA or...

Page 919: ... instruction manual for causes and countermeasures Please contact your sales representative for the manual 앫 When not using the safety stop function short across terminals S1 and PC and across S2 and PC with shorting wires Refer to page 2 54 Operation panel indication E PBT FR LU 08 PBT fault E 13 Intrnl circuit fault Name Internal circuit fault Description The inverter trips when an internal circ...

Page 920: ...r orientation control encoder feedback control or vector control This protective function is not available in the initial status Check point 앫 Check for the encoder signal loss 앫 Check that the encoder specifications are correct 앫 Check for a loose connector 앫 Check that the switch setting of a vector control compatible option is correct 앫 Check that the power is supplied to the encoder Alternativ...

Page 921: ... cause of the fault occurrence Corrective action Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly Operation panel indication E EP FR LU 08 Encoder signal loss Name Encoder phase fault Description The inverter trips when the rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the encoder during offline auto tuning This protective function is not avail...

Page 922: ...r Name Pre charge fault Description 앫 The inverter trips when the pre charge time exceeds Pr 764 Pre charge time limit 앫 The inverter trips when the measured value exceeds Pr 763 Pre charge upper detection level during pre charging 앫 This function is available when Pr 764 and Pr 763 are set This protective function is not available in the initial status Check point 앫 Check that the Pr 764 setting ...

Page 923: ...ng Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option Operation panel indication E 11 FR LU 08 Fault 11 Name Internal circuit fault Description The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the speed command and the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward during torque control under Real sensorless v...

Page 924: ...1 is disconnected A DC reactor FR HEL is not connected Securely fit a jumper across P and P1 When using a DC reactor FR HEL remove the jumper across P to P1 and then connect the DC reactor Connect the DC reactor securely when required according to the capacity 2 26 2 91 Input signal Start signal is not input Check the start command source and input a start signal PU operation mode FWD key REV key ...

Page 925: ...ue boost setting is improper Increase the Pr 0 setting by 0 5 increments while observing the rotation of a motor If that makes no difference decrease the setting 5 652 Pr 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set Check the Pr 78 setting Set Pr 78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one direction 5 281 Pr 79 Operation mode selection setting is incorrect Select the operation mode...

Page 926: ...function or power failure stop function has been activated Performing overload operation during input phase loss may cause voltage insufficiency and that may result in detection of power failure Set Pr 872 Input phase loss protection selection 1 input phase failure protection active Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function and power failure stop function Reduce the ...

Page 927: ...is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped 5 312 Resonance occurs carrier frequency Change Pr 72 PWM frequency selection setting Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical system or a motor 5 219 Set a notch filter 5 121 Auto tuning...

Page 928: ...eck the insulation of the motor 7 7 Parameter Setting Pr 71 Applied motor setting is incorrect Check the Pr 71 Applied motor setting 5 434 Motor current is large Refer to 6 6 11 Motor current is too large 6 43 Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Main Circuit Phase sequence of output terminals U V and W is incorrect Connect phase sequence of the output cables terminal U V W to ...

Page 929: ... E OC첸 is likely to occur 2 36 5 314 Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Parameter Setting Acceleration deceleration time is too short Increase the acceleration deceleration time 5 233 Torque boost Pr 0 Pr 46 Pr 112 setting is improper under V F control so the stall prevention function is activated Increase decrease the ...

Page 930: ...e encoder cable to the enclosure using a metal P clip or U clip 2 67 Parameter Setting Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large Under V F control change the Pr 19 Base frequency voltage setting approximately by 3 5 654 Pr 80 Motor capacity and Pr 81 Number of motor poles are not appropriate for the motor capacity under Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control ve...

Page 931: ...it Power is not input Input the power 2 21 Front cover Operation panel is not properly connected to the inverter Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely 2 7 Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Parameter Setting Torque boost Pr 0 Pr 46 Pr 112 setting is improper under V F control so the stall prevention function is activated Increase decrease the Pr 0 Torque boo...

Page 932: ... activated Increase decrease the Pr 0 Torque boost setting value by 0 5 increments so that stall prevention does not occur 5 652 V F pattern is improper when V F control is performed Pr 3 Pr 14 Pr 19 Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr 3 Base frequency Use Pr 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage for example rated motor voltage 5 654 Change Pr 14 Load pattern selection according to ...

Page 933: ...e selection setting Check the Pr 77 setting 5 203 Key lock mode is enabled by the Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock operation selection setting Check the Pr 161 setting 5 198 Operation mode and a writing device do not correspond Check Pr 79 Pr 338 Pr 339 Pr 550 and Pr 551 and select an operation mode suitable for the purpose 5 263 5 274 앫 Pr 72 PWM frequency selection was attempted to be set to 25...

Page 934: ...Check first when you have a trouble Protective functions 6 46 ...

Page 935: ...Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection Consult us for periodic inspection Check and clean the cooling system Clean the air filter etc Check the tightening and retighten The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration temperature changes etc Check and tighten them Tighten them according to the specified tighten ing torque Refer to ...

Page 936: ... earth ground terminal 4 Contact the manufacturer 2 Check for loose screws and bolts 4 Retighten 3 Check for overheat traces on the parts 4 Contact the manufacturer 4 Check for stain 4 Clean Conductors cables 1 Check conductors for distortion 4 Contact the manufacturer 2 Check cable sheaths for breakage and deterioration crack discoloration etc 4 Contact the manufacturer Transformer reactor Check ...

Page 937: ... development 4 Contact the manufacturer Aluminum electrolytic capacitor 1 Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and deformation trace 4 Contact the manufacturer 2 Visual check and judge by the life check of the control circuit capacitor Refer to page 7 6 4 Cooling system Cooling fan 1 Check for unusual vibration and noise 4 Replace the fan 2 Check for loose screws and bolts 4 Fix with the fan co...

Page 938: ... not indicate At the time of electric continuity the measured value is several Ω to several tens of Ω If all measured values are almost the same although these values are not constant depending on the module type and tester type the modules are without fault Fig 7 1 Module device numbers and terminals to be checked I001305E Tester polarity Result Tester polarity Result Converter module D1 R L1 P D...

Page 939: ...er gentlywipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol NOTES Do not use solvent such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol as these will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off The display etc of the operation panel and the parameter unit are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol Therefore avoid using them for cleaning ...

Page 940: ...tic warning is output when the life span of each part is near its end It gives an indi cation of replacement time The life warning output can be used as a guideline for life judgment Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity refer to page 5 225 for details Part name Estimated lifespan Description Cooling fan 10 years Replace as required Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years Repl...

Page 941: ...ush the hooks from above and remove the fan cover Disconnect the fan connectors Remove the fan I001306E Fig 7 2 Removal of the fan cover I002454E Fig 7 3 Removal of the fan FR A820 00105 1 5K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K FR A820 00340 5 5K to 01540 30K FR A840 00170 5 5K to 00770 30K FR A820 01870 37K or higher FR A840 00930 37K to 03610 132K The number of cooling fans differs accor...

Page 942: ...the fan connectors Fig 7 4 Orientation of the fan I002456E I002455E Fig 7 5 Connection of the fan AIRFLOW FR A820 00105 1 5K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K FR A820 00340 5 5K to 00770 15K FR A840 00170 5 5K to 00380 15K FR A820 01540 30K FR A840 00770 30K FR A820 00930 18 5K 01250 22K FR A840 00470 18 5K 00620 22K FR A820 01870 37K 02330 45K FR A840 00930 37K to 01800 55K FR A820 0316...

Page 943: ...I002457E I002458E I002459E Fig 7 6 Reinstall the fan cover I002809E Fig 7 7 Removal of the fan FR A840 04320 160K or higher FR A820 01870 37K or higher FR A840 00930 37K to 03610 132K FR A820 00340 5 5K to 01540 30K FR A840 00170 5 5K to 00770 30K FR A820 00105 1 5K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K Insert hooks into holes Insert hooks until you hear a click sound The number of cooling f...

Page 944: ...crack Check for external crack discoloration liquid leakage etc Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80 of the rating Relays To prevent a contact fault etc relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times switching life Main circuit fuse inside the inverter FR A840 04320 160K or higher A fuse is used...

Page 945: ...s cannot be removed Slide down the control circuit terminal block to remove it Be careful not to bend the pins of the inverter s control circuit connector reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws I002460E Fig 7 9 Removal of the terminal block I002461E Fig 7 10 Reinstallation of the terminal block NOTE Before starting inverter replacement switch power OFF wai...

Page 946: ... the inverter output side When the inverter to motor wiring length is large especially in the 400 V class small capacity models the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line to line leakage current Therefore choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter it is recommended to use the terminal AM ...

Page 947: ...e phases is 10 or lower of the rated inverter current Output side power P2 U V W and across U and V V and W Digital power meter for inverter or electrodynamic type single phase wattmeter P2 W21 W22 2 wattmeter method or 3 wattmeter method Output side power factor Pf2 Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor Converter output Across P and N Moving coil type such as tester Invert...

Page 948: ...rts insidethe instrument leading to burnout In this case use an approximate effective value type When the setting of Pr 195 ABC1 terminal function selection is the positive logic A digital power meter designed for inverter can also be used to measure Fault signal Across A1 and C1 Across B1 and C1 Moving coil type such as tester Continuity check Normal Fault Across A1 and C1 Discontinuity Continuit...

Page 949: ...ntmeasuring sideorwhenthe metercontains aPTonthe voltage measurementside anerrorwill alsobeproduced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and PT I001301E I001302E Fig 7 12 Differences when measuring power with different instruments Example of measuring inverter input power Example of measuring inverter output power 3 wattmeter method Electro dynamometer type 2 wattmeter method Electro dyn...

Page 950: ...lt meter A needle type tester cannot be used to measure the output side voltage as it indicates a value much greater than the actual value A moving iron type meter indicates an effective value which includes harmonics and therefore the value is larger than that of the fundamental wave Thevaluemonitoredontheoperationpanelistheinverter controlledvoltageitself Hence thatvalue is accurate and it is re...

Page 951: ...er is used always use an effective value detection type A mean value detection type produces a large error and may indicate an extremely smaller value than the actual value The value monitored on the operation panel is accurate if the output frequency varies and it is rec ommended to monitor values provide analog output using the operation panel Examples of measured value differences produced by d...

Page 952: ...r during deceleration for example the converter output voltage rises to nearly 400 V DC to 450 V DC 800 V DC to 900 V DC for the 400 V class maximum 7 2 7 Measurement of inverter output frequency In the initial setting of the FM type inverter a pulse train proportional to the output frequency is out put across the pulse train output terminals FM and SD of the inverter This pulse train output can b...

Page 953: ...500 V DC megger 7 2 9 Pressure test Do not conduct a pressure test Deterioration may occur I002463E Fig 7 14 Insulation resistance test NOTES Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter For the continuity test of the control circuit use a tester high resista...

Page 954: ...Measurement of main circuit voltages currents and powers Precautions for maintenance and inspection 7 20 ...

Page 955: ...haracteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C ND initial setting 150 60 s 200 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C HD 200 60 s 250 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C Rated voltage Three phase 200 to 240 V Regenerative braking Brake transistor Built in FR BU2 Option Maximumbraketorque 150 torque 3 ED 100 torque 3 ED 100 torque 2...

Page 956: ...rounding air temperature 50 C ND initial setting 150 60 s 200 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C HD 200 60 s 250 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C Rated voltage Three phase 380 to 500 V Regenerative braking Brake transistor Built in FR BU2 Option Maximum brake torque 100 torque 2 ED 20 torque continuous 10 torque continuous FR AB...

Page 957: ...erature 50 C ND initial setting 150 60 s 200 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C HD 200 60 s 250 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C Rated voltage Three phase 380 to 500 V Regenerative braking Brake transistor FR BU2 Option Maximum brake torque 10 torque continuous FR ABR when the option is used Power supply Rated input AC voltage f...

Page 958: ...be changed within the setting range However the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about 2 Value by the built in brake resistor Value for the ND rating The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage The impedance at the power supply side including those of the input reactor and cables affects the rated in...

Page 959: ...0M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S InertiamomentJ 10 4 kg m2 67 5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850 Noise 75 dB 80 dB 85 dB Cooling fan with thermal protector Voltage Single phase 200 V 50 Hz Single phase 200 V to 230 V 60 Hz Three phase 200 V 50 Hz Three phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Input 36 55 W 0 26 0 32 A 22 28 W 0 11 0 13 A 55 71 W 0 39 0 39 A 100 156 W 0 47 0 53 A 85 130W 0 46 0 52A...

Page 960: ...o an increased workload but the cooling fan can be used as it is When preparing a thermal relay at the user side use the recommended thermal setting Motor type SF V5RUH첸K 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 Applicable inverter model FR A840 첸K ND rating 2 2 2 2 3 7 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Rated output kW 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 Rated current A 4 2 5 8 8 8 14 5 18 5 27 ...

Page 961: ...0 dB 95 dB Cool ing fan Voltage Three phase 200 V 50 Hz 200 V 60 Hz 220 V 60 Hz 400 V class cooling fan is available upon order Input W 50 Hz 750 400 400 400 400 400 750 750 60 Hz 750 750 750 750 750 1500 1500 Approx mass kg 610 610 660 870 890 920 1170 1630 Common specifications Surrounding air temperature humidity 10 to 40 C non freezing 90 RH or less non condensing Structure Totally enclosed fo...

Page 962: ... 7 5 5 7 5 11 Continuous characteristics Rated output kW 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 5 5 0 7 0 Rated torque Nm 2 39 4 78 7 16 9 55 16 70 23 86 33 41 Rated speed r min 2000 Max speed r min 3000 Instantaneouspermissiblespeed r min 3450 Maximum torque Nm 4 78 9 56 14 32 19 09 33 41 47 73 66 82 Inertia moment J 10 4 kg m2 6 6 7 0 13 7 14 9 20 0 21 2 45 5 48 9 85 6 89 0 120 0 160 0 Recommended ratio of load iner...

Page 963: ...468E Tab 8 9 Torque characteristics during current synchronization operation 2000 100 150 200 100 120 3000 Torque Instantaneous 3 s Shortduration 60s Continuous Speed r min 2000 150 200 100 3000 Torque Speed r min Instantaneous 3 s Shortduration 60s Continuous 2000 100 150 200 100 120 3000 Torque Speed r min Instantaneous 3 s Shortduration 60s Continuous 2000 100 150 200 100 3000 Torque Speed r mi...

Page 964: ...Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit Four digit BCD or 16 bit binary when used with option FR A8AX Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self holding input 3 wire input can be selected Input signals twelve terminals Low speed operation command Middle speed operation command High speed operation command Second function selection Termina...

Page 965: ...nk overheat Instantaneous power failure Undervoltage Input phase loss Stall prevention stop Loss of synchronism detection Brake transistor alarm detection Output side earth ground fault overcurrent Output short circuit Output phase loss External thermal relay operation PTC thermistor operation Option fault Communication option fault Parameter storage device fault PU disconnection Retry count exces...

Page 966: ... 8 4 1 Inverter outline dimension drawings FR A820 00046 0 4K FR A820 00077 0 75K I002469E Fig 8 1 Dimensions FR A820 00046 0 4K FR A820 00077 0 75K 6 95 110 7 5 245 7 5 260 1 5 7 5 5 D1 D Inverter model D D1 FR A820 00046 0 4K 110 20 FR A820 00077 0 75K 125 35 Unit mm 2 6 hole ...

Page 967: ...K 00038 0 75K 00052 1 5K 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K I002470E Fig 8 2 Dimensions FR A820 00105 1 5K 00167 2 2K 00250 3 7K FR A840 00023 0 4K 00038 0 75K 00052 1 5K 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K 150 5 140 1 5 245 7 5 260 45 5 7 5 6 12 5 125 FR A840 00023 0 4K to 00052 1 5K are not provided with a cooling fan Unit mm 2 6 hole FAN ...

Page 968: ...E_B Fig 8 3 Dimensions FR A820 00340 5 5K 00490 7 5K 00630 11K FR A840 00170 5 5K 00250 7 5K 00310 11K 00380 15K 6 195 220 7 5 H1 7 5 H2 H 2 3 D1 12 5 D Unit mm Inverter model H H1 H2 D D1 FR A820 00340 5 5K 00490 7 5K FR A840 00170 5 5K 00250 7 5K 260 245 1 5 170 84 FR A820 00630 11K FR A840 00310 11K 00380 15K 300 285 3 190 101 5 2 6 hole FAN ...

Page 969: ...FR A800 8 15 FR A820 00770 15K 00930 18 5K 01250 22K FR A840 00470 18 5K 00620 22K I002472E Fig 8 4 Dimensions FR A820 00770 15K 00930 18 5K 01250 22K FR A840 00470 18 5K 00620 22K 250 230 10 10 1 5 380 10 400 2 3 190 93 3 10 Unit mm 2 10 hole ...

Page 970: ...n drawings Specifications 8 16 FR A820 01540 30K FR A840 00770 30K I002473E_D Fig 8 5 Dimensions FR A820 01540 30K FR A840 00770 30K 10 325 270 10 550 10 530 3 2 15 520 15 195 17 Unit mm 2 10 hole 4 20 hole for hanging ...

Page 971: ...3610 132K W 12 W1 10 H1 15 H 3 2 D 18 H2 18 D1 Unit mm 2 12 hole 4 d hole FAN Inverter model W W1 H H1 H2 d D D1 FR A820 01870 37K 02330 45K FR A840 00930 37K 01160 45K 01800 55K 435 380 550 525 514 25 250 24 FR A820 03160 55K 465 410 700 675 664 25 250 22 FR A820 03800 75K 04750 90K 465 400 740 715 704 24 360 22 FR A840 02160 75K 02600 90K 465 400 620 595 584 24 300 22 FR A840 03250 110K 03610 13...

Page 972: ... 8 18 FR A840 04320 160K 04810 185K I002811E Fig 8 7 Dimensions FR A840 04320 160K 04810 185K 12 200 498 10 985 15 1010 3 2 380 13 984 13 22 200 Unit mm 3 12 hole 4 16 hole FAN Always connect a DC reactor FR HEL which is available as an option ...

Page 973: ...R A840 05470 220K 06100 250K 06830 280K I002812E Fig 8 8 Dimensions FR A840 05470 220K 06100 250K 06830 280K 300 680 12 300 13 984 13 1010 3 2 380 13 984 13 22 Unit mm 3 12 hole 4 16 hole FAN Always connect a DC reactor FR HEL which is available as an option ...

Page 974: ... 22 20 Outline drawing Panel cutting dimension drawing Unit mm 3 2 2 M3 screw Panel 120 Parameter unit connection cable FR CB2첸 option Operation panel connection connector FR ADP option Denotes the space required to connect an optional parameter unit connection cable FR CB2첸 When using another cable leave the space required for the cable specification Air bleeding hole ...

Page 975: ...KG D KL XB F F N QK KA Q B A R L A A Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Sliding distance Frame leg viewed from above Section AA Direction of cooling fan wind Mark for earthing grounding Earth ground terminal M5 A B G2 G1 U V W For cooling fan A B For motor U V W Earthing grounding terminal M4 For thermal protector G1 G2 φ56 KG XB F F N 90 KA 110 B A R L 50 E E M D KL 8 C H I A A T...

Page 976: ... 78 93 117 117 115 115 139 139 487 533 KL KP 220 210 231 242 256 256 330 330 352 352 546 592 L 425 477 478 542 580 735 779 790 828 909 932 M 175 200 230 256 256 310 310 335 335 390 428 ML 212 242 268 268 N 150 180 180 180 218 254 298 285 323 361 342 XB 56 63 70 89 89 108 108 121 121 133 149 Q 60 60 80 80 QK 45 45 63 63 R 168 5 193 200 239 258 323 345 351 5 370 5 425 5 432 S 24j6 28j6 28j6 38k6 38k...

Page 977: ...r cooling fan Main terminal box V U B2 B1 W G1 G2 C B A Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan For brake B1 B2 For motor U V W For thermal protector G1 G2 For cooling fan A B Earthing grounding terminal M4 Earthing grounding terminal M4 5 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening 5 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manu...

Page 978: ...212 242 268 268 N 150 180 180 180 218 254 298 285 323 361 342 X 15 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XB 56 63 70 89 89 108 108 121 121 133 149 Z 9 12 12 12 12 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 18 5 18 5 Shaft end Q 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 110 110 140 140 QK 40 45 45 63 63 90 90 90 90 110 110 R 168 5 193 200 239 258 323 345 351 5 370 5 425 5 432 S 24j6 28j6 28j6 38k6 38k6 42k6 42k6 48k6 55m6 60m6 65m6 T 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 10 11 1...

Page 979: ...round terminal M5 Mark for earthing grounding W U T S LN LZ KD KL IE A A LA LL KB LR LG LE QK Q LC LB B B D Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Direction of cooling fan wind Earth ground terminal M5 Mark for earthing grounding Section BB Section AA A B G2 G1 U V W For cooling fan A B For motor U V W Earthing grounding terminal M4 For thermal protector G1 G2 W S T U A A LN LZ L A IE...

Page 980: ...2 LL 402 432 448 484 522 625 669 690 728 823 5 LN 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 LZ 12 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 18 5 18 5 18 5 18 5 18 5 Shaft end LR 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 110 110 140 Q 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 110 110 140 QK 40 45 45 63 63 90 90 90 90 110 S 24j6 28j6 28j6 38k6 38k6 42k6 42k6 48k6 55m6 60m6 T 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 10 11 U 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 7 W 8 8 8 10 10 12 12 14 16 18 Terminal screw size U V W M6 M6...

Page 981: ... D KB A LN LZ A 1 2 LA KD KL φ22 KP Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Direction of cooling fan wind Terminal box for cooling fan Main termi nal box Earth ground terminal M5 Mark for earthing grounding Section BB 5 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening Section AA V U B2 B1 W G1 G2 C B A Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan For b...

Page 982: ... Shaft end LR 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 Q 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 QK 40 45 45 63 63 90 90 S 24j6 28j6 28j6 38k6 38k6 42k6 42k6 T 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 U 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 W 8 8 8 10 10 12 12 Terminal screwsize U V W M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 A B C M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 B1 B2 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 G1 G2 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 Tab 8 14 Dimensions table Unit mm NOTES Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft h...

Page 983: ...wings 1500r min series L A R B KA Q QK K2 K2 K1 F F XB N K J E E S W M H KG C T U G Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Directionof cooling fan wind Terminal box for cooling fan 4 Z hole This hole is not used PF4 Class B screw L A R B K2 K1 K K2 XB F F N KA Q QK S W T U H KG G C 1 0 J E E M 0 Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Directionof cooling fan wind Terminal ...

Page 984: ...0 K 130 130 130 130 130 160 175 K1 168 168 181 181 181 160 428 K2 50 50 40 40 40 75 80 L 1471 1471 1619 1619 1619 1799 2084 M 486 486 560 560 560 560 636 N 449 449 449 449 499 607 870 R 482 5 482 5 569 5 569 5 569 5 588 5 741 Z 24 24 24 24 24 24 28 XB 168 168 190 190 190 190 216 KA 157 5 157 5 210 5 210 5 210 5 214 5 306 KG 635 635 705 705 705 745 825 Shaft end size Q 140 140 170 170 170 170 170 Q...

Page 985: ...M CF 300 Hz 400 Hz PID control Turn the X14 signal ON to enable PID control The X14 signal does not need to be assigned PID control is available by the Pr 128 setting The PID pre charge function and dancer control are added Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Turn the CS signal ON to restart CS signal assignment not required Restart is enabled with the Pr 57 setting only Number of ...

Page 986: ...series parameter settings can be easily copied to the FR A800 series by using the setup software FR Configurator2 Not supported by the setup software FR SW3 SETUP or older PU 앫 FR DU07 4 digit LED 앫 FR PU07 앫 FR DU08 5 digit LED 앫 FR LU08 LCD operation panel 앫 FR PU07 Some functions such as parameter copy are unavailable 앫 FR DU07 is not supported Plug in option Dedicated plug in options not inter...

Page 987: ...ties To use the same mounting holes of the FR A540 11K or 15K for the A800 series the optional installation interchange attachment FR AAT is necessary The heatsink protrusion attachment is not interchangeable The enclosure cut dimensions of the FR A520 3 7K or lower FR A520 30K FR A520 55K or higher FR A540 3 7K or lower FR A540 11K and 15K and FR A540 75K or higher are not compatible NOTE For the...

Page 988: ...6 kHz FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher Current synchronization operation 2 kHz Pr 72 0 to 5 6 kHz Pr 72 6 to 9 10 kHz Pr 72 10 to 13 14 kHz Pr 72 14 or 15 6 kHz in a low speed range of 10 kHz or higher Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure No startup waiting time Using the regeneration avoidance function or retry function together is recommended Startup wai...

Page 989: ...mmunication option is installed parameter clear lock release during password lock Pr 297 9999 can be performed only from the communication option Available when the IPM motor MM CF series is used and the low speed range high torque char acteristic is enabled Pr 788 9999 initial value Reading and writing via the PU connector are available Symbols in the table indicate parameters that operate when t...

Page 990: ... 26 Multi speed setting speed 6 1A 9A 0 Δ Δ 27 Multi speed setting speed 7 1B 9B 0 Δ Δ 28 Multi speed input compensation selection 1C 9C 0 x x 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection 1D 9D 0 x x 30 Regenerative function selection 1E 9E 0 31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0 x x 32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0 x x 33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0 x x 34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0 x x 35 Frequency jump 3A 23...

Page 991: ...Reference value at acceleration 3E BE 0 x x x x x x 63 Reference value at deceleration 3F BF 0 x x x x x x 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 40 C0 0 x x x x x x x x 65 Retry selection 41 C1 0 x x 66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 42 C2 0 x x x x x x x 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence 43 C3 0 x x 68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0 x x 69 Retry count display erase 4...

Page 992: ... x x x x x x 103 V F2 second frequency voltage 03 83 1 x x x x x x x x 104 V F3 third frequency 04 84 1 x x x x x x x x 105 V F3 third frequency voltage 05 85 1 x x x x x x x x 106 V F4 fourth frequency 06 86 1 x x x x x x x x 107 V F4 fourth frequency voltage 07 87 1 x x x x x x x x 108 V F5 fifth frequency 08 88 1 x x x x x x x x 109 V F5 fifth frequency voltage 09 89 1 x x x x x x x x 110 Third...

Page 993: ...fferential time 22 A2 1 x x x x 135 Electronic bypass sequence selection 23 A3 1 x x x x x x 136 MC switchover interlock time 24 A4 1 x x x x x x 137 Start waiting time 25 A5 1 x x x x x x 138 Bypass selection at a fault 26 A6 1 x x x x x x 139 Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation 27 A7 1 x x x x x x 140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 28 A8 1 x x 141 Backlash ...

Page 994: ...taneous power failure selection 02 82 2 x x 163 First cushion time for restart 03 83 2 x x x x x x x 164 First cushion voltage for restart 04 84 2 x x x x x x x 165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 05 85 2 x x x x x x x 166 Output current detection signal retention time 06 86 2 167 Output current detection operation selection 07 87 2 168 Parameter for manufacturer setting Do not set 16...

Page 995: ...A4 2 x 232 Multi speed setting speed 8 28 A8 2 Δ Δ 233 Multi speed setting speed 9 29 A9 2 Δ Δ 234 Multi speed setting speed 10 2A AA 2 Δ Δ 235 Multi speed setting speed 11 2B AB 2 Δ Δ 236 Multi speed setting speed 12 2C AC 2 Δ Δ 237 Multi speed setting speed 13 2D AD 2 Δ Δ 238 Multi speed setting speed 14 2E AE 2 Δ Δ 239 Multi speed setting speed 15 2F AF 2 Δ Δ 240 Soft PWM operation selection 30...

Page 996: ...leration start 46 C6 2 x x 263 Subtraction starting frequency 47 C7 2 x x 264 Power failure deceleration time 1 48 C8 2 x x 265 Power failure deceleration time 2 49 C9 2 x x 266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 4A CA 2 x x 267 Terminal 4 input selection 4B CB 2 x 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 4C CC 2 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting Do not set 270 Stop on contact l...

Page 997: ...e train I O selection 63 E3 2 x x x 292 Automatic acceleration deceleration 64 E4 2 x x x x x x 293 Acceleration deceleration separate selection 65 E5 2 x x x x x x 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 66 E6 2 x x 295 Frequency change increment amount setting 67 E7 2 296 Password lock level 68 E8 2 x 297 Password lock unlock 69 E9 2 298 Frequency search gain 6A EA 2 x x x x x x 299 Rotation direction det...

Page 998: ...lection 12 92 3 x 319 DO6 output selection 13 93 3 x 320 RA1 output selection 14 94 3 x 321 RA2 output selection 15 95 3 x 322 RA3 output selection 16 96 3 x 323 AM0 0V adjustment 17 97 3 x 324 AM1 0mA adjustment 18 98 3 x 326 Motor temperature feedback reference 1A 9A 3 x x x x x x x x x 329 Digital input unit selection 1D 9D 3 x x x 331 RS 485 communication station number 1F 9F 3 332 RS 485 comm...

Page 999: ... x x x 351 Orientation speed 33 B3 3 x x x x x x 352 Creep speed 34 B4 3 x x x x x x 353 Creep switchover position 35 B5 3 x x x x x x 354 Position loop switchover position 36 B6 3 x x x x x x 355 DC injection brake start position 37 B7 3 x x x x x x 356 Internal stop position command 38 B8 3 x x x x x x 357 Orientation in position zone 39 B9 3 x x x x x x 358 Servo torque selection 3A BA 3 x x x ...

Page 1000: ...4 3 x x 385 Frequency for zero input pulse 55 D5 3 x x 386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 56 D6 3 x x 393 Orientation selection 5D DD 3 x x x x x x x x 394 Number of machine side gear teeth 5E DE 3 x x x x x x x x 395 Number of motor side gear teeth 5F DF 3 x x x x x x x x 396 Orientation speed gain P term 60 E0 3 x x x x x x x x 397 Orientation speed integral time 61 E1 3 x x x x x x x x 398 O...

Page 1001: ...x x x x 428 Command pulse selection 1C 9C 4 x x x x x x x 429 Clear signal selection 1D 9D 4 x x x x x x x 430 Pulse monitor selection 1E 9E 4 x x x x x x x 434 IP address 1 22 A2 4 435 IP address 2 23 A3 4 446 Model position control gain 2E AE 4 x x x x x x x 447 Digital torque command bias 2F AF 4 x x x x x x x 448 Digital torque command gain 30 B0 4 x x x x x x x 450 Second applied motor 32 B2 ...

Page 1002: ... digits 49 C9 4 x x x x x x x 474 Fifth target position upper 4 digits 4A CA 4 x x x x x x x 475 Sixth target position lower 4 digits 4B CB 4 x x x x x x x 476 Sixth target position upper 4 digits 4C CC 4 x x x x x x x 477 Seventh target position lower 4 digits 4D CD 4 x x x x x x x 478 Seventh target position upper 4 digits 4E CE 4 x x x x x x x 479 Eighth target position lower 4 digits 4F CF 4 x...

Page 1003: ...cation error execution waiting time 00 80 5 501 Communicationerroroccurrence count display 01 81 5 x 502 Stop mode selection at communication error 02 82 5 503 Maintenance timer 1 03 83 5 x x x 504 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 04 84 5 x 505 Speed setting reference 05 85 5 516 S pattern time at a start of acceleration 10 90 5 x 517 S pattern time at a completion of acceleration 11 91...

Page 1004: ...ime carrying over times 40 C0 5 x x x 569 Second motor speed control gain 45 C5 5 x x x x x x x x x 570 Multiple rating setting 46 C6 5 x x 571 Holding time at a start 47 C7 5 x x x 573 4 mA input check selection 49 C9 5 x x x 574 Second motor online auto tuning 4A CA 5 x x x x x 575 Output interruption detection time 4B CB 5 x x x x 576 Output interruption detection level 4C CC 5 x x x x 577 Outp...

Page 1005: ...ion 09 89 6 x x x x 610 PID measured value input selection 0A 8A 6 x x x x 611 Acceleration time at a restart 0B 8B 6 x x x x 635 Cumulative pulse clear signal selection 23 A3 6 636 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor 24 A4 6 637 Control terminal option Cumulative pulse division scaling factor 25 A5 6 638 Cumulative pulse storage 26 A6 6 639 Brake opening current selection 27 A7 6 x x x x x 6...

Page 1006: ...operation selection 3C BC 6 x x x x x x 661 Magnetic excitation increase rate 3D BD 6 x x x x x x 662 Increased magnetic excitation current level 3E BE 6 x x x x x x x 663 Control circuit temperature signal output level 3F BF 6 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 41 C1 6 x x x x 668 Power failure stop frequency gain 44 C4 6 673 SF PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 49 C9 6 x x x x...

Page 1007: ...x x 711 Motor Ld decay ratio 0B 8B 7 x x x x x x x x x 712 Motor Lq decay ratio 0C 8C 7 x x x x x x x x x 717 Starting resistance tuning compensation 11 91 7 x x x x x x x x x 721 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width 15 95 7 x x x x x x x x x 724 Motor inertia exponent 18 98 7 x x x x x x x x 725 Motor protection current level 19 99 7 x x x x x x x x 738 Second motor induced volta...

Page 1008: ... x x 758 Second PID differential time 3A BA 7 x x x x 759 PID unit selection 3B BB 7 x x x x 760 Pre charge fault selection 3C BC 7 x x x x 761 Pre charge ending level 3D BD 7 x x x x 762 Pre charge ending time 3E BE 7 x x x x 763 Pre charge upper detection level 3F BF 7 x x x x 764 Pre charge time limit 40 C0 7 x x x x 765 Second pre charge fault selection 41 C1 7 x x x x 766 Second pre charge en...

Page 1009: ...808 Forward rotation speed limit speed limit 08 88 8 x x x x x x x 809 Reverse rotation speed limit reverse side speed limit 09 89 8 x x x x x x x 810 Torque limit input method selection 0A 8A 8 x x x x x 811 Set resolution switchover 0B 8B 8 x 812 Torque limit level regeneration 0C 8C 8 x x x x x 813 Torque limit level 3rd quadrant 0D 8D 8 x x x x x 814 Torque limit level 4th quadrant 0E 8E 8 x x...

Page 1010: ... 8 x x 838 DA1 terminal function selection 26 A6 8 839 DA1 output filter 27 A7 8 840 Torque bias selection 28 A8 8 x x x x x x x x 841 Torque bias 1 29 A9 8 x x x x x x x x 842 Torque bias 2 2A AA 8 x x x x x x x x 843 Torque bias 3 2B AB 8 x x x x x x x x 844 Torque bias filter 2C AC 8 x x x x x x x x 845 Torque bias operation time 2D AD 8 x x x x x x x x 846 Torque bias balance compensation 2E A...

Page 1011: ...etection 41 C1 8 x x x 866 Torque monitoring reference 42 C2 8 x x 867 AM output filter 43 C3 8 868 Terminal 1 function assignment 44 C4 8 x x 869 Current output filter 45 C5 8 870 Speed detection hysteresis 46 C6 8 872 Input phase loss protection selection 48 C8 8 873 Speed limit 49 C9 8 x x x x x x x x x 874 OLT level setting 4A CA 8 x x x x 875 Fault definition 4B CB 8 x x 876 Thermal protector...

Page 1012: ...unit cost 60 E0 8 897 Power saving monitor average time 61 E1 8 898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 62 E2 8 x 899 Operation time rate estimated value 63 E3 8 C0 900 FM CA terminal calibration 5C DC 1 x C1 901 AM terminal calibration 5D DD 1 x C2 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1 x C3 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1 x 125 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting ga...

Page 1013: ...og input 19 99 9 x C30 926 Terminal 6 bias frequency speed 1A 9A 9 x C31 926 Terminal 6 bias speed 1A 9A 9 x C32 927 Terminal 6 gain frequency speed 1B 9B 9 x C33 927 Terminal 6 gain speed 1B 9B 9 x C34 928 Terminal 6 bias command torque 1C 9C 9 x x x x x C35 928 Terminal 6 bias torque 1C 9C 9 x x x x x C36 929 Terminal 6 gain command torque 1D 9D 9 x x x x x C37 929 Terminal 6 gain torque 1D 9D 9...

Page 1014: ...DA 9 991 PU contrast adjustment 5B DB 9 x 992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 5C DC 9 994 Droop break point gain 5E DE 9 x x x x x x 995 Droop break point torque 5F DF 9 x x x x x x 997 Fault initiation 61 E1 9 x x x 998 PM parameter initialization 62 E2 9 999 Automatic parameter setting 63 E3 9 x x 1000 Parameter for manufacturer setting Do not set 1002 Lq tuning target curren...

Page 1015: ...lection 3ch 1D 9D A 1030 Analog source selection 4ch 1E 9E A 1031 Analog source selection 5ch 1F 9F A 1032 Analog source selection 6ch 20 A0 A 1033 Analog source selection 7ch 21 A1 A 1034 Analog source selection 8ch 22 A2 A 1035 Analog trigger channel 23 A3 A 1036 Analog trigger operation selection 24 A4 A 1037 Analog trigger level 25 A5 A 1038 Digital source selection 1ch 26 A6 A 1039 Digital so...

Page 1016: ... x x x x x x x x x x 1106 Torque monitor filter 06 86 B 1107 Running speed monitor filter 07 87 B 1108 Excitation current monitor filter 08 88 B 1109 PROFIBUS communication command source selection 09 89 B x 1110 PROFIBUS format selection 0A 8A B 1113 Speed limit method selection 0D 8D B x x x x x x x 1114 Torque command reverse selection 0E 8E B x x x x x x x 1115 Speed control integral term clea...

Page 1017: ... AC B x x x x 1145 Second PID deviation limit 2D AD B x x x x 1146 Second PID signal operation selection 2E AE B x x x x 1147 Second output interruption detection time 2F AF B x x x x 1148 Second output interruption detection level 30 B0 B x x x x 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 31 B1 B x x x x 1150 User parameters 1 32 B2 B x 1151 User parameters 2 33 B3 B x 1152 User parameters 3 34...

Page 1018: ... 1173 User parameters 24 49 C9 B x 1174 User parameters 25 4A CA B x 1175 User parameters 26 4B CB B x 1176 User parameters 27 4C CC B x 1177 User parameters 28 4D CD B x 1178 User parameters 29 4E CE B x 1179 User parameters 30 4F CF B x 1180 User parameters 31 50 D0 B x 1181 User parameters 32 51 D1 B x 1182 User parameters 33 52 D2 B x 1183 User parameters 34 53 D3 B x 1184 User parameters 35 5...

Page 1019: ... x x x x x x x 1222 First positioning acceleration time 16 96 C x x x x x x x 1223 First positioning deceleration time 17 97 C x x x x x x x 1224 First positioning dwell time 18 98 C x x x x x x x 1225 First positioning sub function 19 99 C x x x x x x x 1226 Second positioning acceleration time 1A 9A C x x x x x x x 1227 Second positioning deceleration time 1B 9B C x x x x x x x 1228 Second posit...

Page 1020: ... 2C AC C x x x x x x x 1245 Sixth positioning sub function 2D AD C x x x x x x x 1246 Seventh positioning acceleration time 2E AE C x x x x x x x 1247 Seventhpositioningdeceleration time 2F AF C x x x x x x x 1248 Seventh positioning dwell time 30 B0 C x x x x x x x 1249 Seventh positioning sub function 31 B1 C x x x x x x x 1250 Eighth positioning acceleration time 32 B2 C x x x x x x x 1251 Eigh...

Page 1021: ... C x x x x x x x 1271 Thirteenth positioning deceleration time 47 C7 C x x x x x x x 1272 Thirteenth positioning dwell time 48 C8 C x x x x x x x 1273 Thirteenth positioning sub function 49 C9 C x x x x x x x 1274 Fourteenth positioning acceleration time 4A CA C x x x x x x x 1275 Fourteenth positioning deceleration time 4B CB C x x x x x x x 1276 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 4C CC C x x x x ...

Page 1022: ...1292 Position control terminal input selection 5C DC C x x x x x x x 1293 Roll feeding mode selection 5D DD C x x x x x x x 1294 Position detection lower 4 digits 5E DE C x x x x x x x 1295 Position detection upper 4 digits 5F DF C x x x x x x x 1296 Position detection selection 60 E0 C x x x x x x x 1297 Position detection hysteresis width 61 E1 C x x x x x x x 1298 Second position control gain 6...

Page 1023: ... Output power 0 01kW 0 1kW unsigned R H000F Input terminal status R H0010 Output terminal status R H0011 Load meter 0 1 unsigned R H0012 Motor excitation current 0 01A 0 1A unsigned R H0013 Position pulse 1 unsigned R W H0014 Cumulative energization time 1h unsigned R H0015 reserved H0016 Orientation status 1 unsigned R H0017 Actual operation time 1h unsigned R H0018 Motor load factor 0 1 unsigned...

Page 1024: ... 2nd PID set point 0 1 unsigned R W H0045 2nd PID measured value 0 1 unsigned R W H0046 2nd PID deviation 0 1 unsigned R W H0047 Cumulative pulse 1 signed R H0048 Cumulative pulse carrying over times 1 signed R H0049 Cumulative pulse control terminal option 1 signed R H004A Cumulative pulse carrying over times control terminal option 1 signed R H004B to H004F reserved H0050 Integrated power on tim...

Page 1025: ... min signed R H0206 Motor rotation 16 31bit H0207 Load meter 0 15bit 0 1 signed R H0208 Load meter 16 31bit H0209 Current position 2 lower 16 bits 1 signed R W H020A Current position 2 upper 16 bits H020B Watt hour meter 1kWh step 0 15bit 1kWh unsigned R H020C Watt hour meter 1kWh step 16 31bit H020D Watt hour meter 0 1 0 01kWh step 0 15bit 0 1 0 01kWh unsigned R H020E Watt hour meter 0 1 0 01kWh ...

Page 1026: ...ion individual operation is applied The direct command mode is available only for individual operation The dwell time is invalid Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 1220 B100 Target position speed selection 0 0 Target position and maximum speed Point table 1 Target position Direct command Maximum speed Point table 2 Target position and maximum speed Direct command Pr 1220 setting Targe...

Page 1027: ...20 1 When Pr 1220 2 0 0 Deceleration time of point table 1 Target position of direct command Position command speed Accelerationtime of point table 1 Target position Servo ON LX STF RH RM RL Direct command sent Time Maximum speed of point table 1 OFF OFF ON ON ON 0 0 ON ON OFF OFF ON Deceleration time of Pr 8 Time Maximum speed of direct command Accelerationtime of Pr 7 Position command speed Targ...

Page 1028: ...nicationerror and the operation continues Pr Name Setting range Minimum setting increments Initial value 500 Communication error execution waiting time 0 to 999 8 s 0 1 s 0 s 002852E Fig A 1 Recognition of a communication error depending on Pr 500 setting NOTES The communication option error E 1 is not included in the targets of Pr 500 Operations at communication error occurrences can be selected ...

Page 1029: ...nge Minimum setting increments Initial value 501 Communication error occurrence count display 0 1 0 I002852E Fig A 2 Communication error count NOTE Communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory The error count is stored in EEPROM only once per hour If power reset or inverter reset is performed Pr 501 setting will be the one that is last stored to EEPROM depending on the reset t...

Page 1030: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 46 A 5 EC Declarations of Conformity A 5 1 Low Voltage Directive ...

Page 1031: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 47 ...

Page 1032: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 48 ...

Page 1033: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 49 ...

Page 1034: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 50 ...

Page 1035: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 51 A 5 2 EMC Directive ...

Page 1036: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 52 ...

Page 1037: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 53 ...

Page 1038: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 54 ...

Page 1039: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 55 ...

Page 1040: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 56 ...

Page 1041: ......

Page 1042: ... Fax 375 0 17 393 0081 INEA RBT d o o Bosnia and Herzegovina Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8116 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 AKHNATON Bulgaria 4 Andrei Ljapchev Blvd PO Box 21 BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 817 6000 Fax 359 0 2 97 44 06 1 INEA CR Croatia Losinjska 4 a HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Fax 385 0 1 36 940 03 AutoCont C S S R O Czech Republic Kafkova 1853 3 CZ 702 00...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for FR-A800

Yolink YS6704-UC User Manual preview
YS6704-UC
Brand: Yolink Pages: 27
York H3CE180 Installation Instructions Manual preview
H3CE180
Brand: York Pages: 13
Samsung AW0700 Manual De Instrucciones preview
AW0700
Brand: Samsung Pages: 12
Samsung MC18AC2-09 Owner'S Instructions Manual preview
MC18AC2-09
Brand: Samsung Pages: 24
Samsung AM080FXWANR Service Manual preview
AM080FXWANR
Brand: Samsung Pages: 295
Samsung AW07A(G)2NBA/DE/EA Manual De Instrucciones preview
AW07A(G)2NBA/DE/EA
Brand: Samsung Pages: 16
Öhlins RXF36 m.2 Workshop Manual preview
RXF36 m.2
Brand: Öhlins Pages: 10
+GF+ MSA 2 CF Instruction Manual preview
MSA 2 CF
Brand: +GF+ Pages: 36
Taffio CH7102-FCX9 Quick Start Manual preview
CH7102-FCX9
Brand: Taffio Pages: 8
GE AE1CD20DM Dimensions And Installation Information preview
AE1CD20DM
Brand: GE Pages: 2
Montech 508816 Assembly Instructions Manual preview
508816
Brand: Montech Pages: 17
Shenzhen NAS-PD02Z Instruction Manual preview
NAS-PD02Z
Brand: Shenzhen Pages: 13
Tobii Pro Pro Spectrum User Manual preview
Pro Spectrum
Brand: Tobii Pro Pages: 34
Raptor Series MAGNUM RT Series Manual preview
MAGNUM RT Series
Brand: Raptor Series Pages: 6
Vega SOLITRAC 31 Quick Setup Manual preview
SOLITRAC 31
Brand: Vega Pages: 28
GAMOH KingCarrier KCL-1R Instruction Manual preview
KingCarrier KCL-1R
Brand: GAMOH Pages: 3
BURY CC 9040 Specification preview
CC 9040
Brand: BURY Pages: 2
Baja Designs 447575 Instructions preview
447575
Brand: Baja Designs Pages: 5

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands